971 KiB
1 | Reference | ID | Tags | SupportReference | Quote | Occurrence | Note |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
2 | front:intro | gtn1 | 0 | Introduction to RomansPart 1: General IntroductionOutline of the book of Romans
Who wrote the book of Romans?The Apostle Paul wrote the book of Romans and many other books in the New Testament. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was part of a strict Jewish religious group called the Pharisees. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire. What is the book of Romans about?Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26). In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1–11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12–16), How should the title of this book be translated?Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural ConceptsWhat are the titles used to refer to Jesus?In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stone of Stumbling and Rock of Offense (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12). How should theological terms in Romans be translated?Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four Gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6). If your language doesn’t have similar words, you can develop short phrases to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.” Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us. What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.” In 11:1–9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]]) Part 3: Important Translation IssuesWhat did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1, 2, 39; 9:1; 12:5, 17; 15:17; and 16:3, 7, 9, 10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages. These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh, but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ. Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]]) How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?The Scriptures use such words to indicate any one of some various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Romans?For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.
The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the book of Romans.
(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) | |||
3 | 1:intro | hn5n | 0 | Romans 1 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this ChapterThe gospelThis chapter refers to the contents of the book of Romans as “the gospel” (1:2). Romans is not a Gospel as are Matthew, Mark, Luke, or John, which are historical accounts of the life of Jesus. Instead, chapters 1–8 present the biblical gospel, which is the good news of salvation. The gospel contains the following true ideas: everyone has sinned, Jesus died for our sins, and Jesus came back to life again so that we might live for his glory and receive eternal life when we die. Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of GodIn this chapter Paul explains that no one has an excuse for sinning. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the eternal punishment of God. The requirement for this punishment was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter“God gave them over”Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God allows men to pursue their own sinful desires; he does not force them to act sinfully. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |||
4 | 1:1 | x3em | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | Παῦλος | 1 | In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” | |
5 | 1:1 | e417 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | δοῦλος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, κλητὸς ἀπόστολος | 1 | These two phrases give further information about Paul. He describes himself as being someone whom God has given the position and authority of being Christ’s servant and apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person whom God has made a servant of Christ Jesus, and whom he has called to represent him” | |
6 | 1:1 | v5b9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Jesus called to be an apostle and set apart” | |
7 | 1:1 | ukts | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesusset him apart. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach the gospel of God” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” | |
8 | 1:1 | ji90 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel from God” | |
9 | 1:2 | cu3r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ὃ | 1 | Here, which indicates that what follows is further information about “the gospel of God” mentioned in the previous verse. Paul is emphasizing that “the gospel of God” originated from the holy Scriptures, which also come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel” | |
10 | 1:3 | lab1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | This phrase gives us further information about “the gospel of God.” Paul means that the message of God’s promised good news is about God’s Son, “Christ Jesus”, as mentioned in 1:1. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the gospel about his Son” | |
11 | 1:3 | lk5q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Son is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. | |
12 | 1:3 | y2uy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ | 1 | Here, from a seed of David is an idiom that refers to a descendant of David. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who was born a descendant of David” | |
13 | 1:3 | rj9f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | Here, according to the flesh is an idiom meaning “with reference to physical descent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “according to natural descent” | |
14 | 1:4 | nhz7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει κατὰ Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν | 1 | In this verse, Paul places these phrases in the order he wants to emphasize. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, as in the UST. | |
15 | 1:4 | at5s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τοῦ ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “whom God designated as the Son of God” | |
16 | 1:4 | cp80 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Son of God is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. | |
17 | 1:4 | h32u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁρισθέντος Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν δυνάμει | 1 | Here, in power could refer to: (1) the means by which God designated Jesus as the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated the Son of God by means of power” (2) a new level of power God gave to the Son of God. Alternate translation: “who was designated as the powerful Son of God” | |
18 | 1:4 | m89w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | Πνεῦμα ἁγιωσύνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe God’s Spirit that is characterized by holiness. This refers to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. | |
19 | 1:4 | js9m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of resurrection, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by being resurrected from the dead ones” | |
20 | 1:4 | h97z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | νεκρῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase translated of dead ones refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from among dead people” | |
21 | 1:4 | zvql | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | νεκρῶν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the place from where Jesus was resurrected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from death” or “from among the dead ones” | |
22 | 1:4 | brej | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, our refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
23 | 1:5 | ww9a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ οὗ | 1 | Here, whom refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through Jesus” | |
24 | 1:5 | jr9e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δι’ οὗ ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and apostleship, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he who acted kindly toward us and made us his apostles” | |
25 | 1:5 | mosg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐλάβομεν | 1 | Here, we is exclusive, and your language may require you to mark this form. It could refer to: (1) Paul and other apostles, as in the UST. (2) Paul speaking about himself in a plural form. Alternate translation: “I received” | |
26 | 1:5 | mv5n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς | 1 | Here, for introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Jesus made Paul and other people his apostles. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of” | |
27 | 1:5 | krzj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to faithfully obey Jesus among all the Gentiles” | |
28 | 1:5 | cf3g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως | 1 | Here, obedience of faith could refer to: (1) obedience that is characterized by trust in God. Alternate translation: “for obedience by trusting in God” or “obedience that comes from trusting in God” (2) obedience that results from trusting in God. Alternate translation: “faith that results in obedience” | |
29 | 1:5 | eem9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν | 1 | Here, the Gentiles could refer to: (1) the nations. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer to all the apostles and retained it in your translation. Alternate translation: “among all people groups” (2) non-Jewish people groups. Use this interpretation if you interpreted we to refer only to Paul and translated it as “I”. Alternate translation: “among all non-Jewish people” | |
30 | 1:5 | rd3v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἐλάβομεν χάριν καὶ ἀποστολὴν εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “we received grace and apostleship for the sake of his name, for obedience of the faith among all the Gentiles” | |
31 | 1:5 | sxc7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, name could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus” (2) Jesus’ reputation. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Jesus’ fame” | |
32 | 1:6 | xurz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν οἷς | 1 | Here, whom refers to “the Gentiles” who were mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated “the Gentiles” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “among the nations” or “among the Gentiles” | |
33 | 1:6 | sks2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμεῖς | 1 | In this letter, with four exceptions, the words you and “your” are plural and refer to the recipients of this letter, who are the believers in Rome (See 1:7). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers in Christ at Rome” | |
34 | 1:6 | qq9z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | κλητοὶ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe called ones who were called by Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “ones called by Jesus Christ” | |
35 | 1:7 | z85a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | πᾶσιν τοῖς οὖσιν ἐν Ῥώμῃ | 1 | In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, and they would name those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “To all of you who are in Rome” | |
36 | 1:7 | zfwq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the adjective beloved as a noun in order to describe the church at Rome. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are loved of God” | |
37 | 1:7 | rkdh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἀγαπητοῖς Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the beloved who are loved by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “loved by God” | |
38 | 1:7 | v8bl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” | |
39 | 1:7 | ys4e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show his gracious acts to you and make you feel peaceful” | |
40 | 1:7 | d8pa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | The word Father here is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus and the relationship between God and believers. Alternate translation: “our Father God and the Lord Jesus, the Christ” | |
41 | 1:7 | j61d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | Πατρὸς ἡμῶν | 1 | When Paul writes our here, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “who is the Father of us Christians” | |
42 | 1:8 | yrau | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | πρῶτον μὲν εὐχαριστῶ τῷ Θεῷ μου διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ. | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Because your faith is being proclaimed throughout the whole world, I first want to thank my God through Jesus Christ” | |
43 | 1:8 | totr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | πρῶτον μὲν | 1 | First here indicates that Paul has finished his introduction to the letter, and what follows is the beginning of the content of the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first thing I want to say is” | |
44 | 1:8 | tdsj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῷ Θεῷ μου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form my God to express that he belongs to God. Paul does not mean that he owns God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God I belong to” or “the God that owns me” | |
45 | 1:8 | bphf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way you trust in Christ” | |
46 | 1:8 | efqs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that other believers are proclaiming how great the faith of the Roman believers is. Alternate translation: “other people are proclaiming your faith” | |
47 | 1:8 | k7qf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ | 1 | Here, the whole world is an exaggeration that refers to all the parts of the world that were familiar to Paul and his readers, particularly the Roman Empire. Paul is not referring to every place on the planet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “across the known world” or “wherever the Roman Empire is” | |
48 | 1:9 | c7pa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that he thanks God for the Roman believers. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” | |
49 | 1:9 | twht | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | μάρτυς & μού ἐστιν ὁ Θεός, ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὡς ἀδιαλείπτως μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses and make a new sentence, if you need to do so. Alternate translation: “God is my witness how I continually make mention of you. I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” | |
50 | 1:9 | dx6p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | μάρτυς & μού & ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | This phrase gives further information about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my witness, and I serve him in my spirit in the gospel of his Son” | |
51 | 1:9 | ll1e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μάρτυς & μού | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of witness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who testifies about me” | |
52 | 1:9 | ydnc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ πνεύματί μου | 1 | Here, spirit refers to the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Paul means that he serves God with complete devotion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “with my whole heart” or “wholeheartedly” | |
53 | 1:9 | ih0v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ | 1 | Here, in indicates the means by which Paul served God and gospel refers specifically to proclaiming the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by proclaiming the gospel” | |
54 | 1:9 | o66d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel that is about God’s Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the gospel about his Son” | |
55 | 1:9 | r2l5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Υἱοῦ | 1 | Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. | |
56 | 1:9 | f9p2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ἀδιαλείπτως | 1 | Here, continually is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently Paul prayed for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I regularly” or “I habitually” | |
57 | 1:9 | vtuq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μνείαν ὑμῶν ποιοῦμαι | 1 | Here, making mention is an idiom for praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am … praying for you” | |
58 | 1:10 | mdc8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | πάντοτε ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν μου, δεόμενος | 1 | This phrase means the same thing as “I continually make mention of you” in the previous verse. Paul uses them to emphasize how intensely he prays that God will allow him to visit the church at Rome. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase for the similar passage in the previous verse and in this verse provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in all my prayers, I beg God” | |
59 | 1:10 | oi0x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | πάντοτε | 1 | Here, the word always is an exaggeration that figuratively expresses the frequency of Paul’s prayers to God for the church at Rome. Paul does not mean that he spends all of his time praying for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “frequently” | |
60 | 1:10 | b5wy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τῷ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God wills for me” or “because God wants me” | |
61 | 1:11 | ki6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that this is a reason clause. Paul is indicating why he constantly prays to visit the church at Rome in 1:9–10. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am always requesting this because” | |
62 | 1:11 | gjdu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἰδεῖν ὑμᾶς | 1 | Paul uses see to describe not only seeing the Christians in Rome, but also visiting them and spending time with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” | |
63 | 1:11 | b23b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he wants to visit the believers at Rome. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” | |
64 | 1:12 | pnnm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν | 1 | Here, and that is gives further information about why Paul wants to share “some spiritual gift” with the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “namely” or “specifically” | |
65 | 1:12 | ux1x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | συνπαρακληθῆναι ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to mutually encourage each other” | |
66 | 1:12 | ddtm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | διὰ τῆς ἐν ἀλλήλοις πίστεως, ὑμῶν τε καὶ ἐμοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the trust in Jesus that both he and his readers shared. Paul means that they should mutually encourage each other because they have a mutual faith in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by both you and I sharing with one another how we trust in God” or “through talking about our common Christian faith” | |
67 | 1:12 | e6py | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated faith in 1:5 | |
68 | 1:13 | yi1f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐ θέλω δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν | 1 | Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I definitely want you to be informed” | |
69 | 1:13 | rwzn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀγνοεῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to not know” | |
70 | 1:13 | u1cq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | Although the term brother is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” | |
71 | 1:13 | zvrj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ ἐκωλύθην ἄχρι τοῦ δεῦρο | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers will know that until now means “even at the present time.” He does not mean that he was no longer hindered at the moment he wrote these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but I have been hindered and still am hindered now” | |
72 | 1:13 | b92o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐκωλύθην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God hindered me” | |
73 | 1:13 | gnu7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἵνα τινὰ καρπὸν σχῶ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, fruit could refer to: (1) people believing in the gospel as a result of Paul’s preaching, which would connect this verse to the idea in 1:15. Alternative translation: “so that I might lead people to salvation among you also” (2) strengthening the believers in Rome, in which case this would have the same meaning as “some spiritual, gracious gift” in 1:11. Alternative translation: “so that I might strengthen you also” | |
74 | 1:14 | s4bm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὀφειλέτης εἰμί | 1 | Paul speaks of himself as if he were a debtor who owed money to people who were not Jews, such as Greeks and barbarians. Paul means that he was obligated to preach the gospel to non-Jews because God had commanded him to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation, “I am obliged to preach the gospel” | |
75 | 1:14 | j2sz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism | Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις | 1 | Here Paul uses Greeks and barbarians to represent all the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of Gentiles” | |
76 | 1:14 | lio6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism | σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις | 1 | Here Paul uses wise ones and foolish ones to represent all types of people among the Gentiles referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all types of people among the Gentiles” | |
77 | 1:14 | q728 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | Ἕλλησίν τε καὶ βαρβάροις, σοφοῖς τε καὶ ἀνοήτοις | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is obligated to preach the gospel to every kind of Gentile. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “to each and every kind of Gentile” or “to every single non-Jewish person” | |
78 | 1:15 | h9zv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὕτως | 1 | So here indicates that this a reason clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” | |
79 | 1:16 | oa6m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates the reason why Paul is eager to proclaim the gospel in Rome. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am eager to do this because” | |
80 | 1:16 | mm2f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι | 1 | Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am proud” | |
81 | 1:16 | nvkv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | οὐ & ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον | 1 | Here, gospel refers specifically to the preaching of the gospel that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to preach the gospel” | |
82 | 1:16 | f5x9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δύναμις γὰρ Θεοῦ ἐστιν εἰς σωτηρίαν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel as the powerful way that God saves people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression Alternate translation: “for it is the powerful way that God saves” | |
83 | 1:16 | sz5b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς σωτηρίαν | 1 | Here, for indicates that salvation is the result of the gospel. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “that results in the salvation” | |
84 | 1:16 | merb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς σωτηρίαν παντὶ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for saving everyone” | |
85 | 1:16 | htqe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” | |
86 | 1:16 | dwtm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι | 1 | Paul is speaking of Jewish people and Greek people in general, not of one particular Jew or Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “both to the Jewish people first and to the Greek people” | |
87 | 1:16 | u8on | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον | 1 | The phrase the Jew first means that the Jewish people were the first people to hear the gospel. Paul does not mean that the Jew is better or has a high status than the Greek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “both to the Jews, who first heard the gospel,” | |
88 | 1:16 | al16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἕλληνι | 1 | Here, the Greek refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the non-Jew” | |
89 | 1:17 | of98 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows is the reason why the gospel is the power of God that leads to salvation, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The gospel can save everyone who believes because” | |
90 | 1:17 | wfsc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it reveals the righteousness of God” | |
91 | 1:17 | h38h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἀποκαλύπτεται | 1 | Paul speaks about the righteousness of God as if it were an object that could be revealed. He means that people learn about the righteousness of God when someone proclaims the gospel to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “when people preach the gospel, those who hear it learn about the righteousness of God” | |
92 | 1:17 | qr31 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul is using the possessive form of God that could refer to: (1) righteousness that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the righteousness from God” (2) righteousness that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “God’s righteousness” | |
93 | 1:17 | gsl5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way in which God causes people to become righteous” | |
94 | 1:17 | ii3m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐν αὐτῷ | 1 | The pronoun it here refers to “the gospel” that was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the gospel” | |
95 | 1:17 | jl9i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν | 1 | Here, from faith to faith describes how the righteousness of God is revealed. It is an idiom that could mean: (1) completely by faith alone. Alternate translation: “by faith from beginning to end” or “through faith from first to last” (2) by the faith that all believers share, in the way that the phrase “from sea to sea” means “from one sea to another sea.” Alternate translation: “from one person’s faith to another person’s faith” (3) by faith that leads to increasing faith. Alternate translation: “through faith for faith” or “from one degree of faith to another” | |
96 | 1:17 | igg9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | Here Paul uses just as it is written to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Habakkuk 2:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” | |
97 | 1:17 | bgvh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Habakkuk. Alternate translation: “just as the prophet Habakkuk wrote” | |
98 | 1:17 | oih2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὁ δὲ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Habakkuk 2:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
99 | 1:17 | a9y7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται | 1 | Here, live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternative translation: “will live eternally by faith” (2) the quality of one’s physical life. Alternative translation: “will truly live by faith” | |
100 | 1:17 | e7eu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 2 | See how you translated faith in 1:5 | |
101 | 1:18 | c69s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows is the reason why “the righteous one must live by faith,” as mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The righteous one must live this way because” | |
102 | 1:18 | r15v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀποκαλύπτεται & ὀργὴ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is revealing his wrath” | |
103 | 1:18 | wzy3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὀργὴ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God’s wrathful punishment” | |
104 | 1:18 | kjen | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of ungodliness and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “against all the ungodly and unrighteous acts of men” | |
105 | 1:18 | fz23 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ἀσέβειαν καὶ ἀδικίαν ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Here, ungodliness and unrighteousness of men refer to the people who do ungodly and unrighteous things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “against people who do any ungodly or unrighteous deeds” | |
106 | 1:18 | td8t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of unrighteousness and truth, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who, because they do not want to act righteously, keep holding back what is true about God” | |
107 | 1:18 | rztp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” | |
108 | 1:18 | g3qm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων | 1 | This phrase gives us further information about the nature of people, who are called men in the previous phrase. It is not making a distinction between different kinds of men. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “these same people who in unrighteousness are holding back the truth” | |
109 | 1:18 | k4ql | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐν ἀδικίᾳ κατεχόντων | 1 | Here Paul speaks of truth as if it were a person who could be restrained or held back. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “who in unrighteousness prevent the truth from being known” | |
110 | 1:19 | jd85 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people can know about God” | |
111 | 1:19 | r6ef | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτοῖς & αὐτοῖς | 1 | The pronoun them refers to the ungodly and unrighteous people mentioned in the previous verse. Unless, otherwise noted, them, “their”, and “they” refer to ungodly and unrighteous people throughout 1:19–32. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these ungodly and unrighteous people … all these ungodly and unrighteous people” | |
112 | 1:20 | fo6q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ & ἀόρατα αὐτοῦ & καθορᾶται; ἥ τε ἀΐδιος αὐτοῦ δύναμις καὶ θειότης | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of qualities, power, and nature, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what people cannot see about God, both how eternally powerful he is and who he is are clearly seen” | |
113 | 1:20 | szu6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καθορᾶται | 1 | Paul uses seen to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are clearly perceived” | |
114 | 1:20 | abdl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθορᾶται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people can clearly see” | |
115 | 1:20 | uvc1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | κόσμου | 1 | Paul uses the world figuratively to refer to the whole universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of all that God made” | |
116 | 1:20 | dr8v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τοῖς ποιήμασιν νοούμενα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which the things God has made understand” | |
117 | 1:20 | dxr6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἀναπολογήτους | 1 | So indicates that this is a result clause. Use the natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are without excuse” or “This is why they are without excuse” | |
118 | 1:21 | pgta | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γνόντες τὸν Θεὸν | 1 | Here Paul uses having known to imply that these people know about God or know that God exists. He does not mean that they know God personally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having known about God” | |
119 | 1:21 | iasg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | οὐχ ὡς Θεὸν ἐδόξασαν ἢ ηὐχαρίστησαν | 1 | Here, not glorify him and nor give him thanks mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that ungodly people dishonor God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “they thanklessly despise God” or “they completely disregard God” | |
120 | 1:21 | c6v7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ηὐχαρίστησαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of expressions of thanks as if they were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did they thank him” | |
121 | 1:21 | dant | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how foolish these ungodly people became by refusing to honor God. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “they became completely senseless in the way they think” | |
122 | 1:21 | xm6i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐματαιώθησαν ἐν τοῖς διαλογισμοῖς αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they began to think futile things” | |
123 | 1:21 | d2c0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐσκοτίσθη ἡ ἀσύνετος αὐτῶν καρδία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the heart as if it could mentally sense things or could become black in color. He also uses darkened to refer to someone losing the ability to understand something. He means that these people lack spiritual sensitivity and are unable to understand spiritual things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “their heart became incapable of feeling or understanding spiritual things” | |
124 | 1:21 | t4p7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | καρδία | 1 | Here Paul uses heart to refer a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “inner being” or “mind” | |
125 | 1:21 | sw8q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | καρδία | 1 | The word heart is a singular noun that refers to the inner beings or minds of a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inner beings” or “hearts” | |
126 | 1:22 | ddr2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἐμωράνθησαν | 1 | The phrase they became foolish is in contrast to what these unrighteous people claimed about themselves in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead they became foolish” | |
127 | 1:22 | ly68 | ἐμωράνθησαν | 1 | Alternate translation: “they became fools” or “they acted like fools” or “they started acting like fools” | ||
128 | 1:23 | k9xu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ | 1 | Here, and indicates that what follows describes what these ungodly and unrighteous people did after they “became foolish,” as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “; then they” or “Then they” | |
129 | 1:23 | x2wl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ ἤλλαξαν τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν. | 1 | Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped worshiping God and started worshiping idols that resembled these creatures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternative translation, “; then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” or “Then they stopped glorifying the imperishable God in order to worship images things that God created: perishable humans, birds, four-footed animals, and creeping things” | |
130 | 1:23 | qb7f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ ἐν ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος φθαρτοῦ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | The two phrases the glory of the imperishable God and a likeness of an image of perishable man mean the opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing with similar phrases to emphasize the contrast between God and man. Use a natural way in your language to express a contrast that uses parallel ideas. | |
131 | 1:23 | r14e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what glorifies the imperishable God” | |
132 | 1:23 | u971 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ἀφθάρτου Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the relationship between glory and the imperishable God. This phrase could refer to: (1) the glory that characterizes God. Alternate translation: “the glory that characterizes the imperishable God” (2) the glory that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “the glory that belongs only to the imperishable God” | |
133 | 1:23 | rfez | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁμοιώματι εἰκόνος | 1 | The words translated as likeness and image were used in the Greek translation of the Old Testament to refer to the same thing (Genesis 1:26). Here Paul is using the possessive form to indicate that image is an explanation of likeness. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “a likeness, that is, an image” | |
134 | 1:23 | osrt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | καὶ πετεινῶν, καὶ τετραπόδων, καὶ ἑρπετῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “and likenesses of birds, and likenesses of four-footed animals, and likenesses of creeping things” | |
135 | 1:23 | rq7h | τετραπόδων | 1 | The phrase four-footed beasts refers to animals that walk on four feet. Use the most natural form to describe this kind of animal in your language. Alternate translation: “of quadrupeds” or “of four-legged beasts” | ||
136 | 1:24 | fvv6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people rejecting the glory of God, as described in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” | |
137 | 1:24 | ec9q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if God were physically giving them to lusts. He means that God is allowing them to have what they desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God permitted them to become controlled by the lusts of their hearts” | |
138 | 1:24 | tlv5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe lusts that come from their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the lusts that come from their hearts” | |
139 | 1:24 | le2o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῶν καρδιῶν αὐτῶν | 1 | See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. | |
140 | 1:24 | rkou | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν | 1 | This is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of people indulging in the lusts of their hearts. Use the natural way in your language to express result. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “, resulting in uncleanness” | |
141 | 1:24 | ze8i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of uncleanness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to become unclean” | |
142 | 1:24 | g0r4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν | 1 | Here Paul uses uncleanness to refer to sexual immorality as if it were something dirty. He means that these lustful people become spiritually impure as a result of doing sexually immoral acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “to become sexually immoral” | |
143 | 1:24 | puad | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι | 1 | Here, to dishonor could refer to: (1) the result of God giving the people over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “which results in them dishonoring” (2) the purpose for which God gave them over to their lusts. Alternate translation: “in order to dishonor” | |
144 | 1:24 | a8pm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν | 1 | In this clause Paul uses dishonor their bodies figuratively to refer to sexually immoral acts. This is a polite way of referring to a shameful act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to commit sexually immoral acts” or “to indulge in sexually immoral activity” | |
145 | 1:25 | dv6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἵτινες μετήλλαξαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει | 1 | Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of these ungodly people as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped believing what is true about God and started believing in idols, which are false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in 1:23. Alternative translation, “these people refused to trust what God says is true and accepted what is false” | |
146 | 1:25 | koee | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ψεύδει | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and lie, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is correct about God for what is incorrect” | |
147 | 1:25 | e9pj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν ἀλήθειαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe truth that is about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the truth about God” | |
148 | 1:25 | bl7p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ἐσεβάσθησαν καὶ ἐλάτρευσαν | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that these people completely rejected worshiping the true God. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly worshiped” | |
149 | 1:25 | x3t4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ κτίσει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of creation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what was created” | |
150 | 1:25 | xrsa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τὸν κτίσαντα, ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the Creator. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the Creator God who is blessed to eternity” | |
151 | 1:25 | m8zg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | ὅς ἐστιν εὐλογητὸς εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας | 1 | After naming the Creator, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may he be blessed to eternity” | |
152 | 1:25 | v1ex | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | εὐλογητὸς | 1 | Paul is using the adjective blessed as a noun in order to describe the Creator. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the Blessed One” | |
153 | 1:26 | sk6f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:24. | |
154 | 1:26 | hw81 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πάθη ἀτιμίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe passions that are characterized by dishonor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “dishonorable passions” | |
155 | 1:26 | lk73 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πάθη ἀτιμίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of passions and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonor themselves by doing what they are passionate about” | |
156 | 1:26 | j4ni | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | The word translated for introduces an explanation of passions of dishonor. This explanation begins after the word for and continues through the end of the next verse. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is,” | |
157 | 1:26 | jqyi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μετήλλαξαν τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν εἰς τὴν παρὰ φύσιν | 1 | Paul uses exchanged to describe the actions of ungodly women as if they were exchanging goods or money. Paul means that they stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing sexual acts with other women, which is contrary to nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated exchanged in 1:23 and 25. Alternative translation, “stopped doing natural sexual acts with men and started doing unnatural sexual acts with women” | |
158 | 1:26 | vs4a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν | 1 | Paul uses the natural use figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and men. This is a polite way of referring to something that would be offensive in some cultures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with males” | |
159 | 1:26 | qvr5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | τὴν παρὰ φύσιν | 1 | Paul uses contrary to nature figuratively to refer to sexual activity between women and other women. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “sexual activity with other females” | |
160 | 1:27 | ji3l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὁμοίως τε καὶ οἱ ἄρσενες | 1 | This phrase emphasizes that what follows is similar to 1:26. Alternate translation: “in the same way, even the males” | |
161 | 1:27 | gn3f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀφέντες | 1 | Paul speaks of these men as if they were leaving their location to go to another one. He means that they are abandoning or rejecting the way God intended for people to do sexual acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having abandoned” or “having rejected” | |
162 | 1:27 | g3ja | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας | 1 | See how you translated the natural use in the previous verse. | |
163 | 1:27 | qvi3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν φυσικὴν χρῆσιν τῆς θηλείας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the natural use that is associated with the female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the natural use associated with the female” | |
164 | 1:27 | pqpo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τῆς θηλείας | 1 | Paul is speaking of these females in general, not of one particular female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of females” | |
165 | 1:27 | yvm1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους | 1 | Paul speaks of lust as if it were something that could burn like a fire. He means that their lust is out of control, like a wildly burning fire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “passionately lusted after one another” or “intensely desired each other” | |
166 | 1:27 | ylj6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐξεκαύθησαν ἐν τῇ ὀρέξει αὐτῶν εἰς ἀλλήλους | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lust, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “burned lustfully for one another” | |
167 | 1:27 | kxwj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | ἄρσενες ἐν ἄρσεσιν τὴν ἀσχημοσύνην κατεργαζόμενοι | 1 | This phrase refers to men doing sexual acts with other men. This is a polite way of referring to something immoral. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “males shamelessly engaging in sexual activity with each other” | |
168 | 1:27 | u2hh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κατεργαζόμενοι | 1 | Paul speaks of men doing unnatural things with each other as if their interaction could produce something, a shameless act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “committing” or “engaging in” | |
169 | 1:27 | sjhb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | καὶ τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν, ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες | 1 | In the original language the phrase the penalty is at the front of the clause for emphasis. If it would be more natural in your language, you could arrange the order of these phrases to show that emphasis. Alternate translation: “and the penalty, which was necessary for their perversion, receiving in themselves” | |
170 | 1:27 | jtru | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καὶ | 2 | Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of the shameless acts. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and as a result” | |
171 | 1:27 | raet | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπολαμβάνοντες | 1 | Paul speaks of the penalty for their sinful activity as if it were something that they could receive inside of themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “experiencing in their own bodies” or “receiving among themselves” | |
172 | 1:27 | x6fz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἀντιμισθίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of penalty, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the punishing act” | |
173 | 1:27 | dbtt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἣν ἔδει τῆς πλάνης αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of perversion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which was necessary for their perverted acts” | |
174 | 1:28 | bt7u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | οὐκ ἐδοκίμασαν, τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει | 1 | Here, having God in their full awareness is an idiom that refers to thinking about God or acknowledging God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “they did not approve of thinking about God” | |
175 | 1:28 | f53x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν Θεὸν ἔχειν ἐν ἐπιγνώσει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of full awareness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being fully aware of God” or “fully acknowledging that God exists” | |
176 | 1:28 | yy1c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς | 1 | ||
177 | 1:28 | p8z2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν | 1 | Paul is speaking of the minds of these ungodly people in general, not of one particular mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “to disapproved minds” | |
178 | 1:28 | r1pt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς ἀδόκιμον νοῦν | 1 | Here, mind refers to a person’s will and moral reasoning. The mind of one of these ungodly people is disapproved, which means that it has been rejected by God as worthless. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a mind that has become worthless” | |
179 | 1:28 | ie4l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ποιεῖν | 1 | Here, to do could refer to: (1) the result of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “and as a result they do” or “causing them to practice” (2) the purpose of a disapproved mind. Alternate translation: “so that they do” | |
180 | 1:28 | aye6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὰ μὴ καθήκοντα | 1 | The phrase those things that are not proper refers to what Paul describes in 1:29–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those improper things that follow” | |
181 | 1:29 | v0zj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ | 1 | Paul uses filled with to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container filled with the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that has been filled with something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice” | |
182 | 1:29 | t4qm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πεπληρωμένους | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they filled themselves” | |
183 | 1:29 | uqks | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ, πονηρίᾳ, πλεονεξίᾳ, κακίᾳ; | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness, wickedness, covetousness, and malice, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “filled with all unrighteous, wicked, covetous, and malicious thoughts” | |
184 | 1:29 | a7s3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας | 1 | Paul uses full of to refer to these ungodly people as if they were a container full of the sins that Paul lists in this clause. Like a container that is full of something, the people are completely controlled by these sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully controlled by envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent” | |
185 | 1:29 | dzda | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μεστοὺς φθόνου, φόνου, ἔριδος, δόλου, κακοηθείας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of envy, murder, strife, deceit, and evil intent, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are full of envious, murderous, contentious, and deceitful thoughts, and they intend to do evil things” | |
186 | 1:30 | f4tt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας & ἀπειθεῖς | 1 | Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hate God, people who are insolent, people who are arrogant, people who are boastful … people who are disobedient” | |
187 | 1:30 | th8q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | καταλάλους & ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slanderers and inventors, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “people who speak against others … people who invent ways to do evil things” | |
188 | 1:30 | qq50 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe inventors who invent evil things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “inventing evil things” | |
189 | 1:31 | i7ix | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἀσυνέτους, ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀνελεήμονας | 1 | Paul is using these adjectives as nouns in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are senseless, faithless, heartless, and merciless” | |
190 | 1:32 | cxx8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ δικαίωμα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of decree, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is rightly decreed” | |
191 | 1:32 | ytu6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous decree that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s righteous decree” or “that what God decrees is right” | |
192 | 1:32 | z12q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὅτι | 1 | Here, that indicates that what follows is the content of the the righteous decree of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “namely, that” or “in other words, that” | |
193 | 1:32 | iqg1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτὰ & τοῖς πράσσουσιν | 1 | The pronouns such things and things and them refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things … these improper things … those who keep doing these improper things” or “these kinds of evil things … these evil things … those who keep doing these evil things” | |
194 | 1:32 | p9e9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἄξιοι θανάτου | 1 | Paul is using the adjective worthy as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who deserve death” | |
195 | 1:32 | t0ls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of death, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die” | |
196 | 1:32 | awth | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are worthy to die spiritually” or “are worthy of spiritual death” | |
197 | 2:intro | dse2 | 0 | Romans 2 General NotesStructure and Formatting
In this chapter Paul shifts his audience from Roman Christians to people who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Special Concepts in this Chapter“The Law”In this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. Paul says that those who try to obey the law of Moses will not be justified by trying to obey it. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapterIn 2:1–5 Paul uses the singular pronoun “you” and the singular noun “man” to refer to all people in general. If your language does not use singular pronouns or singular nouns to refer to a group of people, you can use a different expression. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |||
198 | 2:1 | y6ts | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the consequences of the behavior that Paul described in 1:18–32. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “So then” | |
199 | 2:1 | d7pj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | εἶ & κρίνεις & σεαυτὸν κατακρίνεις & πράσσεις, ὁ κρίνων | 1 | Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all people in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “every one of you is … every one of you judges … every one of you condemns yourself … every one of you who judges practices” | |
200 | 2:1 | atxo | ἀναπολόγητος | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:20. | ||
201 | 2:1 | md5e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὦ ἄνθρωπε | 1 | O man here is an exclamation that is meant to convict every judgmental person in the human race. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “every human being” | |
202 | 2:1 | x3mi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | ἄνθρωπε | 1 | Here, man is a singular noun that refers to humanity in general. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “human being” | |
203 | 2:1 | n2mu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, for introduces a reason clause. In the rest of the verse Paul gives the reasons why everyone judging is without excuse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” | |
204 | 2:1 | jt4b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐν ᾧ | 1 | The word translated that which is a pronoun that refers to any way or any time a person might judge someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “anytime” or “in anything that” | |
205 | 2:1 | ybp2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τὸν ἕτερον | 1 | Here, the other refers to any other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “any other person” | |
206 | 2:1 | nz11 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, for introduces a clause that explains why these judgmental people are self-condemned. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “this is because” | |
207 | 2:1 | wumc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τὰ & αὐτὰ | 1 | The phrase the same things refers to acts for which people judge one another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the very same deeds” or “the same things you judge them for doing” | |
208 | 2:2 | jr4i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | οἴδαμεν | 1 | Here, we could refer to: (1) Paul and the church at Rome. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ” (2) mankind in general. Alternate translation: “all people” Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
209 | 2:2 | qca8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the judgment that God does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment” or “how God judges” | |
210 | 2:2 | kfy1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν κατὰ ἀλήθειαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of judgment and truth, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how God judges is according to what is true” | |
211 | 2:2 | lfqn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ ἀλήθειαν | 1 | This phrase indicates the manner in which God will judge those who act sinfully. He will judge them according to the sins they truly committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on the facts” | |
212 | 2:2 | j46f | τοὺς & πράσσοντας | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:32. | ||
213 | 2:2 | mjao | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὰ τοιαῦτα | 1 | Here, such things refers to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such improper things” or “these kinds of evil things” | |
214 | 2:3 | zwg7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | λογίζῃ δὲ τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ? | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that God will finally judge them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But you should not think, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things, that you will escape from the judgment of God!” | |
215 | 2:3 | jct9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τοῦτο | 1 | The pronoun this refers to the final clause of this verse that you will escape from the judgment of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this result” | |
216 | 2:3 | ysys | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τοῦτο, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, ὁ κρίνων τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντας, καὶ ποιῶν αὐτά, ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that you will escape from the judgment of God, O man, who judges those who are practicing such things and you are doing the same things” | |
217 | 2:3 | rk75 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὦ ἄνθρωπε | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 2:1. | |
218 | 2:3 | mo4p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὰ τοιαῦτα & αὐτά | 1 | The phrases such things and the same things refer to the litany of “the things that are not proper” in 1:28–32. See how you translated such things in 2:2 and the same things in 2:1. | |
219 | 2:3 | bd82 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὅτι σὺ ἐκφεύξῃ τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of judgment as if it were a person from whom someone could escape. Paul means that no one can avoid God’s judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that you will not prevent God’s judgment” | |
220 | 2:3 | hpej | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ κρίμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 2:2. | |
221 | 2:4 | pex3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἢ τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας καταφρονεῖς, ἀγνοῶν ὅτι τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει? | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that these judgmental people should know that the kindness of God leads them to repentance. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who scorn the wealth of his kindness and forbearance and patience surely know that the kindness of God leads you to repentance!” | |
222 | 2:4 | v9yf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | καταφρονεῖς & σε | 1 | In this verse Paul uses the singular pronoun you here to refer to all of humanity in general. See how you translated you in 2:1 and 2:3. | |
223 | 2:4 | w537 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ πλούτου τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας | 1 | Paul speaks of God’s kindness and forbearance and patience as if they were wealth that could be acquired or rejected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “acquiring his wonderful kindness and forbearance and patience” | |
224 | 2:4 | swj9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of kindness, forbearance, and patience, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how kind, forbearing, and patient he is” | |
225 | 2:4 | pplt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς χρηστότητος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῆς ἀνοχῆς, καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας & τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the kindness, forbearance, and patience that characterize God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God’s kindness, forbearance, and patience … God’s kindness” | |
226 | 2:4 | acip | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει | 1 | Paul speaks of the kindness of God as if it were a person who could lead someone to repentance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God uses his kindness to cause you to repent” | |
227 | 2:4 | u0io | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς μετάνοιάν σε ἄγει | 1 | Here, to repentance is a goal clause. Paul is stating the goal of the kindness of God. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a goal clause. Alternate translation: “leads you to repent” or “guides you to completely change the way you perceive things” | |
228 | 2:4 | jamv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μετάνοιάν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of repentance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to fully change the way you perceive things” | |
229 | 2:5 | agl8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κατὰ δὲ τὴν σκληρότητά σου | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if they were a hard substance. He means that these people stubbornly refuse to repent from their judgmental way of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “But according to your stubbornness” | |
230 | 2:5 | v6z1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἀμετανόητον καρδίαν | 1 | Here, heart refers to a person’s will or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unrepentant will” or “unwillingness to repent” | |
231 | 2:5 | fv4k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | θησαυρίζεις σεαυτῷ ὀργὴν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of wrath as if it were an object that someone could store up. He means that the longer people refuse to repent, the greater is God’s wrath against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you are increasing how much wrath God has against you” | |
232 | 2:5 | s7cs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὀργὴν & ὀργῆς | 1 | Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. | |
233 | 2:5 | pck0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers will know that both the day of wrath and the revelation of the righteous judgment of God refer to the time in the future when God will punish all wicked people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time God finally punishes wicked people and reveals his righteous judgment” | |
234 | 2:5 | uz3k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a day that is characterized by wrath and by the revelation of the righteous judgment of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “on the day characterized by God’s wrath and the revelation of his righteous judgment” | |
235 | 2:5 | ay1h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὀργῆς καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, revelation, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day of God’s wrathful acts, when he reveals how righteously he judges” | |
236 | 2:5 | fnpj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἀποκαλύψεως δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment of God as what the revelation reveals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “when God reveals his righteous judgment” | |
237 | 2:5 | sume | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαιοκρισίας τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the righteous judgment that is carried out by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of God judging righteously” | |
238 | 2:6 | frov | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations | ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ | 1 | This clause is a quotation from the Old Testament (Psalm 62:12). If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “who ‘will pay back to each one according to his deeds’” | |
239 | 2:6 | jwcx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀποδώσει ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses pay back to refer to appropriately punishing or rewarding someone as if the punishment or reward was reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish or reward each one according to his deeds” | |
240 | 2:6 | gj1q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deeds, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how he acts” or “what he does” | |
241 | 2:7 | ylpm | 0 | General Information:In 2:7–10 Paul explains what he means when he said in 2:6 that God will “pay back to each according to his deeds.” | |||
242 | 2:7 | rrbf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον; | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “eternal life to those who are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility according to endurance of good work” | |
243 | 2:7 | gec6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ζωὴν αἰώνιον | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “eternal life is what God pays back” | |
244 | 2:7 | sqdo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῖς & ζητοῦσιν | 1 | Paul uses seeking to refer to these people as if they were trying to find something. He means that they are trying to live in such a way as to obtain glory and honor and incorruptibility. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to those who … keep trying to attain” | |
245 | 2:7 | zyff | τοῖς & καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ, δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν ζητοῦσιν, ζωὴν αἰώνιον | 1 | Here, according to could indicate: (1) the means by which these people are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility. Alternate translation: “everlasting life to those who, by means of endurance of good work, are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility” (2) the reason why God gives these people everlasting life. Alternate translation: “because they endure in good work and are seeking glory and honor and incorruptibility, everlasting life” | ||
246 | 2:7 | d2gw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | καθ’ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the fact that they keep on doing good work” | |
247 | 2:7 | ub51 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δόξαν καὶ τιμὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory, honor, and incorruptibility, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “for God to glorify, honor, and cause them to live forever” | |
248 | 2:8 | j1e6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐξ ἐριθείας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ambition, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from being selfishly ambitious” | |
249 | 2:8 | fcb4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | καὶ ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how sinful these people are. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “who are disobedient to all that is true and right” | |
250 | 2:8 | xhtm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἀπειθοῦσι τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, πειθομένοις δὲ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the truthas if it were a person whom someone could disobey, and he speaks of unrighteousness as if it were a person whom someone could obey. Paul means that by disobeying him these people reject what God says is true and right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who reject what God says is true and right by disobeying him” | |
251 | 2:8 | m7pm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀληθείᾳ & τῇ ἀδικίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of truth and unrighteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to what is true … to what is unrighteous” | |
252 | 2:8 | ytny | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the 2:6. Alternate translation: “wrath and anger are what God pays back” | |
253 | 2:8 | exor | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὀργὴ | 1 | Here Paul uses wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s wrath, which is judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. | |
254 | 2:8 | wa6f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God is wrathful and angry” | |
255 | 2:8 | blwx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ὀργὴ καὶ θυμός | 1 | The words wrath and anger mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize God’s intense anger toward people who are disobedient to the truth. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “fierce wrath” or “angry wrath” or “wrathful anger” | |
256 | 2:9 | ospb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία, ἐπὶ πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου τοῦ κατεργαζομένου τὸ κακόν | 1 | Paul speaks of Tribulation and distress as if these ideas were located on top of a person. He means that every evil person will experience Tribulation and distress. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Every human soul that produces the evil will experience tribulation and distress” | |
257 | 2:9 | qonf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation and distress, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Difficult and distressing times” | |
258 | 2:9 | u8f7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | θλῖψις καὶ στενοχωρία | 1 | These two words mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense God’s judgment will be against these people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Distressing tribulation” or “Intense distress” | |
259 | 2:9 | ck9i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | πᾶσαν ψυχὴν ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Paul uses soul of man to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” | |
260 | 2:9 | msox | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person” | |
261 | 2:9 | n7q4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | τὸ κακόν | 1 | Paul is using the adjective evil as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “what is evil” or “things that are evil” | |
262 | 2:9 | a9s5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἰουδαίου τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνος | 1 | This phrase could mean: (1) the Jews will have greater responsibility because God offered salvation to them first. Alternate translation: “especially for the Jewish person and also for the non-Jewish person” (2) the Jews will be judged before non-Jews, which is the same meaning as in 1:16. Alternate translation: “first for the Jewish person and then for the non-Jewish person” | |
263 | 2:9 | csnc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἕλληνος | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:16. | |
264 | 2:10 | i9tg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δόξα & καὶ τιμὴ, καὶ εἰρήνη, παντὶ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God will glorify and honor and bring peace to everyone” | |
265 | 2:10 | t2od | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰρήνη | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, peace could refer to: (1) feeling calm and secure. Alternate translation: “a peaceful feeling” (2) being at peace with God. Alternate translation: “a peaceful relationship with God” (3) both a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God. “a peaceful feeling and a peaceful relationship with God” | |
266 | 2:10 | ib56 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | τὸ ἀγαθόν | 1 | Paul is using the adjective good as a noun in order to describe things people do. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good deeds” or “things that are good” | |
267 | 2:10 | u06j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
268 | 2:11 | eol0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οὐ & ἐστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of favoritism, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not honor one type of person above another” or “God is not more favorable toward one person than another” | |
269 | 2:12 | wkx8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows in 2:12–16 gives the reason for the phrase “there is no favoritism with God” in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” | |
270 | 2:12 | ecsk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσοι & ἀνόμως ἥμαρτον | 1 | Paul uses this phrase to refer to non-Jews, whom he calls “the Greek” in 2:9–10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many non-Jewish people as have sinned without the law” | |
271 | 2:12 | t3qs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως & νόμῳ & νόμου | 1 | The word law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “without God’s laws … without God’s laws … God’s laws … God’s laws” | |
272 | 2:12 | m6cy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἀνόμως & ἀνόμως | 1 | Here, without the law refers to not knowing God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without knowing God’s law” or “in ignorance of God’s law” | |
273 | 2:12 | qkh4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | καὶ ἀπολοῦνται | 1 | Here Paul uses perish to refer to eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will also be punished eternally” or “will also experience eternal punishment” | |
274 | 2:12 | jwvz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσοι ἐν νόμῳ ἥμαρτον | 1 | Paul uses this phrase to refer to Jews, who are the people to whom God gave his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as many Jewish people as have sinned with the law” | |
275 | 2:12 | w4cp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | διὰ νόμου κριθήσονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will judge by his law” | |
276 | 2:12 | a0k4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ νόμου | 1 | Here, by indicates that the law is the standard by which God will judge those who know his law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to what the law requires” or “by what the law says” | |
277 | 2:13 | sw8x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God judges both groups of people impartially because” | |
278 | 2:13 | a8ra | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου & νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the law in the previous verse. | |
279 | 2:13 | eg4h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὐ & δίκαιοι παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul uses with God here to describe righteous people as if they were located in the presence of God. He means that God makes them right with himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “are not made righteous by God” | |
280 | 2:13 | c1bu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἱ ποιηταὶ νόμου δικαιωθήσονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will justify the doers of the law” | |
281 | 2:14 | q2id | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that 2:14–16 give another reason why God judges both groups of people mentioned in 2:12. 2:14–16 explain why Gentiles who do not know God’s law are still sinners. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “God also judges both groups of people impartially because” | |
282 | 2:14 | vlum | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ μὴ νόμον ἔχοντα & νόμον μὴ ἔχοντες | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if they do not own or possess the law. He means that they did not receive the law that God gave to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated “without the law” in 2:12. Alternative translation: “who are unaware of God’s law … who are unaware of God’s law” | |
283 | 2:14 | zhmw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον & τοῦ νόμου & νόμον | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12. | |
284 | 2:14 | h53h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | φύσει & ποιῶσιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “naturally do” | |
285 | 2:14 | atda | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the specific rules that make up the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the commands within the law” | |
286 | 2:14 | symg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἑαυτοῖς εἰσιν νόμος | 1 | Here Paul speaks of Gentiles as if they were a law. Paul means that the non-Jewish people have their own rules about what is right and wrong, and their rules are similar to God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning in plainly. Alternate translation: “are actually obeying the God’s law” | |
287 | 2:15 | xl6v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἵτινες ἐνδείκνυνται τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul speaks of the non-Jewish people obeying some basic rules from the law of Moses as if they were showing the work of the law to other people. He means that non-Jewish people demonstrate that they naturally understand some rules of the law by obeying those rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who make others aware that they understand the work of the law” | |
288 | 2:15 | wtit | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου, γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the works of the law as if they can be written on the surfaces of peoples’ hearts. He means that God has enabled non-Jewish people to know generally what is right or wrong even though they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they know the work of the law” | |
289 | 2:15 | x35c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ ἔργον τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the work that characterizes obeying the law. This phrase has a similar meaning to “the things of the law” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the work that the law requires a person to do” | |
290 | 2:15 | v60q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γραπτὸν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God wrote on their hearts” | |
291 | 2:15 | ja5s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν | 1 | See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. | |
292 | 2:15 | jmeo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως | 1 | Paul uses the singular conscience figuratively to refer to the individual consciences of these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their consciences bearing witness” | |
293 | 2:15 | z28q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | συνμαρτυρούσης αὐτῶν τῆς συνειδήσεως | 1 | Here Paul speaks of conscience as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their conscience confirms that this is true” | |
294 | 2:15 | ub8t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | συνμαρτυρούσης & καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων | 1 | This clause explains what bearing witness means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer or begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “bearing witness, namely, the thoughts of each person both accusing or even defending them” | |
295 | 2:15 | qk53 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | καὶ μεταξὺ ἀλλήλων, τῶν λογισμῶν κατηγορούντων ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων | 1 | Here Paul speaks of thoughts as if they were a person who could accuse or defend someone in court. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “by accusing or defending them in the way they think” | |
296 | 2:16 | o6kx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ | 1 | Here, day refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 24-hour length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” | |
297 | 2:16 | c5fp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ὅτε κρίνει ὁ Θεὸς | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers will know that the day when God will judge refers to the time in the future when God will judge everyone, as Paul also mentioned in 2:2 and 2:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future time when God finally judges” | |
298 | 2:16 | lyvd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe secrets that men have. These secrets are specifically secret thoughts that people have, as indicated by the word “thoughts” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men’s secrets” or “the secrets that men keep” | |
299 | 2:16 | gxet | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of secrets, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what men secretly think” | |
300 | 2:16 | r8hz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τῶν ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of human beings” or “of people” | |
301 | 2:16 | xb7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου, διὰ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through Christ Jesus, according to my gospel” | |
302 | 2:16 | e9bp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου | 1 | Paul speaks of the gospel as if it belongs to him. He means that this is the gospel God has entrusted him to preach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to God’s gospel that I preach” | |
303 | 2:17 | lc6m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Connecting Statement:But here indicates that in 2:17–29 Paul changes topics from talking about non-Jewish people who don’t know the law of Moses to Jews who know the law. He explains why the Jews as well cannot escape God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “You also need to know that” or “However” | |
304 | 2:17 | cnq7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from this verse to 2:21. Paul speaks as if these descriptions of Jews were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that they are actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” | |
305 | 2:17 | kfe8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ | 1 | Even though Paul is speaking to Jewish people, he is hypothetically addressing an individual, so you and your and yourself is singular throughout 2:17–27 unless otherwise noted. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you and your and yourself in your translation. | |
306 | 2:17 | pglg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ | 1 | Paul speaks of the Jews as if they named themselves. He means that they consider themselves to be Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you call yourself Jewish” or “you regard yourself as truly Jewish” | |
307 | 2:17 | gz6j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐπαναπαύῃ νόμῳ, | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, which is God’s judgment of sinners. Alternate translation: “rely upon the law to escape God’s judgment” or “rely upon the law to save you from God’s judgment” | |
308 | 2:17 | dapj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καυχᾶσαι ἐν Θεῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of the Jews as if they were boasting inside of God. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation that knows God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “brag that you are the only ones who know God” | |
309 | 2:18 | xn6w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καὶ γινώσκεις τὸ θέλημα, καὶ δοκιμάζεις τὰ διαφέροντα, κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because you are instructed from the law, you know his will and approve of what is excellent” | |
310 | 2:18 | qxkt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ θέλημα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of will, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wills” | |
311 | 2:18 | aqbh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατηχούμενος ἐκ τοῦ νόμου | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “others having instructed you from the law” | |
312 | 2:19 | nk76 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | πέποιθάς τε σεαυτὸν ὁδηγὸν εἶναι | 1 | Paul uses the word yourself to emphasize how convinced the Jews are that they are the only ones who can spiritually guide others. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and you have convinced yourself that you alone are a guide” | |
313 | 2:19 | wi7z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν | 1 | Paul uses guide to refer to the Jews as if they were the only people who could clearly see. He also uses blind to refer to non-Jews as if they were unable to see. He means that the Jews think they are the only ones who can teach others God’s truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that you are a helper to those separated from God” | |
314 | 2:19 | beop | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὁδηγὸν εἶναι τυφλῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of guide, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you can serve as a guide to blind men” | |
315 | 2:19 | ql0b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τυφλῶν | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to blind people” | |
316 | 2:19 | j76c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ὁδηγὸν & τυφλῶν, φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the two ideas into one. Alternate translation: “the only ones who can guide those who are unaware of what is true about God” | |
317 | 2:19 | xlge | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | φῶς τῶν ἐν σκότει | 1 | Here Paul uses light to refer to a Jewish person, and he uses those in darkness figuratively to refer to non-Jews. He means that the Jews think they can teach non-Jews about God the way that a light shines on people who are in a dark place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who can reveal what is true about God to those who do not know about God” | |
318 | 2:20 | ymey | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases, since the third phrase gives the reason for the result that the first two phrases describe. Alternate translation: “since having in the law the form of the knowledge and of the truth, you believe you should be an instructor of foolish men, a teacher of little children” | |
319 | 2:20 | pf6v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | παιδευτὴν ἀφρόνων, διδάσκαλον νηπίων, ἔχοντα & ἐν τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how strongly the Jews believed that non-Jews were ignorant about God’s truth. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the only people who can instruct those people who are as foolish as children and are the only people who have in the law” | |
320 | 2:20 | ar5a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | διδάσκαλον νηπίων | 1 | Paul speaks of the non-Jews as if they were little children. He means that they are ignorant about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “people who are spiritually ignorant” | |
321 | 2:20 | ose0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἔχοντα τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐν τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | Paul speaks of the law as if it were a physical shape that someone could possess. He means that the law contains God’s true knowledge that the Jews think they exclusively own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “understanding through God’s law how a person can truly know God” | |
322 | 2:20 | ua61 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν μόρφωσιν τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive forms of the knowledge and of the truth to describe the form of the law. Here, of knowledge and of the truth could indicate: (1) what the law contains. Alternate translation: “the form that contains the knowledge and the truth” (2) what the law represents. Alternate translation: “what represents knowledge and truth” | |
323 | 2:20 | y6i5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς γνώσεως καὶ τῆς ἀληθείας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of knowledge and ** truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what we know about God and what is true about God” | |
324 | 2:21 | vy0h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὁ οὖν διδάσκων ἕτερον, σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις? ὁ κηρύσσων μὴ κλέπτειν, κλέπτεις? | 1 | In 2:21–23 Paul transitions from his description of the Jews in 2:17–20 to a series of rhetorical questions. These questions emphasize the hypocrisy of the Jews, who thought they were superior to non-Jews because they knew the law of Moses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Paul’s words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “then you, who teach another, do not teach yourself! You, who preach not to steal, actually steal!” | |
325 | 2:21 | rftq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is the second half of the factual conditional statement that Paul began with “if you name yourself a Jew” in 2:17. Paul wants to show that what the Jews believe and how they live are in contrast. If you divided 2:17–21 into separate sentences, then you may need to include a short form of the “if” statement here. Alternate translation: “if all this is really true, then” or “since all this is really true, then” | |
326 | 2:21 | uq9y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | ἕτερον | 1 | Here, another is a singular pronoun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “other people” | |
327 | 2:21 | abq0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | σεαυτὸν οὐ διδάσκεις | 1 | Here Paul implies that the Jews need to teach themselves, because they do not actually obey the laws that they teach. They live their lives as if they do not know the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you yourself don’t obey the law, do you not teach yourself” | |
328 | 2:22 | parm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὁ λέγων μὴ μοιχεύειν, μοιχεύεις? ὁ βδελυσσόμενος τὰ εἴδωλα, ἱεροσυλεῖς? | 1 | Like in the previous verse, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form twice to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who say not to commit adultery actually commit adultery! You who abhor idols actually rob temples!” | |
329 | 2:22 | dmpg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἱεροσυλεῖς | 1 | Here Paul implies that the temples the Jews rob are where idols are kept and worshiped. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you rob temples where idols are kept” or “should you actually enter an idol temple and rob it” | |
330 | 2:23 | z80m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου, τὸν Θεὸν ἀτιμάζεις | 1 | As in the previous two verses, Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You who boast in the law actually dishonor God through the transgression of the law!” | |
331 | 2:23 | grr3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὃς ἐν νόμῳ καυχᾶσαι | 1 | Paul uses in the law as if it were something that people could boast inside of. He means that the Jews brag that they are the only nation who knows God’s law, which has similar meaning to “boast in God” in 2:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “You, who brag that you are the only ones who know God’s law” | |
332 | 2:23 | ob98 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διὰ τῆς παραβάσεως τοῦ νόμου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of transgression, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by transgressing the law” or “by breaking the law” | |
333 | 2:24 | yp4l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τὸ γὰρ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For, just as it is written, ‘the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles because of you.’” | |
334 | 2:24 | z54i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things that I have said about you are true because” | |
335 | 2:24 | lk5n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν | 1 | In this clause Paul quotes part of Isaiah 52:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
336 | 2:24 | c4sk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to indicate the name that belongs to God. Paul does not mean that God is a name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s name” | |
337 | 2:24 | mvwq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul uses the name of God figuratively to refer toGod himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly, as in the UST. | |
338 | 2:24 | ccm9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles blaspheme the name of God because of you” | |
339 | 2:24 | m2bq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τὸ & ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ δι’ ὑμᾶς βλασφημεῖται ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because of you the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles” | |
340 | 2:24 | pg0g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ ὑμᾶς | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah implying that the bad behavior of the Jews is what causes the Gentiles to blaspheme the name of God. Since the Jews were supposed to represent God to the world, their bad behavior misrepresented God so that the Gentiles blasphemed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of how you act” or “because of the way you behave” | |
341 | 2:24 | e144 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | δι’ ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, you is the plural and refers to the Jewish people. This is the only occurrence of plural you in 2:17–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people” | |
342 | 2:24 | edrf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” | |
343 | 2:24 | end9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
344 | 2:25 | vdu7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that [2:25–29] provide another reason why both Jews and Gentiles will be punished for their sins, as stated in 2:12. Paul is arguing against the idea that circumcision guaranteed a Jew’s salvation, which some Jews believed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Jews will be judged along with Gentiles because” | |
345 | 2:25 | vp6o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | περιτομὴ & ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “being circumcised … your being circumcised has become being uncircumcised” | |
346 | 2:25 | wm24 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὠφελεῖ | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “benefits you” | |
347 | 2:25 | pqhz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | παραβάτης νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who transgresses the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “one who transgresses the law” or “one who breaks the law” | |
348 | 2:25 | xq62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ἡ περιτομή σου, ἀκροβυστία γέγονεν | 1 | Here, your circumcision becomes uncircumcision is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how important it is for God’s people to practice the law. Paul does not mean that the person who transgresses God’s law is no longer physically circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is as if you were not circumcised” or “it is the same as if you were never circumcised” | |
349 | 2:26 | vt7f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | ἐὰν οὖν | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the benefits for the uncircumcised one who keeps the requirements of the law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Let’s suppose then that” | |
350 | 2:26 | r9i4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἡ ἀκροβυστία | 1 | Paul is using the adjective uncircumcision as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the one who is uncircumcised” | |
351 | 2:26 | nf3j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | φυλάσσῃ | 1 | Here, keeps is an idiom that refers to obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is obedient to” | |
352 | 2:26 | mkhr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe requirements found in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what the law requires” or “the law’s requirements” | |
353 | 2:26 | be71 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize how important it is do what the law requires. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly God will consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” | |
354 | 2:26 | rjb5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οὐχ ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ εἰς περιτομὴν λογισθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “will God not consider his uncircumcision to be circumcision” | |
355 | 2:26 | gjuy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀκροβυστία αὐτοῦ & περιτομὴν | 1 | See how you translated uncircumcision and circumcision in the previous verse. | |
356 | 2:27 | lqz2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία, τὸν νόμον τελοῦσα | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “since he is fulfilling the law, the uncircumcised by nature will judge” | |
357 | 2:27 | tpno | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἡ & ἀκροβυστία | 1 | See how you translated this in the previous verse. | |
358 | 2:27 | h2lj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of nature, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the naturally uncircumcised” | |
359 | 2:27 | zwh8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τελοῦσα | 1 | Here, fulfilling is an idiom that refers to fully obeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “is fully obedient to” | |
360 | 2:27 | sv4b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς | 1 | Here, through could mean: (1) the Jews will be judged despite having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “despite having letter and circumcision” (2) the Jews will be judged while having the letter and circumcision. Alternate translation: “while having letter and circumcision” | |
361 | 2:27 | nxa1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | γράμματος | 1 | Paul is describing the law by association with the letters that make up the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the written law code” or “God’s written law” | |
362 | 2:27 | lkll | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | περιτομῆς | 1 | See how you translated circumcision in the previous two verses. | |
363 | 2:27 | q795 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | παραβάτην νόμου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for transgressor, you could express the idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “someone who transgresses the law” or “someone who breaks God’s law” | |
364 | 2:28 | g2vh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows is the reason for what has just been stated. This verse is Paul’s conclusion to the statements he made in 2:25–27. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Truly” | |
365 | 2:28 | lfuj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰουδαῖός | 1 | Here Paul uses Jew to refer to someone who is one of God’s people because he truly trusts in God for salvation, as Abraham did. Jew here does not refer to someone who only has Jewish ancestors. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spiritual Jew” | |
366 | 2:28 | rohy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ φανερῷ | 1 | Here, visibly refers to the Jewish religious practices that other people can see, such as circumcision or wearing special clothing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does externally visible Jewish rituals” | |
367 | 2:28 | n34i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἡ & περιτομή | 1 | Here Paul uses circumcision to refer to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, like how circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This was called “circumcision of the heart” in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). Here, circumcision does not refer to the Jewish ritual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this spiritual circumcision” | |
368 | 2:28 | s44m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | ἐν σαρκὶ | 1 | Paul uses the flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “on the body” | |
369 | 2:29 | b6ag | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ Ἰουδαῖος | 1 | The word translated secretly refers to something that other people cannot see or that is hidden. The meaning here is the opposite of “visibly” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a Jew in an inward way not seen by others” | |
370 | 2:29 | u7b6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰουδαῖος | 1 | Here Paul uses Jew in the same way he did in the previous verse. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. | |
371 | 2:29 | d1go | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | περιτομὴ καρδίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a circumcision that is performed in the heart. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “circumcision is performed in the heart” or “circumcision is an inward change” | |
372 | 2:29 | hbiv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | περιτομὴ καρδίας | 1 | The phrase circumcision of the heart is an idiom that refers to the change in thinking and attitude that happens when God saves a person. It can also be considered an inward mark of belonging to God’s people, just as circumcision was an outer mark of being Jewish. This expression first occurred in the Old Testament (Deuteronomy 30:6; Jeremiah 4:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated “this circumcision” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “truly belongs to God’s people by removal of sin” | |
373 | 2:29 | n4pp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | καρδίας | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:21. | |
374 | 2:29 | ffa3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι | 1 | Here, both occurrences of in indicate the means by which something happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit, not by means of the letter” | |
375 | 2:29 | kjc9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Πνεύματι | 1 | Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, who changes a person’s thoughts and attitude when God saves that person, as in the UST. (2) a person’s spirit, which would require interpreting in to refer to a place. Alternate translation: “in one’s spirit” | |
376 | 2:29 | gcoq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | γράμματι | 1 | See how you translated letter in 2:27. | |
377 | 2:29 | dlac | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος | 1 | The pronoun whose refers to the one who is inwardly a Jew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that inward Jew’s praise” | |
378 | 2:29 | qa6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form whose to indicate who receives the praise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his praise” | |
379 | 2:29 | r4gm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἐξ ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “from people” | |
380 | 3:intro | y2kb | 0 | Romans 3 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10–18 of this chapter, which are quotations from the Old Testament. Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterRhetorical QuestionsIn 3:1–9 and 27–31 Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. You may need to indicate that Paul is asking these questions as if he were a non-Christian Jew responding to these arguments. When Paul asks the rhetorical questions, he is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. When Paul answers those questions, he is speaking as himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this change in speakers with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations, as in the UST. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) | |||
381 | 3:1-9 | v788 | 0 | Connecting Statement:In 3:1–9 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that both “Jews and Greeks” are “under sin.” | |||
382 | 3:1 | a1l0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what is” | |
383 | 3:1 | dawv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς? | 1 | This verse contains two rhetorical questions connected by or. Paul is not asking for information, but here he is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 2:28–29. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then the Jew certainly has no advantage, and circumcision certainly has no benefit!” | |
384 | 3:1 | b7ls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς | 1 | In this verse Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
385 | 3:1 | bjfo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of advantage or benefit, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “How then is being a Jew advantageous, or how is being circumcised beneficial” | |
386 | 3:1 | h4h3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ Ἰουδαίου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form of the Jew to describe for whom there is the advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for the Jew” | |
387 | 3:1 | l79f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς περιτομῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form of the circumcision to describe from where the benefit comes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “that comes from circumcision” or “from being circumcised” | |
388 | 3:2 | eq3o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον | 1 | In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Great in every way!’” | |
389 | 3:2 | rri9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The advantage of the Jew and the benefit of the circumcision are great in every way” | |
390 | 3:2 | kzlh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον | 1 | Great in every way is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize the value of being Jewish and being circumcised. Paul does not mean that everything about being a Jew and being circumcised is beneficial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows enthusiasm. Alternate translation: “Great in many ways” | |
391 | 3:2 | f2fa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πρῶτον μὲν & ὅτι | 1 | Here, indeed first, that could indicate that: (1) what follows is the first reason in a list of several reasons why being a Jew is beneficial, in which case Paul does not continue the list in this chapter. Alternate translation: “the first of many benefits is indeed that” or “one benefit is indeed that” (2) what follows is the most important reason why being a Jew is beneficial. Alternate translation: “the primary benefit is indeed that” or “the most important thing is indeed that” | |
392 | 3:2 | mrej | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God entrusted them with his sayings” or “God trusted them with the sayings of God” | |
393 | 3:2 | jkgk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the sayings of God could refer to: (1) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with what God said in the Scriptures” (2) direct speech from God recorded in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “with the messages that God announced to them in the Scriptures” | |
394 | 3:2 | qide | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ λόγια τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the possessive form of God could refer to: (1) sayings that came from God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings from God” (2) says that are about God. Alternate translation: “with the sayings about God” | |
395 | 3:3 | d9k3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then” | |
396 | 3:3 | mclv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί & εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει? | 1 | In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But some of them were unfaithful! Their unfaithfulness surely cannot nullify the faithfulness of God!” | |
397 | 3:3 | fd0w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί γάρ εἰ ἠπίστησάν τινες? μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει? | 1 | In this verse Paul is speaking as if he himself were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
398 | 3:3 | i36p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τινες | 1 | The pronoun some refers to some Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “some Jewish people” | |
399 | 3:3 | pkae | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μὴ ἡ ἀπιστία αὐτῶν, τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ καταργήσει | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unfaithfulness or faithfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “The fact that they are unfaithful will not nullify God’s faithful acts, will it” | |
400 | 3:3 | moq7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faithfulness that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the faithfulness that characterizes God” | |
401 | 3:4 | djn7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” | |
402 | 3:4 | z465 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | May it never be is an exclamation that communicates a strong prohibition. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong prohibition. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not” or “Certainly not” | |
403 | 3:4 | kz4j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Instead here indicates that what follows is a contrast to the idea in the previous verse that unfaithful Jews could “nullify the faithfulness of God.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “However” | |
404 | 3:4 | ld9h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | γινέσθω & ὁ Θεὸς ἀληθής | 1 | Here, let God be true is an imperative phrase, but this is not a command. Instead, Paul is exclaiming that people must consider that God is always truthful regardless of what people think. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “let people always know that God is true” or “may people always declare that God is true” | |
405 | 3:4 | nud9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of liar, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every man lies” | |
406 | 3:4 | fesk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος ψεύστης | 1 | Paul is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “let every man be a liar” | |
407 | 3:4 | hfdf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | πᾶς & ἄνθρωπος | 1 | Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “every person” | |
408 | 3:4 | te39 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
409 | 3:4 | b8gv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by David. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” | |
410 | 3:4 | f0oq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 51:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
411 | 3:4 | xli0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅπως | 1 | So that indicates that what follows is the result of what David had written previously in Psalm 51:4, which is about how David had sinned. Paul assumes that his readers would be familiar with the earlier part of that verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “I have sinned so that” or “Because of my sin” | |
412 | 3:4 | h0ne | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὅπως ἂν δικαιωθῇς ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου, καὶ νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε | 1 | In this sentence, you and your refer to God and are singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
413 | 3:4 | lnnr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιωθῇς & ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people would acknowledge how righteous you are … when people attempt to judge you” or “you would prove yourself to be righteous … when others try to judge you” | |
414 | 3:4 | tj8g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου | 1 | Paul records David using words to describe the things that God said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in what you say” | |
415 | 3:5 | gw3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | εἰ δὲ | 1 | In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement that Paul made in the previous verse. But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If indeed that is true” or “Now if” | |
416 | 3:5 | putf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? | 1 | In these sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
417 | 3:5 | hjyp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument that an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God. Then what will we say” | |
418 | 3:5 | y6vv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν & ἐροῦμεν | 1 | Here, our and we are used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Jewish … will we Jews say” | |
419 | 3:5 | y0r5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness or righteousness, you could express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unrighteous we are … how righteous God is” | |
420 | 3:5 | ho67 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? | 1 | In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question here to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. This sentence is also the answer to the hypothetical question that precedes it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly cannot be unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” | |
421 | 3:5 | v30z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εἰ & ἡ ἀδικία ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην συνίστησιν, τί ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν? | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the hypothetical conditional statement of the first sentence with the rhetorical question of the second sentence. Alternate translation: “if our unrighteousness commends the righteousness of God, then we certainly cannot say that God is unrighteousness for imposing his wrath!” | |
422 | 3:5 | e9ux | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὁ ἐπιφέρων τὴν ὀργήν | 1 | Here Paul uses imposing his wrath to refer to the outcome of God’s anger, which is carried out by judging and punishing people because they are unrighteous. See how you translated the same use of wrath in 1:18. | |
423 | 3:5 | j631 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside | (κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.) | 1 | Paul could be saying this as an aside in order to show that he is not trying to challenge the righteousness of God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as seen in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “I am reasoning like a human being” | |
424 | 3:5 | sd4g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | (κατὰ ἄνθρωπον λέγω.) | 1 | Here, the phrase according to men is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I speak based on how human beings perceive things” or “I speak according to mere human reasoning” | |
425 | 3:6 | gd5f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | See how you translated this in 3:4. | |
426 | 3:6 | zg9s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐπεὶ πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον | 1 | Here Paul is giving the reason why God is “not unrighteous for imposing his wrath,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Because if God were unrighteous, how would he judge the world” | |
427 | 3:6 | x1y3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πῶς κρινεῖ ὁ Θεὸς τὸν κόσμον | 1 | In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using his question to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God certainly could not judge the world!” | |
428 | 3:6 | lnp3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὸν κόσμον | 1 | Here Paul uses world to refer to the people who live in the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people in the world” | |
429 | 3:7-9 | htfa | 0 | General Information:In 3:7–9, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in 3:6. A note will inform you of the one parenthetic statement within these verses in which Paul interjects his own voice into the argument. | |||
430 | 3:7 | b9k1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | εἰ δὲ | 1 | But here indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. In this verse, Paul is speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement Paul made in the previous verse. See how you translated this in 3:5. | |
431 | 3:7 | c2u5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ & ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to develop the argument an unbelieving Jew would make. Alternate translation: “suppose the truth of God through my lie abounds to his glory. Then why am I still being judged as a sinner” | |
432 | 3:7 | xysz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εἰ δὲ ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But if the truth of God abounds to his glory through my lie” | |
433 | 3:7 | j9ji | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of truth, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how truthful God is” | |
434 | 3:7 | lbji | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the truth that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s truthfulness” | |
435 | 3:7 | fa7j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι & κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς | 1 | Here Paul uses my and I to refer to a Jewish person who might give this hypothetical response. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternative translation: “when we Jews act falsely … are we … as sinners” or “when we Jews lie … are we … as sinners” | |
436 | 3:7 | o3po | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ ψεύσματι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lie, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “when I act falsely” or “when I lie” | |
437 | 3:7 | je41 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, to indicates that this is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is glorified” | |
438 | 3:7 | h61j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to demonstrate how glorious he is” or “to glorify him” | |
439 | 3:7 | yv5j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί ἔτι κἀγὼ ὡς ἁμαρτωλὸς κρίνομαι | 1 | In this clause Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was also repeated in the previous clause. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely I should not still be judged as a sinner!” | |
440 | 3:7 | iiqc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἔτι κἀγὼ & κρίνομαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “does God still judge me” or “should God keep on judging me” | |
441 | 3:7 | pgus | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτωλὸς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sinner, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “someone who sins” or “as if I were sinful” | |
442 | 3:8 | vw1x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ | 1 | And here indicates that in this verse Paul continues speaking as if he were an unbelieving Jew and is challenging the statement he made in 3:6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Furthermore” or “In addition” | |
443 | 3:8 | kb9d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | καὶ μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά? | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And not, ‘Let us do evil, so that good may come,’ just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm we say?” | |
444 | 3:8 | wr3g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | καὶ μὴ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And why not say” | |
445 | 3:8 | pr4u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ & ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ, ἵνα ἔλθῃ τὰ ἀγαθά | 1 | In this sentence Paul is not asking for information, but is using an elided question here (“And why not say”) to emphasize that God could not judge the world if he were unrighteous. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should say … ‘Let us do the evil things, so that the good things may come!’” | |
446 | 3:8 | o3pz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside | καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν | 1 | Paul is saying this as an aside in order to show that people have been falsely accusing him of teaching that people should sin in order to show how good God is. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses like the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. Alternate translation: “Some people blaspheme us and affirm that we are saying such things” | |
447 | 3:8 | veic | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | βλασφημούμεθα & ἡμᾶς | 1 | When Paul says we and us, he could be (1) speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I am blasphemed … me” (2) speaking of himself and all other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians are blasphemed … us” | |
448 | 3:8 | klaa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | βλασφημούμεθα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people blaspheme us” | |
449 | 3:8 | vbpa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations | μὴ καθὼς βλασφημούμεθα, καὶ καθώς φασίν τινες ἡμᾶς λέγειν, ὅτι ποιήσωμεν τὰ κακὰ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “not say (just as we are blasphemed and just as some affirm us to say) that we should do the evil things” | |
450 | 3:8 | pe2c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-aside | ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν | 1 | Paul is saying this as an aside to show that the people who have been falsely accusing him of teaching people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come” are the ones who deserve to be judged by God. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses as in the ULT or use a natural way in your language to indicate an aside. | |
451 | 3:8 | re0k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν | 1 | The pronoun whose here refers to the people who slander Paul by claiming that he teaches people to “do the evil things, so that the good things may come.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the judgment of those who say this is just” | |
452 | 3:8 | g87e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὧν τὸ κρίμα ἔνδικόν ἐστιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are justly judged” or “whom God justly judges” | |
453 | 3:9 | z3wu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν? προεχόμεθα? | 1 | Here Paul concludes his series of rhetorical questions by using the same phrase What then he used to begin this discussion. See how you translated this phrase in 3:1. | |
454 | 3:9 | y6uz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | προεχόμεθα? | 1 | Paul is using the question form to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul has said previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely we are not better off!” | |
455 | 3:9 | ajj8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | προεχόμεθα | 1 | Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and his fellow Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Are we Jews better off” | |
456 | 3:9 | g85q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | οὐ πάντως | 1 | Not at all is an exclamation that communicates a strong negative response to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this idea. Alternate translation: “Absolutely not!” or “In no way!” | |
457 | 3:9 | cbgq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐ πάντως | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We are not better off at all” | |
458 | 3:9 | a01e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | προῃτιασάμεθα γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We are not better off because we have already accused” | |
459 | 3:9 | qvjy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | προῃτιασάμεθα | 1 | Here, we could mean: (1) Paul is speaking only of himself in a formal manner. Alternate translation: “I have already accused” (2) Paul is speaking of himself and other Christians. Alternate translation: “we Christians have already accused” See how you translated we in the previous verse. | |
460 | 3:9 | hgs3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἕλληνας | 1 | Here, Greeks refers to non-Jewish people in general. It does not refer only to people from the country of Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “non-Jewish people” | |
461 | 3:9 | x4eb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὑφ’ ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | The phrase under sin is an idiom that means “under the power of sin” or “controlled by one’s desire to sin.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlled by sin” or “unable to stop sinning” | |
462 | 3:10 | u88n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
463 | 3:10 | zkzr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as the prophets wrote” | |
464 | 3:10 | ju1k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς | 1 | This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
465 | 3:10 | yt5d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one person is righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who is righteous” or “Absolutely no one who is righteous” | |
466 | 3:10 | bscu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | οὐκ ἔστιν δίκαιος οὐδὲ εἷς | 1 | Paul is using the singular adjectives none righteous and one as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no righteous people, not any people” or “There is no righteous person, not even one person” | |
467 | 3:11 | b0m7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων; οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν | 1 | This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of Psalm 14:2 and Psalm 53:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
468 | 3:11 | kqs5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | οὐκ ἔστιν & οὐκ ἔστιν | 1 | Paul is using the adjectives none as nouns in order to describe all people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “There are no man … There are no man” or “There is no person … There is no person” | |
469 | 3:11 | h9e9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ συνίων | 1 | Here, who understands refers to someone who is able to think wisely or correctly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “There is none who is wise” | |
470 | 3:11 | mn84 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ ἐκζητῶν τὸν Θεόν | 1 | Here, Paul quotes David using seeks to describe people attempting to know God as if God were lost and people needed to find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who attempts to know God” | |
471 | 3:12 | lg0i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | πάντες ἐξέκλιναν, ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν; οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός | 1 | This sentence is quotation of Psalm 14:3 and Psalm 53:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
472 | 3:12 | cen3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐξέκλιναν | 1 | Paul quotes David using turned away to describe these people as if they had left a path that leads to where God is. David means that they refuse to live according to God’s rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “refused to live the way God requires” | |
473 | 3:12 | a72h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἅμα ἠχρεώθησαν | 1 | Here, useless implies that these sinful people are so sinful that they benefit neither God nor humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “They together became worthless for benefitting anyone” | |
474 | 3:12 | na87 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | οὐκ ἔστιν ποιῶν χρηστότητα, οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that not even one type of person can continually do kindness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “There is not even one person who does kindness” or “Absolutely no one is doing kindness” | |
475 | 3:12 | v9ed | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | οὐκ & ἑνός | 1 | See how you translated none and one in 3:10. | |
476 | 3:12 | b3g1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χρηστότητα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of kindness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “what is kind” | |
477 | 3:13 | xr4g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν | 1 | These two sentences are a quotation from Psalm 5:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
478 | 3:13 | c7rh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν; ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν ἐδολιοῦσαν; ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν | 1 | These three sentences mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing three times, in slightly different ways, to show how harmful the words are that these people say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The things they say are deadly, deceptive, and damaging” | |
479 | 3:13 | nmrs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s throats in general, not of one particular throat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Each of their throats” | |
480 | 3:13 | sx6y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν | 1 | Here Paul quotes David using throat to describe something people would say by using their throats to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What they say” | |
481 | 3:13 | bbq5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τάφος ἀνεῳγμένος ὁ λάρυγξ αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul quotes David using opened grave to describe these people’s throat as if it were a deep hole containing rotting corpses. He means that the things these people say are morally corrupt and offend God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Their words express moral corruption” | |
482 | 3:13 | pemg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ταῖς γλώσσαις αὐτῶν | 1 | Here Paul quotes David using tongues to describe something people would say to deceive someone, using their tongues to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what they say” | |
483 | 3:13 | d82g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἰὸς ἀσπίδων ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 140:3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
484 | 3:13 | b4bp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἰὸς ἀσπίδων | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe poison that comes from asps, which are venomous snakes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Asp’s poison” | |
485 | 3:13 | qk16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἰὸς ἀσπίδων | 1 | Paul quotes David using poison of asps to refer to what people say as if what they say contained poison. He means that the things they say harm people as does deadly venom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “What hurts people like a poisonous snake bite” or “Speech that hurts people” | |
486 | 3:13 | u40o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὑπὸ τὰ χείλη αὐτῶν | 1 | Here Paul quotes David using lips to describe something people would say to harm someone by using their lips to say it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is in what they say” | |
487 | 3:14 | ucnr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὧν τὸ στόμα ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 10:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
488 | 3:14 | ujjd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τὸ στόμα | 1 | Paul quotes David speaking of these people’s mouths in general, not of one particular mouth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “speech” | |
489 | 3:14 | sqr5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὧν τὸ στόμα | 1 | ||
490 | 3:14 | j0sg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀρᾶς καὶ πικρίας γέμει | 1 | Paul quotes David using cursing and bitterness as if these concepts were things with which people could fill or load their mouth. He means that these people habitually curse and say bitter things against others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “habitually curses and says bitter things against others” | |
491 | 3:15-17 | e67d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | 0 | General Information:Verses 15–17 are Paul’s paraphrase of Isaiah 59:7–8. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | ||
492 | 3:15 | vds1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | οἱ πόδες αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using feet, a part of the human body, to refer to the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These people” | |
493 | 3:15 | quph | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐκχέαι αἷμα | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using pour out blood to refer to violently murdering people, which usually causes blood to come out of the people who are murdered. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to murder others” | |
494 | 3:16 | bc96 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | σύντριμμα καὶ ταλαιπωρία | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Destruction and suffering, you could express the same ideas with other expressions. Alternate translation: “Demolishing lives and making people suffer” | |
495 | 3:16 | rrgr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐν ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, ways is an idiom meaning “wherever they go” or “how they behave.” It refers to a person’s daily life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “characterize how they behave” | |
496 | 3:17 | zbrd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὁδὸν | 1 | See how you translated “ways” in the previous verse. | |
497 | 3:17 | jb6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁδὸν εἰρήνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a way that is characterized by peace. He means that these people do not understand how to live peacefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a peaceful way” or “a peaceful way to behave” | |
498 | 3:18 | wr0x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 36:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
499 | 3:18 | bx27 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οὐκ ἔστιν φόβος Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of fear, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “There are no fearful feelings about God before their eyes” | |
500 | 3:18 | frt1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | φόβος Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe fear that people should feel toward for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “fear for God” or “fear about God” | |
501 | 3:18 | m89o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἀπέναντι τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν | 1 | Here,before their eyes is an idiom that refers to thinking about something. Paul means that these people do not think at all about how terrifying God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in their minds” | |
502 | 3:19 | lrdp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Now here indicates that what follows summarizes Paul’s teachings about the law and “the righteousness of God” in 3:1–9. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed” | |
503 | 3:19 | gc8t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | οἴδαμεν | 1 | Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jews know” | |
504 | 3:19 | e8h2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὅσα ὁ νόμος λέγει & λαλεῖ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as many things as God says in the law, he speaks” | |
505 | 3:19 | n399 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὁ νόμος & τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses the law to refer to the entire Old Testament, which includes the law. Here he is not referring to only the law of Moses, as he did earlier in the chapter. We know this because in 3:10–18 Paul quoted verses from parts of the Old Testament that are not in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures … the Scriptures” | |
506 | 3:19 | b0g5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | Paul uses those with the law to refer to the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:12. Alternative translation: “to Jews” or “to those who know the law” | |
507 | 3:19 | end8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for what the law says. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that” | |
508 | 3:19 | cy5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | πᾶν στόμα φραγῇ | 1 | Here, every mouth may be shut is an idiom that means “no one can say anything to excuse themselves.” Paul means that no one can defend themselves before God, because everyone has sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human being can excuse himself” | |
509 | 3:19 | js71 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | φραγῇ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may stop talking” | |
510 | 3:19 | w12y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | πᾶς ὁ κόσμος | 1 | Paul usesall the world figuratively to refer to all the people living in the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the world” | |
511 | 3:19 | wwq3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπόδικος γένηται & τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | The phrase may become accountable to God means that God will judge everyone at the final judgment according to how they lived their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “may fall under God's judgment of guilt” | |
512 | 3:20 | ezbo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διότι | 1 | Here. because introduces a reason clause. Paul is stating the reason why all humanity is “accountable to God,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason clause. You may need to begin a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” or “As a result,” | |
513 | 3:20 | vzot | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οὐ δικαιωθήσεται πᾶσα σὰρξ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “God will not justify any flesh” or “God will not make any flesh righteous” | |
514 | 3:20 | xs9x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | σὰρξ | 1 | Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to a human being, who is made of flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “human being” | |
515 | 3:20 | d6vi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου & διὰ & νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας | 1 | In this verse Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could justify someone or give them full awareness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires in his law … God gives full awareness of sin through his law” | |
516 | 3:20 | w5qb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐξ ἔργων νόμου | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. | |
517 | 3:20 | i7zi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου & νόμου | 1 | In this verse law is a singular noun that refers to a group of laws that God gave Israel by dictating them to Moses. It does not refer to the entire Old Testament, as in the previous verse. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. | |
518 | 3:20 | llh9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, before him is an idiom meaning “in his presence.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in his presence” | |
519 | 3:20 | xgpp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of full awareness and sin, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “fully aware of being sinful” | |
520 | 3:20 | aety | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe full awareness about the sin a person has committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “full knowledge about sin” | |
521 | 3:20 | jdw9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ & νόμου | 1 | Here, through law indicates the means by which a person becomes fully aware of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of law” | |
522 | 3:21 | fqz4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | νυνὶ δὲ | 1 | But now here indicates that what follows is in contrast to Paul’s discussion about the law in 2:1–3:20. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet now” | |
523 | 3:21 | y3te | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | νυνὶ δὲ χωρὶς νόμου, δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But now, the righteousness of God has been made known apart from the law” | |
524 | 3:21 | e5ky | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | νόμου & τοῦ νόμου | 1 | While the first occurrence of the law in this verse refers to the laws that God gave the Jews through Moses, the second occurrence refers to the first five books in the Old Testament that were written by Moses. The ULT shows this difference by using the law and the Law respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the laws that God gave Israel … the part of Scripture that Moses wrote” | |
525 | 3:21 | nlj0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | χωρὶς νόμου | 1 | Here, apart from the law could mean: (1) apart from doing what the law requires. Alternate translation: “without having to do what the law requires” (2) outside of what the law says. Alternate translation: “not related to what the law says” or “differently than what the law says” | |
526 | 3:21 | e4qe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ πεφανέρωται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has made his righteousness visible” or “God has revealed his righteousness” | |
527 | 3:21 | qkis | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
528 | 3:21 | gvca | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Law and the Prophets bearing witness” | |
529 | 3:21 | tnf8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν | 1 | Here Paul uses the Law and the Prophets as if they were people who could witness or testify in a courtroom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says in the Law and the Prophets is a written testimony to this” | |
530 | 3:21 | bgyx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν | 1 | Paul is using the name of two parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, the Law and the Prophets, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” | |
531 | 3:22 | pec5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, but indicates that what follows explains how a person receives “the righteousness of God”. It does not indicate a contrast. Alternate translation: “namely,” or “even” | |
532 | 3:22 | cvhy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαιοσύνη & Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
533 | 3:22 | q4m1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | διὰ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, faith in Jesus Christ is a possessive form that indicates faith that is associated with Jesus Christ. This could refer to: (1) trust in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “by trusting in Jesus Christ” or “by believing in Jesus Christ” (2) the faithfulness of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “through the faithfulness that Jesus Christ possesses” or “through how faithful Jesus Christ is” | |
534 | 3:22 | c4mg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τοὺς πιστεύοντας | 1 | Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “those who believe in him” or “those who believe in Jesus for salvation” | |
535 | 3:22 | o6qe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | Here, for introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why the righteousness of God is for all those who believe. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “because” | |
536 | 3:22 | daa3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολή | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “God does not discriminate” or “God is not partial” | |
537 | 3:23 | x1hu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason why “there is no distinction,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” | |
538 | 3:23 | akn9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πάντες | 1 | Here Paul uses the adjective all as a noun that refers to all the people who have ever existed or ever will exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all people” | |
539 | 3:23 | jbe9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑστεροῦνται τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of all people as if they were something that fails to reach its destination. He means that they lack or do not attain the glory of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “lack the glory of God” or “fail to attain the glory of God” | |
540 | 3:23 | vwsf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here the possessive form the glory of God could refer to: (1) the glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned. Alternate translation: “the glory God once gave them” or “the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” | |
541 | 3:24 | ibi2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of grace as if it were a person who could justify someone. Paul means that God graciously makes people righteous as a gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and are gifted with becoming righteous because God is gracious” | |
542 | 3:24 | evs8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers know that those who are being justified freely are “all” those who “have sinned” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all people are being freely justified” | |
543 | 3:24 | jgcu | δωρεὰν | 1 | Alternate translation: “as a gift” or “without payment” | ||
544 | 3:24 | atij | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι, διὰ τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and redemption, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “by God being gracious through redeeming them in Christ Jesus” or “due to how kind God is, because Christ Jesus redeemed them” | |
545 | 3:24 | hyeb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀπολυτρώσεως | 1 | The word translated as redemption refers to rescuing someone from captivity by paying a ransom. Your language may require you to indicate what the people are redeemed from. This could mean: (1) Jesus redeems people from eternal punishment. Alternative translation: “redemption from eternal punishment” (2) Jesus redeems people from being enslaved to sin. Alternative translation: “redemption from enslavement to sin” | |
546 | 3:24 | lno6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of redemption as if it were an object that could be inside Jesus. Paul means that God redeemed all people who believe in Jesus by uniting them to Christ Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that comes through union with Christ Jesus” or “that is through being united to Christ Jesus” | |
547 | 3:25 | ci0v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὃν προέθετο ὁ Θεὸς ἱλαστήριον | 1 | Here Paul uses presented as if Jesus were an Old Testament atonement sacrifice that was presented to God in the temple. He means that Jesus’ death was a sacrifice for the sins of humankind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “whom God offered to atone for the sins of humanity” | |
548 | 3:25 | t2d8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἱλαστήριον, διὰ πίστεως & εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of propitiation, faith, demonstration, or righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “to atone for people’s sins by trusting … to demonstrate how he makes people righteous” | |
549 | 3:25 | m159 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι | 1 | Here Paul uses his blood to refer to Jesus’ death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in Christ’s death” | |
550 | 3:25 | ieq9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, for indicates that the phrase that follows is the purpose for which God presented Jesus as a propitiation. Use a natural way in your language to indicate a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to demonstrate his righteousness” | |
551 | 3:25 | ze9m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ | 1 | See how you translated “the righteousness of God” in 1:17. | |
552 | 3:25 | siri | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν τῶν & ἁμαρτημάτων | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of overlooking, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because he overlooked the sins” | |
553 | 3:25 | ydoj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῶν προγεγονότων ἁμαρτημάτων | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “how they had sinned previously” | |
554 | 3:26 | b2f6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐν | 1 | Here, in introduces a reason clause. Paul is giving the reason for God “overlooking of the sins that happened previously,” as stated in the previous verse. Starting a new sentence, use a natural way in your language to indicate a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is” | |
555 | 3:26 | lm1r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of forbearance, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “because God is so forbearing” or “since God forbears” | |
556 | 3:26 | cg55 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as being characterized by forbearance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in God’s forbearance” | |
557 | 3:26 | b1xa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
558 | 3:26 | v1c9 | ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ | 1 | Alternate translation: “at this time in history” or “currently” | ||
559 | 3:26 | jjwq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God now demonstrates his righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that he would be” | |
560 | 3:26 | x6cf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Paul is speaking of all people who have faith in Jesus, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “anyone who is from faith in Jesus” or “every person who trusts in Jesus” | |
561 | 3:26 | qdkw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸν ἐκ πίστεως Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who is characterized by faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is characterized by faith in Jesus” | |
562 | 3:26 | ab0w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πίστεως Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:22. | |
563 | 3:27-31 | emwi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | 0 | Connecting Statement:In 3:27–31 Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions and answers in order to emphasize that God alone makes people righteous through faith in Jesus. Like in 3:1–9, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew when he asks the rhetorical questions, but he is speaking as himself when he answers those questions. | ||
564 | 3:27 | e0wc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 3:21–26. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, inserting a parenthetical phrase between commas. Alternate translation: “, if it is God who makes people righteous through faith in Jesus,” | |
565 | 3:27 | fjm4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express an objection that a Jew might have to what Paul said in 3:21–26. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There then is no grounds for boasting!” | |
566 | 3:27 | mvs0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις | 1 | Here Paul speaks of boasting as if it were an object that could be in a location. He means that no one can boast, because only God makes people righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Then can anyone boast” | |
567 | 3:27 | pub7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ποῦ οὖν ἡ καύχησις | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boasting, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “Who then can boast” | |
568 | 3:27 | px29 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξεκλείσθη | 1 | In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical question in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘It is excluded!’” | |
569 | 3:27 | eufl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐξεκλείσθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has excluded it” or “God does not allow it” | |
570 | 3:27 | v3ut | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? & διὰ νόμου πίστεως | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Through what kind of law is a person made righteous? Is a person made righteous through the works of the law? … a person is made righteous through a law of faith” | |
571 | 3:27 | dpny | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | διὰ ποίου νόμου? τῶν ἔργων? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous sentence and in 3:21–26. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely through a kind of law! Surely through the works!” or “Surely a person is made righteous through a kind of law! Surely a person is made righteous through works!” | |
572 | 3:27 | bgyy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῶν ἔργων? | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Through a law characterized by works?” or “By doing what the law requires?” | |
573 | 3:27 | h9wb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐχί, ἀλλὰ διὰ νόμου πίστεως | 1 | In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘No! But through a law of faith.’” | |
574 | 3:27 | tg79 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | οὐχί | 1 | No! is an exclamation that communicates a strong contrast to the previous statement. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Not at all!” | |
575 | 3:27 | ynz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | διὰ νόμου πίστεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that is characterized by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through a law characterized by faith” or “by doing what faith requires” | |
576 | 3:27 | mlcq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “of trusting in God” | |
577 | 3:28 | qe9p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, what follows explains what “the law of faith” means in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
578 | 3:28 | jtqq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | λογιζόμεθα | 1 | Here, we is used exclusively to speak of Paul and other Christian Jews, as indicated in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we believing Jews consider” or “we believing Jews regard” | |
579 | 3:28 | t8um | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπον | 1 | Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here in the generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “humankind” or “a person” | |
580 | 3:28 | ph88 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιοῦσθαι & ἄνθρωπον | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “that God justifies a man” or “that God makes a man righteous” | |
581 | 3:28 | jb14 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” | |
582 | 3:28 | ycx2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἔργων νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to refer to the works that God requires in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the law requires” | |
583 | 3:29 | hdbq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἢ | 1 | Or here indicates that the next two sentences are the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or you Jews might say” | |
584 | 3:29 | ineu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Is he not also God of Gentiles? Yes, he is also God of Gentiles” | |
585 | 3:29 | m8eo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐθνῶν & ἐθνῶν | 1 | See how you translated Gentiles in 1:5. | |
586 | 3:29 | ch7p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | Ἰουδαίων ὁ Θεὸς μόνον? οὐχὶ καὶ ἐθνῶν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the responses that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is surely not only the God of Jews! He is surely also the God of Gentiles!” | |
587 | 3:29 | rq5m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ναὶ, καὶ ἐθνῶν | 1 | In this sentence Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous two sentences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘Yes, also of Gentiles’” | |
588 | 3:29 | gp74 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ναὶ | 1 | Yes is an exclamation that communicates enthusiasm. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating enthusiasm. Alternate translation (change the period to an exclamation point): “Of course!” | |
589 | 3:30 | vur7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἴπερ | 1 | Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation, (without either comma preceding): “Since we know” or “Because it is true that” | |
590 | 3:30 | qdiu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἴπερ | 1 | This phrase introduces the reason why Paul could say in the previous verse that God is also the God of the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason clause. Alternate translation: “since, indeed” or “we know this is true because, indeed” | |
591 | 3:30 | ux30 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἷς ὁ Θεός | 1 | Paul speaks of God as if he were a number. He means that God is the one and only true God for both Jews and Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “there is only one God” | |
592 | 3:30 | rjxp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ὃς δικαιώσει περιτομὴν ἐκ πίστεως, καὶ ἀκροβυστίαν διὰ τῆς πίστεως | 1 | This phrase gives further information about who our God is. It is not making a distinction between the one true God and false gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will justify the circumcision by faith, and he will justify the uncircumcision through the same faith” | |
593 | 3:30 | kw62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν | 1 | The words circumcision and uncircumcision are singular nouns that refer to groups of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the circumcised people … the uncircumcised people” | |
594 | 3:30 | gk5d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | περιτομὴν & ἀκροβυστίαν | 1 | Here Paul uses the circumcision to refer to the Jews by associating them with circumcision, and he uses the uncircumcision figuratively to refer to the Gentiles by associating them with uncircumcision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people … the non-Jewish people” | |
595 | 3:30 | s9i4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐκ πίστεως & διὰ τῆς πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:26. | |
596 | 3:31 | vj40 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν | 1 | Here, then indicates that this sentence is the response that a Jew might have made to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you Jews might say, ‘Do we nullify the law’” | |
597 | 3:31 | y6qx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using this question to express the response that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we surely nullify the law through the same faith!” | |
598 | 3:31 | nzr7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | οὖν καταργοῦμεν | 1 | Here, we is used exclusively to speak of the unbelieving Jews on whose behalf Paul is speaking. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “Do we Jews then nullify” | |
599 | 3:31 | cw0k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν | 1 | Here, nullify the law means to make the law useless or no longer applicable to anyone. Paul is stating that the Jews might worry that he is teaching that the law of Moses does not have any function at all because God makes people righteous by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do we make the law useless” or “Do we throw away the law” | |
600 | 3:31 | aj6s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | διὰ τῆς πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
601 | 3:31 | pjgc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο! ἀλλὰ νόμον ἱστάνομεν | 1 | In these two sentences Paul responds to the rhetorical questions in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be! Instead, we establish the law’” | |
602 | 3:31 | rhy5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:6. | |
603 | 3:31 | ppvo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | νόμον ἱστάνομεν | 1 | Here, we is used exclusively to refer to Paul and other Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Christians uphold the law” | |
604 | 3:31 | c295 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | νόμον ἱστάνομεν | 1 | Paul uses uphold to refer to the law as if it were an object that people could hold up high. The meaning of uphold here is the opposite meaning of nullify, used earlier in the verse. It could mean: (1) Christians fulfill the requirements of the law by trusting in Jesus, who fulfilled the law for them. Alternate translation: “we fulfill the law by faith” (2) Christians value the law and affirm that it is useful. Alternative translation: “we confirm that the law is useful” or “we affirm that the law has value” | |
605 | 4:intro | f9jc | 0 | Romans 4 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 4:7–8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this ChapterThe purpose of the law of MosesIn this chapter Paul continues to develop his argument based on what he wrote in the previous chapter. He explains how God made Abraham, the ancestor of all Jews, righteous a long time before God gave the law of Moses to the Jews. Even Abraham could not become righteous by what he did. Rather, God made Abraham righteous on the basis of Abraham’s faith. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person righteous. People have always become righteous only by faith. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) CircumcisionCircumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, being circumcised never made anyone righteous. In this chapter Paul uses “circumcision” to refer to Jews and “uncircumcision” to refer to non-Jews. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterRhetorical QuestionsIn 4:1, 3, and 9–10 Paul continues using rhetorical questions like he did in the previous chapter. He does this in order to answer objections that Jews might make about what he is saying. | |||
606 | 4:1-12 | q7wc | 0 | Connecting Statement:4:1–12 are a series of rhetorical questions and answers that Paul uses to emphasize that even Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people, was made righteous by God “through faith.” | |||
607 | 4:1 | gxv3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. See how you translated What then in 3:1. | |
608 | 4:1 | gw29 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα? | 1 | In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to express the objections that a Jew might have to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 3:27–31. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, has surely discovered something!” | |
609 | 4:1 | rhrp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα? | 1 | In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Christian Jew arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
610 | 4:1 | s4b5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐροῦμεν | 1 | In 4:1–9 Paul uses we exclusively to speak of himself and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “will we Jews say” | |
611 | 4:1 | ot88 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “that Abraham has discovered, who is our forefather according to the flesh” | |
612 | 4:1 | fk5t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. | |
613 | 4:2 | pmua | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εἰ γὰρ Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα | 1 | These clauses continue the the statements that an unbelieving Jew might make against Paul that began in the previous verse. You may need to indicate this with a closing quotation mark at the end of these clauses or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. | |
614 | 4:2 | ka9b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows is the reason for the statement in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This must be the case because” | |
615 | 4:2 | oe12 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ & Ἀβραὰμ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἔχει καύχημα | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the unbelieving Jew might think that this is actually true. In Paul’s time some Jewish teachers taught that Abraham had a right to boast because of his faith. However, since translating this as if it were true might confuse your readers, it is best to use a hypothetical sentence, as in the UST. | |
616 | 4:2 | wvmh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | Ἀβραὰμ & ἐδικαιώθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God justified Abraham” or “God made Abraham right with himself” | |
617 | 4:2 | sibe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ ἔργων | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers would understand that worksmeans “works of the law” as in 3:28. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by doing what God requires from his people” | |
618 | 4:2 | mefy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν | 1 | In this clause Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous clauses and previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘But not before God!’” | |
619 | 4:2 | me3d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ οὐ πρὸς Θεόν. | 1 | What follows the word but here is an emphatic contrast to what was just stated. Paul is negating the argument that he presented earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. You could make this emphasis explicit by replacing the period with an exclamation point or another natural way in your language for introducing am emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but certainly not before God!” or “however, not from God’s perspective!” | |
620 | 4:2 | z9wx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πρὸς Θεόν | 1 | Paul speaks of Abraham as if he were located in the presence of God. He means that Abraham could not boast to God about his righteousness if it was righteous by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “from God’s perspective” | |
621 | 4:3 | w9i5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why Paul said in the previous verse that Abraham cannot boast “before God.” Use a natural way in your language to introduce a reason clause. Alternative translation: “This is true because” | |
622 | 4:3 | hih3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the scripture surely says” | |
623 | 4:3 | g1wz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses say as if the scripture were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information related to the topic he is discussing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what information is in the scripture” | |
624 | 4:3 | r9te | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τί & ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει? | 1 | Here Paul uses what does the scripture say to indicate a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:6). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what is written in the scripture” | |
625 | 4:3 | xdtx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ Γραφὴ | 1 | Here, the scripture refers specifically to the quotation from Genesis 15:6 that follows in this verse. It does not refer to the Scriptures in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the scripture that Moses wrote in Genesis” | |
626 | 4:3 | smc6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God credited it to him as righteousness” | |
627 | 4:3 | az65 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐλογίσθη | 1 | The pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, which was implied by the statement that Abraham believed God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his faith was credited” or “his trust in God was credited” | |
628 | 4:3 | qked | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” | |
629 | 4:4 | ihul | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Now here indicates that what follows in verses 4–5 is an explanation of the scripture quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Certainly,” | |
630 | 4:4 | oojx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo | τῷ & ἐργαζομένῳ | 1 | Here, the one who works refers to a hypothetical person who obeys the laws God gave through Moses and is “made righteous by works” (See: 4:2). However, since the meaning of verses 4–5 is given in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. | |
631 | 4:4 | dsl8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ μισθὸς οὐ λογίζεται κατὰ χάριν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he does not consider his wage as grace” or “he does not regard his pay as grace” | |
632 | 4:4 | xo4x | κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα | 1 | Alternate translation: “as a matter of grace … as a matter of obligation” or “as a gift … as an obligation” | ||
633 | 4:4 | ossx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατὰ χάριν & κατὰ ὀφείλημα | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and obligation, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “as what is gracious … as what is owed” or “as something gifted … as something owed” | |
634 | 4:5 | ynp2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Now here indicates that what follows in this verse is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to express contrasting ideas. Alternate translation: “But” | |
635 | 4:5 | j3ir | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ & μὴ ἐργαζομένῳ | 1 | Here, the one who does not work refers to a person who does not obey the laws God gave through Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the one who is does not obey God’s laws” | |
636 | 4:5 | fezj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν δικαιοῦντα | 1 | Here, the one who justifies refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who justifies” or “God who makes righteous” | |
637 | 4:5 | tovp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | τὸν ἀσεβῆ | 1 | Paul is using the singular adjective phrase the ungodly as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungodly” or “people who do ungodly things” | |
638 | 4:5 | va3e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | λογίζεται ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:3. Alternate translation: “God credited his faith as righteousness” | |
639 | 4:5 | s00l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ πίστις αὐτοῦ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and righteousness, you could express the same ideas with different forms. Alternate translation: “how he trusts … as being righteous” or “how he trusts in God … as being right with God” | |
640 | 4:6 | hil6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καὶ Δαυεὶδ λέγει | 1 | Paul uses David also speaks of here to introduce a scripture quotation from Psalm 31:1–2, which David wrote. This occurs in 4:7–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “David also wrote in the Old Testament of” | |
641 | 4:6 | s0v1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of blessedness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how blessed the man is” | |
642 | 4:6 | vyse | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸν μακαρισμὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the man that is characterized by blessedness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the blessed man” or “the happy man” | |
643 | 4:6 | x40j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τοῦ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Paul is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of a person” | |
644 | 4:6 | c6zs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ᾧ ὁ Θεὸς λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην χωρὶς ἔργων | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, the man God credits as righteous apart from works” | |
645 | 4:6 | lilj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | λογίζεται δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “counts being righteous” or “counts being right with himself” | |
646 | 4:6 | o260 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | χωρὶς ἔργων | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:28. | |
647 | 4:7 | zqwl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι | 1 | This verse is the beginning of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. | |
648 | 4:7 | dur6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | μακάριοι, ὧν ἀφέθησαν αἱ ἀνομίαι καὶ ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι | 1 | These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how Blessed these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “How blessed are those people whom God forgives completely for all their sins” | |
649 | 4:7 | lq4w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὧν & αἱ ἀνομίαι & ὧν & αἱ ἁμαρτίαι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of lawless deeds and sins, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless things they have done … the sins they have committed” | |
650 | 4:7 | d4f4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀφέθησαν & ἐπεκαλύφθησαν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God forgives … God covers” | |
651 | 4:7 | hj2w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὧν ἐπεκαλύφθησαν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι | 1 | Paul quotes David leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “blessed are those whose sins have been covered” | |
652 | 4:7 | hqfm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπεκαλύφθησαν | 1 | Paul quotes David using covered to refer to God forgiving sins as if he covers sins so that he no longer sees them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have been forgiven” | |
653 | 4:8 | jjov | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 31:1–2. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. | |
654 | 4:8 | yox7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | μακάριος ἀνὴρ, οὗ οὐ μὴ λογίσηται Κύριος ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | This verse means the same thing as the two clauses in the previous verse. Paul says the same thing here in a slightly different way to emphasize how Blessed people are whom God forgives for their sins. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “How truly blessed is a man whose sin the Lord does certainly not count!” | |
655 | 4:8 | kpfe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ἀνὴρ | 1 | Paul quotes David speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” | |
656 | 4:8 | y21b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “sinful deeds” | |
657 | 4:8 | jdrm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὐ μὴ λογίσηται | 1 | Paul quotes David using count to refer to God remembering or regarding people’s sins after he has forgiven them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does certainly not regard” | |
658 | 4:8 | yxh2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ μὴ | 1 | The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul quotes David using them together to emphasize how certain it is that God does not regard people’s sin after he has forgiven them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “never” | |
659 | 4:9 | qtgb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Then here introduces a result clause. This verse indicates the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 4:6–8. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” | |
660 | 4:9 | g4f6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν, ἢ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “this blessedness is surely upon the circumcision and also upon the uncircumcision!” | |
661 | 4:9 | alrb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος | 1 | Here, this blessedness refers to the joyful state of those people whom God forgives and makes righteous, as mentioned in 4:6–8. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is this blessed state of being forgiven by God” or “is this blessed forgiveness from God” | |
662 | 4:9 | jmym | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ μακαρισμὸς & οὗτος ἐπὶ τὴν περιτομὴν & ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν | 1 | Paul speaks of blessedness as if it were an object that could be put upon someone. He means that both circumcised and uncircumcised people can receive the blessing of forgiveness from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is this blessedness given to the circumcision … to the uncircumcision” | |
663 | 4:9 | dn7v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τὴν περιτομὴν & τὴν ἀκροβυστίαν | 1 | See how you translated these words in 3:30. | |
664 | 4:9 | mrsm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γάρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows answers the rhetorical question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Indeed, ” | |
665 | 4:9 | w2xt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | λέγομεν | 1 | Here Paul uses we exclusively to refer to Paul and other Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we Jewish people say” | |
666 | 4:9 | o51f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | λέγομεν | 1 | Paul uses we say here to introduce a modified scripture quotation from Genesis 15:6, which Moses wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “we say what Moses wrote in the Old Testament” | |
667 | 4:9 | m3uh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλογίσθη τῷ Ἀβραὰμ ἡ πίστις εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | ||
668 | 4:10 | trz4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη? ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions to emphasize that Abraham was made righteous without being circumcised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. You may need to combine these sentences. Alternate translation: “Then you surely know how it was credited to him! You surely know whether it was in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” or “Then you surely know how it was credited to him, whether in circumcision or in uncircumcision!” | |
669 | 4:10 | unuf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | πῶς οὖν | 1 | Here, then introduces a result clause that is in the form of a rhetorical question. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “How, as a result,” or “So then, how” | |
670 | 4:10 | uj5i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | πῶς | 1 | How here means “in what circumstances.” Paul is not asking how God made Abraham righteous, but is asking whether or not Abraham was circumcised when God made him righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In what circumstances” | |
671 | 4:10 | bw38 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐλογίσθη & οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ | 1 | In this verse the pronoun it refers to Abraham’s faith, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was Abraham’s faith credited … His faith was not in circumcision” | |
672 | 4:10 | p5rp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πῶς οὖν ἐλογίσθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “How then did God credit it” | |
673 | 4:10 | wbta | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | Here Paul is leaving out some the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Was it credited being in circumcision, or was it credited being in uncircumcision? It was not credited in circumcision, but it was credited in uncircumcision” | |
674 | 4:10 | zj6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν περιτομῇ ὄντι, ἢ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ? οὐκ ἐν περιτομῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Paul implies that Abraham is the subject of these sentences. Alternate translation: “While Abraham was circumcised, or while he was uncircumcised? It was not while he was circumcised, but while he was uncircumcised” | |
675 | 4:11 | unmg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | περιτομῆς & ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ & δι’ ἀκροβυστίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of circumcision and uncircumcision, you could express the same ideas in a different way. Alternate translation: “of being circumcised … while being uncircumcised … through being uncircumcised” | |
676 | 4:11 | d564 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | σημεῖον & περιτομῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the sign that is circumcision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sign that is circumcision” | |
677 | 4:11 | rjhr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the sign of circumcision. Circumcision is not only a sign, but also a seal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these clauses clearer. Alternate translation: “that is, a seal of the righteousness of the faith that he had in his uncircumcision” | |
678 | 4:11 | wm54 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | σφραγῖδα τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a seal that proves the righteousness to be real. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a seal that proves the righteousness” | |
679 | 4:11 | n31z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe righteousness that comes from faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the righteousness from faith” or “of being right with God that comes from trusting in him” | |
680 | 4:11 | zlwg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τῆς ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | This clause gives further information about the faith that Abraham had. Paul is referring to the faith that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “that Abraham had in his uncircumcision” | |
681 | 4:11 | mob7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of uncircumcision as if it were a location someone could be in. He means that Abraham was in the state of being uncircumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while he was uncircumcised” | |
682 | 4:11 | f5vv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God required Abraham to become circumcised. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that he would be” | |
683 | 4:11 | ue6v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πατέρα πάντων τῶν πιστευόντων δι’ ἀκροβυστίας | 1 | Paul uses father to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all those who believe in God. Paul means that Abraham spiritually represents all uncircumcised non-Jews who trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of all those who believe through uncircumcision” or “like the father of all those who believe through uncircumcision” | |
684 | 4:11 | etyl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ ἀκροβυστίας | 1 | Here the word translated as through refers to going through a time period. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “during uncircumcision” or “throughout the time they were uncircumcised” | |
685 | 4:11 | hm61 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην | 1 | Here, so that indicates that this clause could refer to: (1) the purpose of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “in order that the righteousness would be credited to them” (2) the result of Abraham being the father of all those who believe. Alternate translation: “resulting in the righteousness being credited to them” | |
686 | 4:11 | y88e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | εἰς τὸ λογισθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὴν δικαιοσύνην | 1 | ||
687 | 4:11 | ehib | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “being righteous” or “being right with God” | |
688 | 4:12 | v9bu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ πατέρα περιτομῆς | 1 | Here, and indicates that what follows is another purpose for God commanding Abraham to be circumcised after he trusted in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat some of the information from the previous sentence and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “and also so that he would be the father of circumcision” | |
689 | 4:12 | u8j3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πατέρα περιτομῆς τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Paul uses father of circumcision to indicate that Abraham is both the physical ancestor and spiritual ancestor of Jewish people who believe in Jesus. They are both physically circumcised and have the “circumcision of the heart,” which Paul refers to in 2:29. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in his uncircumcision” | |
690 | 4:12 | krkf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς οὐκ ἐκ περιτομῆς μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers will know that these two clauses refer to those Jews who are not only circumcised in their bodies, but also have the same faith in God that Abraham had before he was circumcised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those Jews who are not only circumcised, but who also follow in the steps of the faith of our father Abraham in uncircumcision” | |
691 | 4:12 | s9jt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | καὶ τοῖς στοιχοῦσιν τοῖς ἴχνεσιν τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Here, follow in the steps is an idiom that means to follow someone’s example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who follow the example of the faith of our father Abraham” | |
692 | 4:12 | btrd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς & πίστεως, τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the faith that our father Abraham had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of our father Abraham’s faith” | |
693 | 4:12 | u5ur | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Here, our refers to Paul and his fellow believing Jews, as in 3:9. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of our Jewish father Abraham” | |
694 | 4:12 | ykdc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ | 1 | Here, in uncircumcision has the same meaning as “through circumcision” stated in the previous verse. See how you translated the phrase there. | |
695 | 4:13 | i6xc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here gives the reason why Abraham is the spiritual “father” of both non-Jews and Jews, as stated in 4:11–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
696 | 4:13 | e0a3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἐπαγγελία & τὸ κληρονόμον αὐτὸν εἶναι κόσμου | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of promise and heir, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God promised … that he would inherit the world” | |
697 | 4:13 | yqxx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἢ | 1 | Here, the world translated or indicates that the promise is to Abraham and his seed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also” | |
698 | 4:13 | ew13 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses seed to refer to “offspring.” Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” | |
699 | 4:13 | ct1f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | κόσμου | 1 | Here the world could refer to: (1) all the land of the world. Although God had promised to give the land of Canaan to Abraham’s descendants, the Jews in Paul’s time understood that this promise included the whole earth. This will indeed take place when Jesus, a descendent of Abraham, rules over the whole world. Alternate expression: “of all the land in the world” (2) the people who live in the world, as in 3:19. Alternate translation: “of the people who live in the world” | |
700 | 4:13 | pjyt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐ & διὰ νόμου & ἀλλὰ διὰ δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Here the word translated as through indicates the means by which God gave the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was not by means of the law but by means of the righteousness” or “was not on the basis of the law but on the basis of the righteousness” | |
701 | 4:13 | kquo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the law in 3:21. | |
702 | 4:13 | iqsm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαιοσύνης πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 4:11. | |
703 | 4:14 | hba4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that 4:14–15 give the reasons why God’s promise to Abraham was given “through the righteousness of faith” and not “through the law,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
704 | 4:14 | n0x6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ & οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι, κεκένωται ἡ πίστις | 1 | Paul is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of how people inherit God’s promises. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “suppose the heirs are from the law, then the faith has been emptied” | |
705 | 4:14 | ksui | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι & ἡ πίστις & ἡ ἐπαγγελία | 1 | See how you translated “heir”, the law, and faith in the previous verse. | |
706 | 4:14 | k4ip | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κληρονόμοι | 1 | Here, heirs refers to “Abraham” and “his seed” from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs, Abraham or his seed, are” | |
707 | 4:14 | w977 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἱ ἐκ νόμου κληρονόμοι | 1 | Here, from the law refers to those who try to obey the law of Moses so that God will count them as righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the heirs are those who try to obey the law so that God will count them as righteous” | |
708 | 4:14 | hxvd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κεκένωται ἡ πίστις | 1 | Paul speaks of faith as if it were a container that could be emptied. He means that faith would become powerless or useless to make a person righteous if simply obeyingthe law allows a person to inherit God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “then it would be impossible to become righteous by trusting in God” | |
709 | 4:15 | v1ow | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that the rest of the verse gives the reason why inheriting God’s promise by obeying the law would nullify faith and the promise, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
710 | 4:15 | qma4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὁ & νόμος ὀργὴν κατεργάζεται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could produce something. He means that the law causes God to punish people because they cannot obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the law results in wrath for those who do not obey it” | |
711 | 4:15 | h1x1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὀργὴν | 1 | See how you translated the same use of this word in 1:18. | |
712 | 4:15 | px0m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὗ δὲ οὐκ ἔστιν νόμος, οὐδὲ παράβασις | 1 | Paul speaks of the law and transgression as if they were located in a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “but where the law is not present, neither is transgression present” or “but in a place where God’s law does not exist, transgression also does not exist” | |
713 | 4:15 | t0wx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | παράβασις | 1 | See how you translated the same use of transgression in 2:23. | |
714 | 4:16 | defl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | Here, it refers to the promise mentioned later in the verse and introduced in 4:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise is by faith” | |
715 | 4:16 | nchm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | Here, by faith indicates the means by which someone acquires the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person acquires God’s promise by faith” | |
716 | 4:16 | bc5k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God makes faith the means for acquiring the promise. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” | |
717 | 4:16 | fvax | κατὰ χάριν | 1 | Alternate translation: “by grace” or “on the basis of grace” | ||
718 | 4:16 | cgpq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χάριν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of grace, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is” | |
719 | 4:16 | v8it | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ εἶναι βεβαίαν, τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν | 1 | Here, so that could indicate: (1) a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for the promise to be certain” (2) a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result that the promise might be certain” | |
720 | 4:16 | qalp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν | 1 | See how you translated promise in 4:13. | |
721 | 4:16 | r8ji | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι | 1 | The phrase all the seed is singular but refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” | |
722 | 4:16 | xzsp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παντὶ τῷ σπέρματι | 1 | See how you translated seed in 4:13. | |
723 | 4:16 | a4ai | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οὐ τῷ ἐκ τοῦ νόμου μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῷ ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ | 1 | These clauses give further information about the phrase all the seed. They distinguish between the seed associated with the law and the seed associated with the faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “both from those believers associated with Abraham through the law and those associated with the faith of Abraham” | |
724 | 4:16 | ns6r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ τοῦ νόμου | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:14. | |
725 | 4:16 | qctv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως Ἀβραάμ | 1 | Here, from the faith of Abraham refers to those who trust in God the way Abraham did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who has the same faith as Abraham” | |
726 | 4:16 | welr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὅς ἐστιν πατὴρ πάντων ἡμῶν | 1 | Paul uses father to refer to Abraham as if he physically produced all human beings. Paul means that Abraham is the physical ancestor of all believing Jews and the spiritual ancestor of all believing non-Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who spiritually represents all of us who believe” | |
727 | 4:16 | kd6g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | πάντων ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, us all refers to all the seed and so is inclusive of all believing Jews and non-Jews. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “of all believers in God” or “of all of us who trust in God” | |
728 | 4:17 | nuj8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | καθὼς γέγραπται, ὅτι πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε | 1 | Here Paul interrupts the sentence he began in the previous verse and inserts these two clauses in order to support his argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mark these clauses in a way that shows they are inserted into the middle of a sentence, as in the UST. You could also move these clauses to the end of the verse so that they do not divide the main sentence. | |
729 | 4:17 | ibwm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | Here Paul uses a quotation from the Old Testament in order to support the statement in the previous verse that Abraham “is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between this verse and the previous verse clearer. Alternate translation: “The fact that Abraham is the father of us all is written in the Scriptures, which say” | |
730 | 4:17 | iju4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
731 | 4:17 | sjm0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by Moses. Alternate translation: “just as Moses wrote” | |
732 | 4:17 | peaf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν τέθεικά σε | 1 | In this clause Paul quotes Genesis 17:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
733 | 4:17 | mxm5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τέθεικά σε & ἐπίστευσεν | 1 | The pronoun I refers to God, and you and he refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, have appointed you, Abraham, as … Abraham trusted” | |
734 | 4:17 | n6l7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Paul quotes God using father to refer to Abraham as if he were going to physically produce children who would comprise many nations. God means that Abraham would become the spiritual ancestor of a large number of people from many nations who trust in God as does Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the spiritual representative of numerous groups of people” | |
735 | 4:17 | ph37 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν Θεοῦ, | 1 | Here Paul continues the sentence from the previous verse that he had interrupted with the first two clauses in this verse. This clause completes the previous statement from the previous verse, “who is the father of us all.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. You made need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Abraham is the father of us all in the presence of God whom he trusted” | |
736 | 4:17 | ifwu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κατέναντι & Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul uses in the presence of to refer to Abraham as if he were physically present with God. Paul means that God personally considers Abraham to represent the believers that come from many nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “according to what God thinks” or “in God’s view” | |
737 | 4:17 | s67j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οὗ ἐπίστευσεν & τοῦ ζῳοποιοῦντος τοὺς νεκροὺς, καὶ καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα | 1 | These clauses give further information about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer by making new sentences or by another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is the God whom he trusted. It is this God who makes the dead live and calls the things not existing as existing” | |
738 | 4:17 | tg2e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καλοῦντος τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα | 1 | Paul speaks of the things not existing as if God were calling to them. Paul means that God creates things by commanding them to exist, as Moses describes in Genesis 1:3–27. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “summons into being things that did not previously exist” or “by speaking, creates things that did not previously exist” | |
739 | 4:18 | emih | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὃς & αὐτὸν & σου | 1 | The pronouns who and he and your refer to Abraham, not God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. | |
740 | 4:18 | g8fm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν | 1 | Here, against hope is an idiom meaning “despite what seemed hopeless.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “although it seemed hopeless, he believed on the basis of hope” | |
741 | 4:18 | auah | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὃς παρ’ ἐλπίδα, ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hope, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “who hopefully believed although it seemed hopeless” | |
742 | 4:18 | n62i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐπίστευσεν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believed in God” or “believed what God had promised” | |
743 | 4:18 | bs6y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, so that indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the result of Abraham believing on the basis of hope. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “which resulted in him becoming” | |
744 | 4:18 | qbdq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πατέρα πολλῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:17. | |
745 | 4:18 | b92q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τὸ εἰρημένον | 1 | Here Paul uses what was said to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what was said in the Scriptures” | |
746 | 4:18 | cryi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ εἰρημένον | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was spoken by God. Alternate translation: “what God said” | |
747 | 4:18 | p5el | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὕτως ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα σου | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers would know the rest of what God said in the verse he is quoting (Genesis 15:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Look now at the heavens and count the stars, if you are able to count them. So will your seed be” | |
748 | 4:18 | i2ev | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ σπέρμα | 1 | See how you translated seed in 4:16. | |
749 | 4:19 | ycte | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει, κατενόησεν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα ἤδη νενεκρωμένον, ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων, καὶ τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “He considered his own body as already having died (being about a hundred years old)—and the deadness of the womb of Sarah—but he was not weakening in the faith” | |
750 | 4:19 | m9gq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | καὶ μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει | 1 | ||
751 | 4:19 | s6u1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ἀσθενήσας τῇ πίστει | 1 | Paul speaks of Abraham’s faith as if it were something in which a person could be weakening. He means that Abraham kept trusting God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not ceasing to trust” | |
752 | 4:19 | b3w6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ πίστει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “in how he trusted God” | |
753 | 4:19 | bn9k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἤδη νενεκρωμένον | 1 | Paul speaks of Abraham as if he actually thought his body was dead. Paul means that Abraham knew he was too old to produce a child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “unable to father a child” or “useless for procreating” | |
754 | 4:19 | bfsr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background | ἑκατονταετής που ὑπάρχων | 1 | Here Paul provides background information about Abraham’s age to help his readers understand why Abraham considered his own body as already being dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “since he was about 100 years old” | |
755 | 4:19 | hro2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας | 1 | Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “he also considered the deadness of the womb of Sarah” | |
756 | 4:19 | ghhm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of deadness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that the womb of Sarah was dead” | |
757 | 4:19 | qil5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας | 1 | Paul speaks of Sarah’s womb as if it were dead. He means that she was unable to conceive children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “how Sarah was unable to conceive” or “that Sarah could not bear children” | |
758 | 4:19 | yx92 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὴν νέκρωσιν τῆς μήτρας Σάρρας | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers would know that Sarah had been unable to become pregnant throughout her life, as described in the Old Testament book of Genesis. This fact makes Abraham’s faith even more amazing. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the story of Abraham and Sarah, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, since she could never become pregnant before” or “the deadness of the womb of Sarah, which had always been dead” | |
759 | 4:20 | qn5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εἰς δὲ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not waver in unbelief about what God promised” | |
760 | 4:20 | kicf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | ||
761 | 4:20 | o3zu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς & τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | The word translated as toward could also mean “with regard to” or “regarding.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with regard to the promise of God” or “regarding the promise of God” | |
762 | 4:20 | qcod | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promise that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promise that came from God” or “the promise from God” | |
763 | 4:20 | wgmc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “the things God promised” or “the things God said would happen” | |
764 | 4:20 | ep2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ διεκρίθη τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | Here, did not waver and unbelief form a double negative expression. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he did not waver in believing” or “his belief did not waver” | |
765 | 4:20 | th2x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & τῇ πίστει | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unbelief and faith, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “by distrusting … by trusting” | |
766 | 4:20 | zdj5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God strengthened him in the faith” | |
767 | 4:20 | a4g4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐνεδυναμώθη τῇ πίστει | 1 | Paul speaks of Abraham’s faith as if it were something in which a person could be strengthened. He means that God enabled Abraham to continue trusting him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was enabled to keep on trusting” | |
768 | 4:20 | ew3r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δοὺς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “having glorified God” | |
769 | 4:21 | y2sh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πληροφορηθεὶς | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God fully convinced him” | |
770 | 4:21 | plbf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐπήγγελται & ἐστιν | 1 | The pronoun he refers to God, not Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God had promised, God is” | |
771 | 4:21 | j12r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὃ ἐπήγγελται | 1 | Here, what he had promised refers to the promise Paul describes in 4:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things God promised to Abraham” | |
772 | 4:22 | ympp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ καὶ | 1 | Here, therefore introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “And for this reason” or “And this is the reason why” | |
773 | 4:22 | wlnh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. | |
774 | 4:22 | i56a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated this in 4:3. | |
775 | 4:23 | zdc0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον, ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases and combine them. Alternate translation: “Now the phrase ‘it was credited to him,’ was not written only for his sake” | |
776 | 4:23 | r65c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτὸν & αὐτῷ | 1 | The pronouns his and him refer to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s … to him” | |
777 | 4:23 | bfiw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οὐκ ἐγράφη & δι’ αὐτὸν μόνον | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Moses wrote the quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses did not write it only for Abraham’s sake” | |
778 | 4:23 | bmlm | δι’ αὐτὸν | 1 | Alternate translation: “for him” or “regarding him” | ||
779 | 4:23 | ae1u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὅτι ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ, | 1 | This clause is a quotation from Genesis 15:6. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. | |
780 | 4:23 | jft0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ | 1 | See how you translated this in the previous verse. | |
781 | 4:24 | pfc9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | Here, our and whom refer to all those who believe in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “for the sake us believers who are about to be credited, to us who believe in the one who raised from the dead ones Jesus, the Lord of us all” | |
782 | 4:24 | ffdm | δι’ ἡμᾶς | 1 | See how you translated “for his sake” in the previous verse. | ||
783 | 4:24 | nh4k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “to whom God is about to credit it” | |
784 | 4:24 | bu1m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | μέλλει | 1 | Here the pronoun it refers to the “faith” mentioned in 4:5 and 4:20. Previously it referred to Abraham’s faith, but in this verse it refers to our faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our faith is about” | |
785 | 4:24 | mujr | λογίζεσθαι | 1 | See how you translated credited in the previous verse. | ||
786 | 4:24 | artt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | This clause refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead ones” | |
787 | 4:24 | i6vl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” | |
788 | 4:24 | iq69 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase translated the dead ones refers to dead people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the place where dead people are” | |
789 | 4:25 | irue | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὃς & ἡμῶν & τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν | 1 | Here the pronoun who refers to Jesus, and our refers to all “those who believe” in him, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus … we believers’ … the justification of us believers” | |
790 | 4:25 | cca1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὃς παρεδόθη & ἠγέρθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up … God raised” | |
791 | 4:25 | b999 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὃς παρεδόθη | 1 | Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were a thing that could be given up to another person. Paul means that God allowed people to arrest and kill Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “who was allowed to be killed” | |
792 | 4:25 | op41 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν & διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of trespasses and justification, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because we trespassed … to make us righteous” | |
793 | 4:25 | imvc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν | 1 | Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in 4:23–24. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate the reason why Jesus was given up. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of our trespasses” | |
794 | 4:25 | gmbd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἠγέρθη | 1 | See how you translated raised in the previous verse. | |
795 | 4:25 | hzop | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν | 1 | Here Paul uses for the sake of differently than he did in the first part of this verse. Here Paul uses this phrase to indicate one of the purposes for Jesus being raised. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of our justification” | |
796 | 5:intro | i1dt | 0 | Romans 5 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this ChapterThe second AdamAdam was the first man. He was created by God and called the first “son” of God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. In this chapter Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” and the true son of God. Jesus brings eternal life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterInclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “justified by faith” in 5:1. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
797 | 5:1 | age4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word Therefore here marks a new section of the letter. It also introduces a result clause that summarizes the blessed results of a person becoming righteous by trusting in Jesus, which Paul just discussed in 1:18–4:25. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true” | |
798 | 5:1 | xmp3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | δικαιωθέντες & ἐκ πίστεως, εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν, διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “let us have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, because we have been justified by faith” or “we can have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ, since we have been justified by faith” | |
799 | 5:1 | xott | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιωθέντες | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “because God makes us righteous” or “since God makes us right with him” | |
800 | 5:1 | wbwx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. | |
801 | 5:1 | ldru | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants | εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν | 1 | Some ancient copies say “we have peace,” which makes sense, since 5:1–5 are a list of blessings that belong to those people who have been justified by faith. If the reading let us have peace is correct, this phrase may be indicating Paul’s desire that his fellow believers continue to experience the peace they have with God. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. | |
802 | 5:1 | kjpb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | ἔχωμεν | 1 | Paul uses the phrase let us have peace to exhort his Christian readers to continue living peacefully with God. It is not a command. This phrase does not imply that those who have been justified by faith do not yet have peace with God. Use a form in your language that communicates an exhortation. Alternate translation: “we must continue to have” | |
803 | 5:1 | hi12 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of peace, you could express the same idea with a verbal form, as in the UST. | |
804 | 5:1 | o2yr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰρήνην ἔχωμεν | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if they could possess or own peace. He means that they can live peacefully with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “let us live in a peaceful manner” | |
805 | 5:1 | s6xd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἔχωμεν & ἡμῶν | 1 | Here and throughout this chapter, us and our inclusively refer to all those having been justified by faith in Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “let us believers have … our” | |
806 | 5:1 | xaeg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers have peace with God. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” or “which was caused by our Lord Jesus Christ” | |
807 | 5:2 | slyh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δι’ οὗ καὶ τὴν προσαγωγὴν ἐσχήκαμεν, τῇ πίστει εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of access, faith, or grace, you could express the same ideas another way. Alternate translation: “through whom we also access and stand in how gracious God is by trusting in him” | |
808 | 5:2 | tsbo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὗ | 1 | The pronoun whom refers to “our Lord Jesus Christ,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ” | |
809 | 5:2 | i50u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | καὶ & ἐσχήκαμεν & ἑστήκαμεν & καυχώμεθα | 1 | The pronoun we in this verse refers inclusively to all believers in Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “we believers also have … we believers stand … we believers boast” | |
810 | 5:2 | af0n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς τὴν χάριν ταύτην, ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν | 1 | Paul speaks of grace as if it were a location that someone could access and stand within. He means that trusting in Jesus allows believers to confidently experience how gracious God is toward his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “to confidently experience how kind God is” or “to safely experience how gracious God is” | |
811 | 5:2 | dxcu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | καυχώμεθα ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of hope and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “we may boast because we are confident that we will be glorified with God” | |
812 | 5:2 | zp5p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using possessive forms to describe how glory relates to God. This could refer to: (1) the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. Alternate translation: “of sharing in the glory God has” or “of the glory from God” (2) glorifying God, as in the similar phrase “the glory of the imperishable God” in 1:23. Alternate translation: “of glorifying God” | |
813 | 5:3 | q5p7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ μόνον δέ | 1 | The pronoun this here refers to boasting about “the hope of the glory of God,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And we not only boast on the basis of the hope of the glory of God” | |
814 | 5:3 | c644 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν | 1 | Here, in our sufferings could mean: (1) believers can boast about their sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast about our sufferings” (2) believers can boast while they are experiencing sufferings. Alternate translation: “we can also boast when we are distressed” | |
815 | 5:3 | xeak | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰδότες | 1 | Here, knowing indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are the reasons why believers can boast in our sufferings. Use a natural way in your language for introducing reasons. Alternate translation: “since we know” | |
816 | 5:3 | c0rl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν & ἡ θλῖψις & ὑπομονὴν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings, suffering, and endurance, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “when we suffer … when we suffer, it … a way to endure” | |
817 | 5:3 | lo57 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ θλῖψις ὑπομονὴν κατεργάζεται | 1 | Paul speaks of endurance as if it were an object that could be produced. He means that when Christians trust in God while suffering, they develop greater endurance than they had before experiencing suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “this suffering helps us know how to endure” | |
818 | 5:4 | w7c2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ ἐλπίδα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and endurance produces character, and this character produces hope” | |
819 | 5:4 | dt8w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ & ὑπομονὴ | 1 | See how you translated endurance in the previous verse. | |
820 | 5:4 | gjvh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δοκιμήν, ἡ δὲ δοκιμὴ | 1 | The word translated character refers specifically to the mental and moral qualities of someone who has been approved by God because they have successfully endured testing. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of character, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “qualities of which God approves, and the approved qualities” | |
821 | 5:4 | eh9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐλπίδα | 1 | See how you translated hope in 5:2. | |
822 | 5:5 | u4xh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς οὐ καταισχύνει, ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And because the love of God has been poured into our hearts through the Holy Spirit, who has been given to us, that hope does not disappoint” | |
823 | 5:5 | rctz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ δὲ ἐλπὶς | 1 | ||
824 | 5:5 | qka8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὅτι ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν | 1 | Paul speaks of love as if it were something that could be poured out of a container, and he speaks figurative of our hearts as though they were containers that could be filled. He means that the Holy Spirit has completely revealed to God’s people how much God loves them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “because the Holy Spirit, who was given to us, has deeply revealed how much God loves his people” | |
825 | 5:5 | dc95 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐκκέχυται ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, τοῦ δοθέντος ἡμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom God gave us, has poured the love of God into our hearts” | |
826 | 5:5 | clmb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how love relates to God. Here, the love of God could refer to: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “God’s love” or “God’s love for us” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “our love for God” | |
827 | 5:5 | glt1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:21. | |
828 | 5:6 | x5eg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows in 5:6–8 explains “the love of God” in 5:5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” | |
829 | 5:6 | a7s7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν | 1 | In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being weak” | |
830 | 5:6 | xqr3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἔτι & ὄντων ἡμῶν ἀσθενῶν | 1 | Here, weak means that people are completely unable to make themselves righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we still being powerless to make ourselves righteous” | |
831 | 5:6 | xl85 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὲρ ἀσεβῶν | 1 | Here, ungodly ones refers to the we mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on behalf of us ungodly ones” | |
832 | 5:7 | o92c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here,For introduces an explanation, by contrast, of how surprising it is that Christ would die on behalf of ungodly sinners, as stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression, as in the UST. | |
833 | 5:7 | h089 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo | μόλις γὰρ & τις ἀποθανεῖται & γὰρ & τάχα τις | 1 | Paul uses someone twice in this verse in two hypothetical situations. He does this to help his readers recognize how rare it is for someone to voluntarily die on behalf of another person. Use the natural form in your language for expressing hypothetical situations. Alternate translation: “Let us consider how rare it would be for someone to die … Let us, though, suppose that perhaps someone” | |
834 | 5:7 | x60d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | γὰρ & τάχα τις | 2 | What follows the word though here is in contrast to what Paul stated in the previous sentence. Although someone will hardly die for a righteous person, someone might possibly be willing to die for a good person. Although Paul does not state the difference between a righteous person and a good person, he contrasts both examples to emphasize how unlikely it is for a person to willingly die on behalf of another person. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast, perhaps someone” | |
835 | 5:7 | mqyq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ τολμᾷ ἀποθανεῖν | 1 | Paul speaks of dying as if it were a dare or challenge for someone to overcome. He means that someone would be brave enough to give their life for the sake of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “might even be willing to die” or “would even be brave enough to die” | |
836 | 5:8 | qh0h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | ἑαυτοῦ | 1 | Paul uses the word his own to emphasize how much God loves his people. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “his very own” or “his personal” | |
837 | 5:8 | vh6y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀγάπην εἰς ἡμᾶς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of love, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “how much God loves us” | |
838 | 5:8 | c8vd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν | 1 | In this clause Paul is describing something that was true during the time period he is describing in the rest of the verse. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “during the time we were still being sinners” | |
839 | 5:8 | fel5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἔτι ἁμαρτωλῶν ὄντων ἡμῶν, Χριστὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἀπέθανεν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation (omitting the preceding comma): “Christ died for us while we were still being sinners” | |
840 | 5:9 | vnxd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul described in 5:6–8. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Much more, therefore” | |
841 | 5:9 | tewt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | πολλῷ οὖν μᾶλλον | 1 | Much more then here strongly emphasizes that what follows is another important result of what Christ did for us. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “It is then much more certain that” | |
842 | 5:9 | zp4v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ | 1 | This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have now been justified by his blood” | |
843 | 5:9 | x9yi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δικαιωθέντες νῦν ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his blood having now justified us” | |
844 | 5:9 | nvs3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ | 1 | See how you translated his blood in 3:25. | |
845 | 5:9 | jbaz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σωθησόμεθα δι’ αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will save us” | |
846 | 5:9 | bev3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ὀργῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the wrath, you could use a different expression. Here, the wrath refers specifically to “the day of wrath”, which is mentioned in 2:5. Alternate translation: “when God finally judges sinners” | |
847 | 5:10 | wply | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So” | |
848 | 5:10 | mz06 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ & ἐχθροὶ ὄντες | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since, being enemies” | |
849 | 5:10 | rnc5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατηλλάγημεν τῷ Θεῷ διὰ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas with active forms or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the death of his Son reconciled us to God” | |
850 | 5:10 | cu3c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. | |
851 | 5:10 | o1m6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | πολλῷ μᾶλλον | 1 | Here, much more strongly emphasizes that what follows is an important result of having been reconciled with God. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “it is much more certain” | |
852 | 5:10 | n817 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καταλλαγέντες | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he having reconciled us” | |
853 | 5:10 | e4ug | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καταλλαγέντες | 1 | This clause states the reason why we can be much more certain that we will be saved. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because we have been reconciled” | |
854 | 5:10 | tmxf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σωθησόμεθα ἐν τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express this idea with an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his life will save us” | |
855 | 5:10 | gcto | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | σωθησόμεθα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the similar statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “when God finally judges people, we will be saved ” | |
856 | 5:10 | eeo4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here life implies the life that Jesus has after God made him alive again. This resurrection life showed that God had accepted Jesus’ death as the payment for the sins of everyone who trusts in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ life after God caused him to become alive again” | |
857 | 5:10 | b3z4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ζωῇ αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of life, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “him being alive again” | |
858 | 5:11 | a0vk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ μόνον δέ | 1 | The pronoun this could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not only are we saved by his life, but” (2) what Paul said in 5:2–10. Alternate translation: “Not only are all these things true, but” | |
859 | 5:11 | zp36 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ καυχώμενοι ἐν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if they were boasting inside of God. Paul means that these believers in Christ boast about how great God is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we also are boasting about how great God is” or “we also are boasting because of God” | |
860 | 5:11 | uukm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that our Lord Jesus Christ is the means by which believers can boast. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to be able to boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what our Lord Jesus Christ did for us” | |
861 | 5:11 | r0zj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ οὗ νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν | 1 | Here, through indicates that Jesus is the means by which believers have received the reconciliation. This refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have peace with God, as briefly mentioned in 4:25. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through what he did for us that caused us to receive the reconciliation” | |
862 | 5:11 | xjes | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | νῦν τὴν καταλλαγὴν ἐλάβομεν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of reconciliation, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “we have now been reconciled with God” | |
863 | 5:12 | hjx4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | διὰ τοῦτο | 1 | The phrase For this reason indicates that what follows in 5:12–21 is Paul’s explanation of the relationship between human sin and God’s grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Because of this” | |
864 | 5:12 | wf9f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὥσπερ δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσῆλθεν, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους ὁ θάνατος διῆλθεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin and death as if they were objects that could enter a place or spread within people. Paul means that the way God intended for the world and human beings to function became thoroughly corrupted by sin and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “just as through one man sin began to exist in the world, and that sin would result in that man’s death, so also all men born after that man would die too” | |
865 | 5:12 | pa8s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Paul uses the phrase one man to refer to Adam, the first human being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in 5:14. Alternate translation: “through the first man, Adam,” | |
866 | 5:12 | smc2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἁμαρτία & τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος; καὶ οὕτως & ὁ θάνατος | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sin and death, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “sinful things … sinful things, living things could die, so also the ability to die” | |
867 | 5:12 | uxcs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | διὰ τῆς ἁμαρτίας ὁ θάνατος | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and through sin death entered into the world” | |
868 | 5:12 | xhbv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπους | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” | |
869 | 5:12 | jy25 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐφ’ ᾧ πάντες ἥμαρτον | 1 | Here the pronoun which could refer to: (1) the fact that Paul states in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “because of this fact, namely, that all sinned” (2) the one man mentioned earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “because of the one man, all sinned” | |
870 | 5:12 | si2i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πάντες | 1 | Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all men” or “all humanity” or “all people” | |
871 | 5:13 | at4i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows in 5:13–14 explains what came before it. Here it explains how death and sin existed before the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
872 | 5:13 | e6bx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἄχρι γὰρ νόμου & μὴ ὄντος νόμου | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For until the law came … as that was when there was no law” | |
873 | 5:13 | abjg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου & νόμου | 1 | In this verse law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews. See how you translated law in 2:12. | |
874 | 5:13 | v51t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία | 1 | See how you translated sin in the previous verse. | |
875 | 5:13 | uyd4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἁμαρτία ἦν ἐν κόσμῳ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were an object that could exist in a place. Paul means that people sinned in the world before God gave his laws to Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people sinned in the world” | |
876 | 5:13 | juq7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται | 2 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not charge them with sinning” or “God did not reckon it as sin” | |
877 | 5:13 | izno | ἁμαρτία & οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται | 2 | Alternate translation: “a record of sin is not kept” or “no account is kept of sins” | ||
878 | 5:13 | v5l9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | μὴ ὄντος νόμου | 1 | Here, being could indicate: (1) the reason why sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “because there was no law” (2) the time when sin is not charged. Alternate translation: “when there was no law” | |
879 | 5:13 | j04c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ ὄντος νόμου | 1 | Here, no law implies that God had not yet given people his laws that could help them identify what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being no law to identify to people what sin is” | |
880 | 5:14 | bd3q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐβασίλευσεν ὁ θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως, καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς | 1 | Here Paul speaks of death as if it were a king who ruled over people. Paul means that nobody could prevent themselves from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no human from Adam until Moses could escape dying, even those” or “human life from Adam until Moses inevitably ended in death, even the lives of those” | |
881 | 5:14 | u66m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὁ θάνατος | 1 | See how you translated death in 5:12. | |
882 | 5:14 | pdrh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως | 1 | Here, Adam refers to the period of time when Adam lived and Moses refers to the period of time when Moses lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the time when Adam lived until the time when Moses lived” | |
883 | 5:14 | w24g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ | 1 | This phrase gives further information about over whom death ruled. It is not making a distinction between those who lived during the time of Adam and Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “even over the people who did not disobey God in the same way as did Adam” | |
884 | 5:14 | skns | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of likeness, transgression, and pattern, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Adam transgressed, who typifies the one who is coming” or “exactly how Adam transgressed, who resembles the one who is coming” | |
885 | 5:14 | k2w7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the likeness relates to the transgression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “like Adam’s transgression” or “in the same way Adam transgressed” | |
886 | 5:14 | e4ze | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Ἀδάμ, ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος | 1 | Paul speaks of Adam as if he were a model or pattern. Paul means that Adam’s role is similar to the role of the one who is coming because both people do things that affect all human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Adam, who is a replica of the one who is coming” or “Adam, who models the one who is coming” | |
887 | 5:14 | mu4s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ μέλλοντος | 1 | The phrase the one who is coming refers to Jesus. Paul means that Adam represents the ideal human being, Jesus, who would come in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “representing Jesus, who would come in the future” or “prefiguring Jesus, who was destined to come” | |
888 | 5:15 | x37x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ παράπτωμα & τὸ χάρισμα & τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of trespass, gracious gift, grace, and gift, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “how Adam trespassed … what God graciously gave … when the one man trespassed … how gracious God is and what he graciously gave” | |
889 | 5:15 | ieb0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὕτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the gracious gift is not like the trespass” | |
890 | 5:15 | sful | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift. Use a connection word or other way to indicate that the second sentence of this verse explains the first one. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You see,” | |
891 | 5:15 | yxej | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gracious gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “as” | |
892 | 5:15 | kdhb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the trespass that was committed by the one man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “by one man’s trespass” or “because one man trespassed” | |
893 | 5:15 | e9me | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | οἱ πολλοὶ & τοὺς πολλοὺς | 1 | Here Paul is using the adjective many as a noun in order to describe a large group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase, as in the UST. | |
894 | 5:15 | h6c3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | πολλῷ μᾶλλον | 1 | Here, how much more strongly emphasizes the difference between the results of the trespass of Adam and the grace of God that comes through Jesus Christ. Use a natural way in your language to express strong emphasis. Alternate translation: “even more certainly” | |
895 | 5:15 | tfhj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι, τῇ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, εἰς τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐπερίσσευσεν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “abounded to the many the grace of God and the gift by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ” | |
896 | 5:15 | ejxz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe grace that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s grace” or “the grace from God” or “how kind God is” | |
897 | 5:15 | wn36 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the grace that comes from the one man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from the one man” or “associated with the one man” | |
898 | 5:16 | ns9a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καὶ οὐχ ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος, τὸ δώρημα; τὸ μὲν γὰρ κρίμα ἐξ ἑνὸς, εἰς κατάκριμα, τὸ δὲ χάρισμα ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “Indeed, because the judgment came from one man unto condemnation, but the gift came from many trespasses unto justification. This is why the gift is not the same as through the one man who sinned” | |
899 | 5:16 | rmpt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ δώρημα & τὸ δὲ χάρισμα | 1 | See how you translated these two phrases in the previous verse. | |
900 | 5:16 | ok2k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the same as what came through one who sinned” | |
901 | 5:16 | muum | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἑνὸς ἁμαρτήσαντος | 1 | Here, one who sinned refers to Adam, as mentioned in 5:12–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Adam, the one who sinned” | |
902 | 5:16 | ub9s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ & κρίμα | 2 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way, as in the UST. | |
903 | 5:16 | eusx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ ἑνὸς | 1 | Here, one refers to the one sin Adam committed. It does not refer to Adam himself, as the previous one does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from Adam’s trespass” or “from the sin Adam committed” | |
904 | 5:16 | xza3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐξ ἑνὸς | 1 | Here, from one could indicate: (1) that the judgment happened after the one trespass. Alternate translation: “after one” (2) that the judgment happened because of the one trespass. Alternate translation: “because of one” | |
905 | 5:16 | t4t8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς κατάκριμα & παραπτωμάτων, εἰς δικαίωμα | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of condemnation, trespasses, and justification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to cause God to condemn … sinful deeds people have done, to cause God to justify” | |
906 | 5:16 | s82t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς κατάκριμα | 1 | Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s judgment. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “to the resulting condemnation” | |
907 | 5:16 | m5k4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐκ πολλῶν παραπτωμάτων | 1 | Here, from many trespasses could indicate: (1) that the gracious gift happened after many trespasses. Alternate translation: “after many trespasses” (2) that the gracious gift happened because of many trespasses. Alternate translation: “because of many trespasses” | |
908 | 5:16 | jarb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς δικαίωμα | 1 | Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s gracious gift. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “to the resulting justification” | |
909 | 5:17 | n5zx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces a further explanation of the difference between the trespass and the gracious gift, as discussed in 5:15–16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact” | |
910 | 5:17 | mhtc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. He has concluded that the benefits of the gift are superior to the consequences of the trespass. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “considering that” | |
911 | 5:17 | lcyd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 5:15. | |
912 | 5:17 | whbf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | τοῦ ἑνὸς & τοῦ ἑνός & τοῦ ἑνὸς | 1 | See how you translated the first occurrence of one in the previous verse. | |
913 | 5:17 | yvq5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ τοῦ ἑνὸς παραπτώματι, ὁ θάνατος & τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης & ἐν ζωῇ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “because the one man trespassed, the fact that people die … how abundantly kind God is and how he makes people righteous … by living” | |
914 | 5:17 | kz6z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὁ θάνατος ἐβασίλευσεν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 5:14. | |
915 | 5:17 | mtr9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ τοῦ ἑνός | 1 | Here, through indicates that the one is the reason why death ruled. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one” | |
916 | 5:17 | lf7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | πολλῷ μᾶλλον | 1 | ||
917 | 5:17 | hfvt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν, διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “through the one man Jesus Christ will … rule in life” | |
918 | 5:17 | xy6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἱ & ἐν ζωῇ βασιλεύσουσιν | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if they were kings who rule in a location called life. This could mean: (1) they will have control over their sinful desires while physically alive. Alternate translation: “will those … have control over their sinfulness while alive” (2) they will rule with Jesus Christ while living eternally. Alternative translation: “will those … rule and live eternally” | |
919 | 5:17 | nr25 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος καὶ τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης λαμβάνοντες | 1 | This clause describes the people who will rule in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “those who receive the abundance of the grace and the gift of the righteousness as well” | |
920 | 5:17 | fodc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | οἱ τὴν περισσείαν τῆς χάριτος & λαμβάνοντες | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe abundance that relates to grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “those who receive God’s abundant grace” or “those who experience how abundantly gracious God is” | |
921 | 5:17 | o8c3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how righteousness is a gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gift, which is that of being made righteous,” | |
922 | 5:17 | ehbk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that the one, Jesus Christ is the reason why his people will rule in life. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of the one, Jesus Christ” | |
923 | 5:17 | uifs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἑνὸς, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | The phrase the one, Jesus Christ refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to rule in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what the one, Jesus Christ has done for them” | |
924 | 5:18 | e7cq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἄρα οὖν ὡς δι’ ἑνὸς παραπτώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς κατάκριμα, οὕτως καὶ δι’ ἑνὸς δικαιώματος, εἰς πάντας ἀνθρώπους εἰς δικαίωσιν ζωῆς | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “So then, as one man trespassed and this trespass caused all men to become condemned, so also one man acted righteously and this act caused all men to become justified for living eternally” | |
925 | 5:18 | mccf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | So then indicates that what follows in 5:18–21 summarizes the ideas of 5:12–17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” | |
926 | 5:18 | sfwg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | δι’ & δι’ | 1 | See how you translated through in the previous verse. | |
927 | 5:18 | z0jq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | παραπτώματος & κατάκριμα & δικαίωσιν | 1 | See how you translated trespass, condemnation, and justification in 5:16. | |
928 | 5:18 | n8pr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | πάντας ἀνθρώπους | -1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See how your translated all men in 5:12. | |
929 | 5:18 | bcm2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | δικαίωσιν ζωῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how justification relates to life. This could mean: (1) justification that leads to life. Alternate translation: “justification that brings eternal life” (2) justification that is life. Alternate translation: “justification, which is eternal life” | |
930 | 5:18 | bmey | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζωῆς | 1 | Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” | |
931 | 5:19 | hj69 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
932 | 5:19 | sjek | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ | 1 | See how you translated the similar connective words just as and so also in the previous verse. | |
933 | 5:19 | rgji | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ & διὰ | 1 | See how you translated through in the previous two verses. | |
934 | 5:19 | z8r8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου & τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and obedience, you could express the same ideas with verbal forms. You may need to supply an object for the verbs, such as “God” or “God’s command.” Alternate translation: “the one man disobeying God … the one man obeying God” | |
935 | 5:19 | qpsm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Here, the one man refers to “Adam.” See how you translated the similar use of one man in 5:12. | |
936 | 5:19 | q8lj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | διὰ τῆς παρακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, ἁμαρτωλοὶ κατεστάθησαν οἱ πολλοί | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disobedience of the one man caused the many to become sinners” | |
937 | 5:19 | huig | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | οἱ πολλοί | -1 | See how you translated the many in 5:15. | |
938 | 5:19 | px2r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἁμαρτωλοὶ | 1 | See how you translated sinners in 5:8. | |
939 | 5:19 | bhra | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | διὰ τῆς ὑπακοῆς τοῦ ἑνὸς, δίκαιοι κατασταθήσονται οἱ πολλοί | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the obedience of the one caused the many to become righteous ones” | |
940 | 5:19 | haks | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἑνὸς | 2 | Here, the one refers to “Jesus Christ.” See how you translated the third occurrence of **the one ** in 5:17. | |
941 | 5:20 | lah6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμος | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12. | |
942 | 5:20 | w958 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | παρεισῆλθεν | 1 | The word translated slipped in can refer to sneaking in unnoticed, as in Jude 1:4. Paul may be stressing how the coming of the law was like an unwelcome person secretly intruding at some location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “intruded like a person sneaking in unnoticed” | |
943 | 5:20 | ttcw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ παράπτωμα & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἡ χάρις | 1 | See how you translated trespass in 5:15–18, sin in 5:12–13, and grace in 5:15 and 5:17. | |
944 | 5:20 | relk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα & ἐπλεόνασεν ἡ ἁμαρτία, ὑπερεπερίσσευσεν ἡ χάρις | 1 | Paul speaks of the trespass, sin, and grace as if they were objects that could increase in amount. He means that the power or influence of these concepts expanded throughout humanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “the trespass might be more evident … sin became more evident, the grace became even more obvious” | |
945 | 5:20 | wbh3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα πλεονάσῃ τὸ παράπτωμα | 1 | This clause could refer to: (1) one of God’s purposes for giving the law. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the trespass” (2) the result of God giving the law. Alternate translation (with preceding comma): “resulting in the trespass increasing” | |
946 | 5:20 | godn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὗ | 1 | Here Paul uses where to refer to sin and grace as if they were located somewhere. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “as” | |
947 | 5:21 | ycy7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God caused grace to abound, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” | |
948 | 5:21 | ymxy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ | 1 | See how you translated just as and so also in the 5:19. | |
949 | 5:21 | leu9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ & ἡ χάρις & δικαιοσύνης & ζωὴν αἰώνιον | 1 | See how you translated sin and grace in the previous verse, death and righteousness in 5:17, and eternal life in 2:7. | |
950 | 5:21 | wmy8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμαρτία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that everyone was controlled by their sinful desires. While death ruled in 5:14, sin ruled after God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone was controlled by sin” | |
951 | 5:21 | wuh2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ | 1 | Here, in death could refer to: (1) the location in which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “in the place where death exists” (2) the means by which sin ruled. Alternate translation: “by means of death” | |
952 | 5:21 | kc21 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Here Paul speaks of grace as if it were a king ruling over people. Paul means that God’s grace allows people to become righteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how gracious God is might make people become righteous” | |
953 | 5:21 | bk72 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ & διὰ | 1 | See how you translated through in the 5:17–19. | |
954 | 5:21 | c9nj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον | 1 | Here, to indicates that was follows is the result of God’s grace ruling through righteousness. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “resulted in eternal life” | |
955 | 5:21 | axr9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν | 1 | The phrase Jesus Christ our Lord refers to what Jesus did for believers in order for them to have eternal life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus Christ our Lord has done for them” | |
956 | 6:intro | v522 | 0 | Romans 6 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this ChapterSlaveryIn this chapter Paul frequently uses the metaphor of the relationship between slaves and their masters. He speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were slaves to sin and the death it causes (6:6, 16–17, 20). He also speaks figuratively of Christians as if God has freed them from being enslaved to sin and has himself or righteousness as their master (6:18, 22). Because Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, they should instead serve God and live in a way that glorifies him (6:12–14, 19). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/servant]]) Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterRhetorical QuestionsIn 6:1–3, 15–16, and 21 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to answer objections that people might make about what he is saying. Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterInclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people those who have been “baptized into Christ Jesus” in 6:3. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
957 | 6:1 | fxgw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous chapter, especially what he said in 5:20. See how you translated What then in 3:1 and 4:1. | |
958 | 6:1 | pvg3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ? | 1 | In this verse Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question to address rumors some people may have been spreading that misrepresent his teachings. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that we should continue in the sin so that the grace might increase!” | |
959 | 6:1 | t8tl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ? | 1 | In this verse and the first part of the next verse, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
960 | 6:1 | fj9e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν | 1 | Here, we includes all those of whom Paul spoke as those “who were baptized into Christ Jesus,” as mentioned in 6:3, so we is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
961 | 6:1 | ngpt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & ἡ χάρις | 1 | See how you translated sin and grace in 5:21. | |
962 | 6:1 | sa16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ | 1 | Paul speaks of sin as if it were a location. He is referring to the idea of people continuing to live sinfully after they have become Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “Should we continue to live sinfully” | |
963 | 6:1 | ju6f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ | 1 | Paul speaks here of grace as if it were an object that could increase in amount, as he also does in 5:20. He is referring to the idea of Christians experiencing the power or influence of grace in their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “so that we can experience more grace” | |
964 | 6:1 | f5qt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ | 1 | The phrase so that here introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the supposed purpose for which someone would sin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to increase the grace” | |
965 | 6:2 | e82n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | In this verse Paul responds to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” | |
966 | 6:2 | pa6g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:4. | |
967 | 6:2 | wvhg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We who died to sin surely cannot still live in it!” | |
968 | 6:2 | rgte | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἵτινες ἀπεθάνομεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, πῶς ἔτι ζήσομεν ἐν αὐτῇ? | 1 | Paul speaks of sin as if it were a location where Christians could live or die. Here, died to sin refers to the idea that Christians are no longer controlled by their sinful desires. By contrast, live in sin means to continue being controlled by sinful desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We who are no longer controlled by our desire to sin, how could we still live as though we are controlled by that desire” | |
969 | 6:3 | wwaw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ὅτι ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that as many as were baptized into Christ Jesus were baptized into his death!” | |
970 | 6:3 | wh26 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὅσοι | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as” | |
971 | 6:3 | yy94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὅσοι ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many people as someone baptized into Christ Jesus someone also baptized into his death” | |
972 | 6:3 | bd11 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐβαπτίσθημεν εἰς Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν, εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἐβαπτίσθημεν | 1 | Paul speaks of Christ Jesus and his death as if they were locations into which someone could be baptized. Here, into Christ Jesus refers to being united with Christ Jesus, and into his death refers to sharing in the spiritual benefits of his death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these two phrases plainly. Alternative translation: “were baptized are united with Christ Jesus and also share in the benefits of his death” | |
973 | 6:3 | tcve | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν θάνατον | 1 | See how you translated death in 5:21. | |
974 | 6:4 | m43r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | συνετάφημεν οὖν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “We were buried, therefore” | |
975 | 6:4 | f4va | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συνετάφημεν οὖν αὐτῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of Christians as if they were buried with Jesus when they were baptized. Paul mentions burial because it emphasizes that Jesus did indeed die. Here he means that Christians are indeed united with Christ’s death and share in its spiritual benefits. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “We are indeed united, then, with Christ’s death” or “We are so united, then, with Christ’s death that it is as if we were really buried with him” | |
976 | 6:4 | vva7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ βαπτίσματος εἰς τὸν θάνατον | 1 | Here, through indicates that the following phrase is the means by which Christians were buried with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the baptism into his death” | |
977 | 6:4 | kmn3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς τὸν θάνατον | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
978 | 6:4 | y71v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν θάνατον & τῆς δόξης & ζωῆς | 1 | See how you translated death in 6:3, glory in 5:2, and life in 5:21. | |
979 | 6:4 | k1el | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Paul is stating one purpose for which God instituted baptism. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “in order for us to walk in newness of life, just as Christ was raised from the dead by the glory of the Father” | |
980 | 6:4 | kado | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὥσπερ & οὕτως καὶ | 1 | See how you translated just as and so also in the 5:19. | |
981 | 6:4 | z6zk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | ὥσπερ ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς περιπατήσωμεν | 1 | The point of this comparison is that the new way a Christian should live after being baptized is similar to being raised from the dead, as Christ was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we should live in a new way, similar to when Christ was raised from death through the glory of the Father” | |
982 | 6:4 | dpy2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the glory of the Father raised Christ from dead ones” | |
983 | 6:4 | t47r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἠγέρθη Χριστὸς ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. | |
984 | 6:4 | ce9z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:24. | |
985 | 6:4 | gblc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | διὰ τῆς δόξης τοῦ Πατρός | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe glory that comes from or characterizes the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “through the glory from the Father” or “through the Father’s glory” | |
986 | 6:4 | y29w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς δόξης | 1 | Here, the glory refers specifically to God’s glorious power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the glorious power” | |
987 | 6:4 | r3hn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | τοῦ Πατρός | 1 | Father is an important title for God. | |
988 | 6:4 | gtns | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡμεῖς & περιπατήσωμεν | 1 | Here Paul uses walk to refer to how a person lives and behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “we … might act” | |
989 | 6:4 | hyab | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν καινότητι ζωῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe life that is characterized by newness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with a new life” or “like those made newly alive” | |
990 | 6:5 | msbq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “So then,” | |
991 | 6:5 | jdzp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” | |
992 | 6:5 | p6xk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of death as if it were something with which Christians could be physically planted together. He means that by being baptized, Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we participate in Christ’s death through baptism” | |
993 | 6:5 | z8wa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ & τῆς ἀναστάσεως | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas of likeness and resurrection, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what is like his death … his resurrecting from the dead” | |
994 | 6:5 | hg5y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ ὁμοιώματι τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul implies that likeness of his death refers to the “baptism” referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of his death that is represented by baptism” or “in baptism, which represents dying with him” | |
995 | 6:5 | kfvs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως ἐσόμεθα | 1 | Here Paul speaks of resurrection as if it were something of which Christians could become part. He means that Christians will one day rise from the dead like Christ did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we will also certainly be resurrected like Christ” | |
996 | 6:6 | fhvh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God crucified our old man together with him” | |
997 | 6:6 | lu12 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος συνεσταυρώθη | 1 | Paul speaks of our sinful human nature as if it were an old man who was nailed to the same cross as Christ. Paul means that when Christ was crucified, he destroyed the power of sin and death that controlled all humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God destroyed the power of sin that controlled people when Christ was crucified” | |
998 | 6:6 | y0ib | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | συνεσταυρώθη | 1 | The pronoun him refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was crucified with Christ” | |
999 | 6:6 | n6o6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God crucified our old man. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that” | |
1000 | 6:6 | jpge | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might nullify the body of sin” | |
1001 | 6:6 | jw00 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καταργηθῇ τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul speaks of the body of sin as if it were a condition of slavery that could be cancelled. He means that Christ’s crucifixion removed the ability of sinful desires to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “God might completely end how living sinfully controls people” | |
1002 | 6:6 | l6pd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ σῶμα τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body is related to sin. Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Here, the body of sin could refer to: (1) how humans tend to sin. Alternate translation: “our human tendency to sin” or “how living sinfully controls us” (2) how sin controls the human body. Alternate translation: “how sin controls our bodies” | |
1003 | 6:6 | l3zm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτίας & ἁμαρτίᾳ | 1 | See how you translated sin in 6:1. | |
1004 | 6:6 | c5ie | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν | 1 | Here, for could indicate: (1) God’s purpose for nullifying the body of sin. Alternate translation: “in order for it to no longer enslave” (2) the result of the body of sin being nullified. Alternate translation: “causing it to no longer enslave” | |
1005 | 6:6 | rpax | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ | 1 | Paul speaks of the body of sin as if it could enslave people. Here he means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for it to no longer make us live sinfully” | |
1006 | 6:7 | f893 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ & ἀποθανὼν | 1 | Here Paul implies that the one having died is the same “old man” whom Paul said “was crucified” with Christ in the previous verse. Paul means that God considers any person who has “died to sin” (6:2) to be freed from living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who has died to sin” | |
1007 | 6:7 | qvgd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul continues the metaphor of sin enslaving people from the previous verse. Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were something that people need to be freed from. He means that the desire to sin that controls people would no longer do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer has to live sinfully” | |
1008 | 6:7 | hoqm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δεδικαίωται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has freed” | |
1009 | 6:7 | geua | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτίας | 1 | See how you translated sin in the previous verse. | |
1010 | 6:8 | mbx9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | In this verse, Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is true. Alternate translation: “because” | |
1011 | 6:8 | wwhf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀπεθάνομεν σὺν Χριστῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of Christians as if they physically died with Christ. He means that through baptism Christians show that they participate in the spiritual benefits obtained by Christ’s death and will one day live together with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “we are united to Christ’s death when baptized” | |
1012 | 6:8 | c724 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πιστεύομεν | 1 | Paul implies that since Christians have died with Christ, the result is that they have confidence that they will live together with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we are confident” or “this persuades us” | |
1013 | 6:8 | nuc1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ συνζήσομεν αὐτῷ | 1 | Here Paul implies that live together with him refers to “eternal life”, as he mentioned in 5:21 and 6:4–5. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we will also live forever with him” | |
1014 | 6:9 | bebx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εἰδότες ὅτι Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν, οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “knowing that Christ no longer dies, having been raised from dead ones” | |
1015 | 6:9 | zdkc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | εἰδότες ὅτι | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:6. | |
1016 | 6:9 | gjqq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | Χριστὸς ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised Christ from dead ones, Christ” | |
1017 | 6:9 | zkq2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated the similar clause in 6:4. | |
1018 | 6:9 | lvv8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | οὐκέτι ἀποθνῄσκει; θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει | 1 | These two phrases mean similar things. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Christ can never die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will absolutely never die again” | |
1019 | 6:9 | wem1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | θάνατος αὐτοῦ οὐκέτι κυριεύει | 1 | Here Paul speaks of death as if it were a lord who could rule over someone. Paul means that Jesus could not possibly die again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he no longer submits to being dead” or “he can never die again” | |
1020 | 6:9 | kl3e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θάνατος | 1 | See how you translated death in 6:4. | |
1021 | 6:10 | ehi9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows is the reason why Christ “no longer dies,” as stated in the previous verse. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a reason, as in the UST. | |
1022 | 6:10 | e290 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὃ | 1 | Here, that which refers to Christ’s death and life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the death which” | |
1023 | 6:10 | aw31 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν | 1 | Here, to sin implies that Christ died for the sake of freeing humanity from being “enslaved to sin.” It does not mean that Jesus himself was ever controlled by sin before he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he died for the sake of removing sin’s control over people” or “he died to stop sin from controlling people” | |
1024 | 6:10 | j7bl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὃ δὲ ζῇ | 1 | Here, what he lives refers to Christ’s life after God raised him from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But the life which” | |
1025 | 6:10 | z4yb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῇ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here, to God implies that Christ now lives for the sake of glorifying God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “he lives for the sake of glorifying God” | |
1026 | 6:11 | zjjv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμεῖς | 1 | Throughout 6:11–23, the pronouns you and “your” are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers at Rome” | |
1027 | 6:11 | dw6l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἶναι νεκροὺς μὲν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ | 1 | See how you translated “died to sin” in 6:2. | |
1028 | 6:11 | bjxg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῶντας & τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase “he lives to God” in the previous verse. | |
1029 | 6:11 | nkvd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. | |
1030 | 6:12 | pp2t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Therefore here introduces a result clause. Paul is stating how he wants his readers to act in response to what he said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “Because of this” | |
1031 | 6:12 | s6h1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | μὴ & βασιλευέτω ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a king who rules over a place called mortal body. By do not let sin rule, Paul means that Christians should not allow sin to control the way they use their bodies. See how you translated a similar use of rule in 5:21. Alternate translation: “do not let your physical body become controlled by sinning” | |
1032 | 6:12 | z1ia | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι, | 1 | Although body here is a singular noun, Paul is referring to the bodies of his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a plural form. Alternate translation: “in your mortal bodies” | |
1033 | 6:12 | cm8d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | ἐν τῷ θνητῷ ὑμῶν σώματι | 1 | Here, body could refer to: (1) the whole person. Alternative translation: “in you” or “in your whole being” (2) the physical human body. Alternative translation: “in your physical body” | |
1034 | 6:12 | r462 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here to indicates that what follows is the result of letting sin rule. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to obey its lusts” or “resulting in you obeying your lusts” | |
1035 | 6:12 | yg9l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | εἰς τὸ ὑπακούειν ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of lusts as if they were people who could be obeyed. He means that people can submit to their desires to do sinful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to submit to your lustful desires” or “to do what you lust for” | |
1036 | 6:12 | zs9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of lusts, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how it urges you to lust” | |
1037 | 6:12 | kh3w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτοῦ | 1 | The pronoun its refers to mortal body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your mortal body’s” | |
1038 | 6:13 | wt07 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἀλλὰ παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ, ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας, καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses in order to emphasize the similar ideas. Alternate translation: “And do not keep presenting your members as tools of unrighteousness to sin, but present your members as tools of righteousness to God. And present yourselves to God, as living from dead ones” | |
1039 | 6:13 | mxto | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μηδὲ παριστάνετε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα ἀδικίας τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ & καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of body parts as if they were tools that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that he wants his readers to stop using their body parts for sinning, but instead to use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “And do not keep using your members to act unrighteously by sinning … and use your members to act righteously for God” | |
1040 | 6:13 | qncn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὅπλα ἀδικίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by unrighteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as unrighteous tools” or “as tools for living unrighteously” | |
1041 | 6:13 | hlzf | ὅπλα & ὅπλα | 1 | The word translated as tools often refers to “weapons.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as weapons … as weapons” | ||
1042 | 6:13 | dq4n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀδικίας & δικαιοσύνης | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of unrighteousness and righteousness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is unrighteous … of what is righteous” | |
1043 | 6:13 | wq3m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παραστήσατε ἑαυτοὺς τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul speaks of his readers as if they could offer themselves as slaves to their master, who is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give yourselves to God” | |
1044 | 6:13 | px9k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | ὡσεὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας | 1 | The point of this comparison is that Christians should live in such a way that demonstrates that they are now dead to sin, but alive to God, as mentioned in 6:11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as those who are free from living sinfully” or “as those who are no longer controlled by living sinfully” | |
1045 | 6:13 | vk76 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 6:4. | |
1046 | 6:13 | amyo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | καὶ τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this from the beginning of this sentence. Alternate translation: “and present your members” | |
1047 | 6:13 | dz8u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὅπλα δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe tools that are characterized by righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “as righteous tools” or “as tools for living righteously” | |
1048 | 6:14 | xfz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1049 | 6:14 | u36f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει, οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because you are not under law, but under grace, do not allow sin to rule over you” | |
1050 | 6:14 | gez3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἁμαρτία & ὑμῶν οὐ κυριεύσει | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:12. | |
1051 | 6:14 | bl09 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | ἁμαρτία & οὐ κυριεύσει | 1 | Paul is using a future statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “sin must not rule over” or “do not allow sin to rule over” | |
1052 | 6:14 | caqv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul urges his readers to not allow sin to lord over them. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” | |
1053 | 6:14 | a0dz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν | 1 | Paul speaks of law and grace as if they were rulers under whose authority people have to live. He means that Christians are no longer controlled by the requirements of the law, which resulted in people sinning more, as stated in 5:20. By contrast, Christians now serve the gracious God, as is explained in 6:15–23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for the law no longer controls you, but you are now controlled by God’s grace” | |
1054 | 6:14 | eibi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον | 1 | See how you translated law in 2:12. | |
1055 | 6:14 | ypqx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὸ χάριν | 1 | Here, grace refers specifically to God’s gracious empowering of people to stop sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “controlled by God’s grace” | |
1056 | 6:15 | yk81 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 6:1–14. See how you translated What then in 3:1, 4:1, and 6:1. | |
1057 | 6:15 | zxb8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using a question form here to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we should sin because we are not under law, but under grace!” | |
1058 | 6:15 | rtts | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν? ἁμαρτήσωμεν ὅτι οὐκ ἐσμὲν ὑπὸ νόμον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὸ χάριν? | 1 | In these two sentences, Paul is speaking as if he were a Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1059 | 6:15 | t4cc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπὸ νόμον & ὑπὸ χάριν | 1 | See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. | |
1060 | 6:15 | t52x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he posed earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” | |
1061 | 6:15 | c77g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | ||
1062 | 6:16 | n5j4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι ᾧ παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους εἰς ὑπακοήν, δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε—ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know that to what you keep presenting yourselves as slaves for obedience, you become slaves to what you obey—whether of sin leading to death, or of obedience leading to righteousness!” | |
1063 | 6:16 | hn6y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ᾧ & ᾧ | 1 | The pronoun translated what here indicates a general reference to a thing or person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to whomever or whatever … to whomever or whatever” | |
1064 | 6:16 | g6zz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παριστάνετε ἑαυτοὺς δούλους & δοῦλοί ἐστε ᾧ ὑπακούετε | 1 | Paul speaks of people as if they could offer themselves as slaves to someone or something. He is referring to being controlled by someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you keep being controlled by … you become controlled by what you obey” | |
1065 | 6:16 | psrr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς ὑπακοήν | 1 | Here, for indicates that this is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which these people are presenting themselves as slaves. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to obey” or “for the purpose of obeying” | |
1066 | 6:16 | zim4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς ὑπακοήν & ὑπακοῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of obedience, you could express the same idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “to obey … to obey” | |
1067 | 6:16 | h0ar | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἤτοι ἁμαρτίας εἰς θάνατον, ἢ ὑπακοῆς εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | Here, sin and obedience are spoken of as if they were masters that slaves would obey. Paul means that people can be controlled either by their desire to sin or a desire to obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “whether you are controlled by sinning, leading to death, or you are controlled by obeying God, leading to righteousness” | |
1068 | 6:16 | gtzd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἁμαρτίας & ὑπακοῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe slaves that belong to sin or obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “slaves that belong to sin … slaves that belong to obedience” or “sin’s slaves … obedience’s slaves” | |
1069 | 6:16 | cyct | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated sin in 6:1 and righteousness in 6:13. | |
1070 | 6:16 | zfgc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς θάνατον & εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | Here, leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in death … resulting to righteousness” or “causing death … causing righteousness” | |
1071 | 6:16 | d8gv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς θάνατον | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “leading to spiritual death” or “causing one to die spiritually” | |
1072 | 6:17 | xj75 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here, thanks be to God is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God!” | |
1073 | 6:17 | tl5d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Here, that indicates that the clause that follows provides a contrast between who Paul’s readers were before they became Christians and who they were after they had listened from the heart to true Christian teaching. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “even though you were slaves of sin” | |
1074 | 6:17 | yxt7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | δοῦλοι τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase of sin in the previous verse. | |
1075 | 6:17 | uwcy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπηκούσατε δὲ ἐκ καρδίας, εἰς & τύπον διδαχῆς | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the pattern of teaching as if it were a person who could be listened to. He means that his readers accepted the true Christian teaching that Christians were teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but you accepted the form of teaching” | |
1076 | 6:17 | ep7k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπηκούσατε | 1 | The word translated listened implies that the people who listened also responded by obeying what they heard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you clung” | |
1077 | 6:17 | my2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὑπηκούσατε & ἐκ καρδίας | 1 | Here, from the heart is an idiom that refers to being sincere or doing something with one’s will and emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you totally listened” or “you listened from deep within” | |
1078 | 6:17 | lugj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | εἰς ὃν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the pattern of teaching as if it were a slave-master to which people are given over to as slaves when they become Christians. Paul means that Christians should submit to the authority of true Christian teaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the pattern of teaching that you were submitted to” or “to the pattern of teaching that you were handed over to, as if you were its slave” | |
1079 | 6:17 | pz14 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὃν παρεδόθητε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God gave you over to” or | |
1080 | 6:18 | fcd1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin and righteousness as if they were slave-masters that people could be enslaved to. Paul means that his readers are no longer controlled by their sinful desires, but are controlled by the desire to live righteously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And having been freed from having to live sinfully, you now have to live righteously” | |
1081 | 6:18 | y2zg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλευθερωθέντες δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐδουλώθητε | 1 | If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “And God having freed you from sin, he enslaved you” | |
1082 | 6:18 | twpq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτίας & δικαιοσύνῃ | 1 | See how you translated sin and righteousness in 6:16. | |
1083 | 6:19 | jlmd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἀνθρώπινον λέγω, διὰ τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of the weakness of your flesh, I speak as a man” or “Because you are still immature, I have to speak in simple terms” | |
1084 | 6:19 | puvh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἀνθρώπινον λέγω | 1 | Here, as a man is an idiom meaning “the way people do” or “like a human being.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I am speaking based on how human beings perceive things” or “I am talking like a mere human being” | |
1085 | 6:19 | gt1n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν & τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ εἰς ἁγιασμόν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of weakness, uncleanness, lawlessness, righteousness, and sanctification, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how weak your flesh is … to act impurely and to be more and more lawless … for living righteously, which leads to being sanctified” | |
1086 | 6:19 | l4ah | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν | 1 | Here, flesh is an idiom that refers to human nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your human weakness” or “your natural limitations” | |
1087 | 6:19 | psmw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in 6:17–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moreover,” | |
1088 | 6:19 | x2kt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὥσπερ & οὕτως | 1 | See how you translated just as and so in the 5:19. | |
1089 | 6:19 | jbcz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | παρεστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν δοῦλα τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ τῇ ἀνομίᾳ εἰς τὴν ἀνομίαν & παραστήσατε τὰ μέλη ὑμῶν, δοῦλα τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ | 1 | Paul speaks of body parts as if they were slaves that could be offered to someone or used by someone. He means that his readers used to use their body parts to act impurely and to disobey God’s laws, but now they should use them to live in the way God wants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated similar phrases in 6:13. Alternative translation: “you used your members to act uncleanly and to disobey God more and more … use your members to act righteously” | |
1090 | 6:19 | o0ta | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς ἁγιασμόν | 1 | The phrase leading to indicates result. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “resulting in sanctification” or “causing sanctification” | |
1091 | 6:20 | s9pk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “This reason for this is that” | |
1092 | 6:20 | i1ze | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὅτε & δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας, ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of sin and righteousness as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that when his readers had previously used their bodies to act sinfully, they were not serving God’s purposes as slaves of righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when you were controlled by sin, you did not serve God” or “when you were living sinfully, you did not live righteously” | |
1093 | 6:20 | mu0y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony | ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ | 1 | Paul is not making a serious suggestion here that sinful people are not required to live righteously. Paul means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of free. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were unrighteous” or “you were unable to live righteously” | |
1094 | 6:21 | x3bn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τίνα & καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε? τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “since the outcome of those things is death, what fruit were you then having because of which things you are now ashamed?” | |
1095 | 6:21 | kjl5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίνα οὖν καρπὸν εἴχετε τότε, ἐφ’ οἷς νῦν ἐπαισχύνεσθε | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the futility of being “slaves to sin” in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation in order to communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So you were not then having any fruit because of which things you are now ashamed!” | |
1096 | 6:21 | vgam | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | καρπὸν | 1 | Here, fruit is an idiom that refers to a benefit or advantage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “advantage” or “profit” | |
1097 | 6:21 | pnbm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐφ’ οἷς & ἐκείνων | 1 | Here, which things and those things refer to sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of which sins … of those sins” | |
1098 | 6:21 | j2ie | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ γὰρ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of outcome and death, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “For those things finally result in you dying” | |
1099 | 6:21 | tj21 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | θάνατος | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1100 | 6:22 | x8vw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | νυνὶ δέ | 1 | But now introduces a contrast with the previous two verses, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated now refers to the time after the Roman believers became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify what now refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” | |
1101 | 6:22 | cqlf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | This clause indicates the reason why Paul’s readers have fruit leading to sanctification. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because you have been freed from sin and have been enslaved to God” | |
1102 | 6:22 | fmtc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin and God as if they were slave-masters. Paul means that Christians are no longer controlled by their desire to sin, but are supposed to obey God instead. See a similar phrase in 6:18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been freed from having to live sinfully and having begun to serve God” | |
1103 | 6:22 | z3ap | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐλευθερωθέντες ἀπὸ τῆς ἁμαρτίας, δουλωθέντες δὲ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If your language does not use passive forms in this way, you could express these ideas in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having freed you from sin and having enslaved you to himself” or “God having released you from being controlled by your sin and having caused you to serve him” | |
1104 | 6:22 | npf3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν | 1 | See how you translated fruit in the previous verse. | |
1105 | 6:22 | a478 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς ἁγιασμόν, τὸ & τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον | 1 | See how you translated sanctification in 6:19, outcome in 6:21, and eternal life in 5:21. | |
1106 | 6:22 | lvhh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς ἁγιασμόν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 6:19. | |
1107 | 6:23 | gacy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that this verse gives the reason for what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true because” | |
1108 | 6:23 | ze3f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could pay wages. Paul means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when a person lives sinfully, it results in eternal death” | |
1109 | 6:23 | juc4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος | 1 | Paul speaks of death as if it were wages paid to those who sin. He means that the result of living sinfully is eternal death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternative translation: “whoever lives sinfully receives eternal death as the result” or “whoever lives sinfully earns eternal death as if it were wages for work” | |
1110 | 6:23 | iyv3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ & ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the wages that come from sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sin’s wages” or “the wages that come from sin” | |
1111 | 6:23 | pizh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | θάνατος | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16 and 6:21. | |
1112 | 6:23 | slyb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θάνατος; τὸ & χάρισμα & ζωὴ αἰώνιος | 1 | See how you translated death in 6:21, gracious gift in 5:15–16, and eternal life in 6:22. | |
1113 | 6:23 | cwkw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ & χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gracious gift that comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “God’s gracious gift” or “the gracious gift from God” | |
1114 | 6:23 | jn66 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were occupying space inside of Christ Jesus. Paul means that eternal life comes by being united to Christ Jesus, as stated in 6:11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “comes through being united to Christ Jesus” | |
1115 | 7:intro | fl1y | 0 | Romans 7 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this Chapter“The Law”Throughout most of this chapter Paul uses the singular noun “the law” to refer to the group of laws that God gave Israel through Moses. However, in 7:21–25 Paul uses the word “law” in several different ways. Each of these different uses will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterMarriageScripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterInclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all Jewish believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 7:1 and 7:4. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
1116 | 7:1 | mk7w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ? | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the Jew is required to obey the law of Moses his whole life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely know, brothers (for I am speaking to those who know the law), that the law is lord of the man for as long as he lives!” | |
1117 | 7:1 | guk4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here to refer to both male and female Jewish believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “my fellow Jewish Christians” | |
1118 | 7:1 | s4su | (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ) | 1 | Here Paul interrupts himself in order to clarify that he is specifically directing this part of the letter to the Jewish believers in the church at Rome. If this would be confusing in your language, you could add parentheses, as done in the ULT, or use a natural way in your language to indicate this. | ||
1119 | 7:1 | j67x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it explains the reason why Paul expects these brothers to understand what he is saying. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I know you should understand this because” | |
1120 | 7:1 | ajk4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λαλῶ | 1 | The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul (See: 6:19). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am speaking” | |
1121 | 7:1 | k3h5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον & ὁ νόμος | 1 | For every occurrence of the law in 7:1–20, translate the phrase in the same way you translated it in 2:12. | |
1122 | 7:1 | okz5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a king. Paul means that, like a king, the law must be obeyed by those who are obligated to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “like a king, the law must be obeyed by every Jewish person” | |
1123 | 7:1 | r9fl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τοῦ ἀνθρώπου & ζῇ | 1 | Although the man and he are masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of a person … that person lives” | |
1124 | 7:2 | as1h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of an example from God’s law that illustrates how “the law rules over the man for as long as he lives,” as Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” | |
1125 | 7:2 | j4sn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ ὁ ἀνήρ, κατήργηται & τοῦ ἀνδρός | 1 | Paul is speaking of Jewish married women and husbands in general, not of one particular woman or husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “married women remain bound by law to their living husbands, but if their husbands die, they have been released … of their husbands” | |
1126 | 7:2 | hpn4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ & δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law continually binds the married woman … God releases her” | |
1127 | 7:2 | l6d9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ & ὕπανδρος γυνὴ τῷ ζῶντι ἀνδρὶ δέδεται νόμῳ & κατήργηται ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could tie a woman to her husband. Paul means that the law of Moses requires a married woman to stay married to her husband only while he is alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God requires in his law that the married woman remain married to her living husband … she is no longer required to remain married to the husband” | |
1128 | 7:2 | ag23 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ νόμου τοῦ ἀνδρός | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is related to the husband. This phrase refers to the law already described in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that requires her to remain bound to the husband” | |
1129 | 7:3 | w3yw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
1130 | 7:3 | ss60 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς, μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει, ἐὰν γένηται ἀνδρὶ ἑτέρῳ | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “if she becomes married to another husband, the first husband being alive” | |
1131 | 7:3 | jbvc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | ζῶντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς | 1 | In this clause Paul is describing something that was occurring during the same time period as what he describes in the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “at the same time that the husband is alive” | |
1132 | 7:3 | ci5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τοῦ ἀνδρὸς & ὁ ἀνήρ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
1133 | 7:3 | r2m4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μοιχαλὶς χρηματίσει | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law will title her an adulteress” | |
1134 | 7:3 | wg4k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐλευθέρα ἐστὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were an object or person someone could be freed from. Paul means that the law that prohibited a woman from marrying another husband did not apply if her first husband died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase “she has been released from the law” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “she is no longer required to remain married to the first husband” | |
1135 | 7:4 | kvqw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in 7:1–3. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” | |
1136 | 7:4 | ne64 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 7:1. | |
1137 | 7:4 | z8zj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you also died to the law” | |
1138 | 7:4 | svrq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε | 1 | Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize that even Jewish Christians are not required to obey the law of Moses. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you very Jews yourselves were also made dead” or “even you Jews yourselves were also made dead” | |
1139 | 7:4 | vpwf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐθανατώθητε τῷ νόμῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses made dead to refer to Jewish Christians not being required to obey the law of Moses. Just as dead people don’t have to obey the law, so too, Jewish Christians no longer have to obey it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “your yourselves no longer have to obey the law” or “you yourselves are like dead people in that you do not have to obey the law” | |
1140 | 7:4 | v2tu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that the body of Christ is the means by which believers were made dead to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the body of Christ” | |
1141 | 7:4 | glzf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | διὰ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, the body of Christ refers to the death of Jesus’ body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the death of Christ’s body” | |
1142 | 7:4 | xw6f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God made believers dead to the law. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for us to become married to another” | |
1143 | 7:4 | g59t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς ἑτέρῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses married to another to refer to Christians being united with Christ as if they became married to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you might become united to Jesus” or “so that you might be united with Christ like a woman becomes married to another husband” | |
1144 | 7:4 | rj6u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom God raised from dead ones” | |
1145 | 7:4 | t9nt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τῷ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγερθέντι | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. | |
1146 | 7:4 | gxjj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here, in order that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God raised Jesus from dead ones. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order for us to produce fruit for God” | |
1147 | 7:4 | c4rl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καρποφορήσωμεν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul uses fruit here to refer to actions that please God as if they were fruit that a person could grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we might be able to do things pleasing to God” | |
1148 | 7:4 | ka0o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | καρποφορήσωμεν | 1 | Here, we includes all those whom Paul called brothers earlier in this verse and in 7:1, so we is inclusive of all Jewish Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
1149 | 7:5 | i1zl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in the next two verses explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1150 | 7:5 | gmb9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἦμεν ἐν τῇ σαρκί | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the flesh as if it were a location that someone could be in. He means his readers used to live according to the desires of their sinful natures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were living according to our sinful natures” or “we were doing whatever we wanted to do” | |
1151 | 7:5 | bl7i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ παθήματα τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of passions, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the desire to sin that was through the law was working” | |
1152 | 7:5 | g2rg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου ἐνηργεῖτο | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Paul said something similar about the law causing sin to increase in 5:20. Alternate translation: “that were increased through the law were working” or “that were stimulated by the law were working” | |
1153 | 7:5 | vlev | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Here, through indicates the means by which the sinful passions increased. Paul means that the law stimulated people’s desire to sin even more. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the law” | |
1154 | 7:5 | tvku | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐνηργεῖτο ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the sinful passions are if they were people who could work within someone’s body parts. He means that people’s sinful desires caused them to sin with their bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing us to use our members to sin” | |
1155 | 7:5 | denv | τοῖς μέλεσιν | 1 | See how you translated members in 6:13. | ||
1156 | 7:5 | pnw6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι | 1 | Here, to introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “which resulted in producing fruit” or “so that they would produce fruit” | |
1157 | 7:5 | xed9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς τὸ καρποφορῆσαι τῷ θανάτῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses fruit to refer to the result or outcome of someone’s actions. Paul is using fruit differently than how he used it in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that the outcome was fruit for death” | |
1158 | 7:5 | m071 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ θανάτῳ | 1 | See how you translated death in 6:16. | |
1159 | 7:5 | ub7z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ θανάτῳ | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1160 | 7:6 | mze7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | νυνὶ δὲ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 6:22. | |
1161 | 7:6 | l8w4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has released us from the law … to that which was holding us” | |
1162 | 7:6 | j6i3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | κατηργήθημεν ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου & ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a slave-master from which someone must be released and who can hold people captive. Paul means that Christians do not have to obey the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we no longer have to obey the law … to that which we used to be required to obey” or “we are like slaves who have been released from the law … to that which we used to have to obey like slaves” | |
1163 | 7:6 | l2l3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα | 1 | The phrase that by which we were being held refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the law by which we were being held” | |
1164 | 7:6 | vcok | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀποθανόντες ἐν ᾧ κατειχόμεθα | 1 | Paul speaks of the law as if it were a location where Christians could die. Here, died to the law refers to the idea that Christians no longer have to obey the requirements of the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “no longer being required to obey that by which we were being held” | |
1165 | 7:6 | zafg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is the result of Christians having died to the law. Use the natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “the result being that we might serve” | |
1166 | 7:6 | f9n4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | δουλεύειν ἡμᾶς | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “we might serve God” | |
1167 | 7:6 | c1j8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν καινότητι & οὐ παλαιότητι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of newness and oldness, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which peopleserve God. Alternate translation: “in the new way … not in the old way” | |
1168 | 7:6 | vhqd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν καινότητι Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul uses the possessive form to describe the newness that is produced by the Spirit. Paul means that the Holy Spirit enables Christians to live in a new way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a new way that comes from the Holy Spirit” | |
1169 | 7:6 | rm8r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | παλαιότητι γράμματος | 1 | Paul uses the possessive form to describe the oldness that is determined by the letter. Paul means that Christians do not live in the old way that the law of Moses requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the old way that the letter requires” | |
1170 | 7:6 | iozz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | γράμματος | 1 | Paul uses the letter to refer to the law which is written down with letters. See how you translated this word in 2:27. | |
1171 | 7:7 | k1jj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? | 1 | Then indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses, especially what he said in 7:5. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. | |
1172 | 7:7 | bnyx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in 7:5 because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that the law is sin!” | |
1173 | 7:7 | f3hc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ὁ νόμος ἁμαρτία? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a Jewish Christian who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1174 | 7:7 | zl8m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτία & τὴν ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of sin, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “something sinful … what things are sinful” | |
1175 | 7:7 | erx6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” | |
1176 | 7:7 | u8gm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | ||
1177 | 7:7 | y92j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | But here indicates that what follows is in contrast to what came before it. Here, But introduces the contrast to the idea that the law is sinful. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” or “By contrast,” | |
1178 | 7:7 | zzsf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an example from God’s law that illustrates the importance of the law. See how you translated the same use of For in 7:2. | |
1179 | 7:7 | g0np | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τήν & ἐπιθυμίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of covetousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what it means to be covetous” | |
1180 | 7:7 | refv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν | 1 | Here Paul uses said to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Exodus 20:17). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the law” | |
1181 | 7:7 | qb5v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὁ νόμος ἔλεγεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who could say something. He means that God said what was written down in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God said in the law” | |
1182 | 7:8 | mz77 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἀφορμὴν & λαβοῦσα ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς, κατειργάσατο ἐν ἐμοὶ πᾶσαν ἐπιθυμίαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could take an opportunity and produce covetousness within a person. Paul means that his desire to sin by coveting increased when he learned the commandment that prohibits coveting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin, increasing as a result of the commandment, led me to covet” | |
1183 | 7:8 | fh6x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | Here, the commandment refers specifically to the command, “You will not covet,” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the command that we should not covet” | |
1184 | 7:8 | w6ah | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” | |
1185 | 7:8 | zeb5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐπιθυμίαν | 1 | See how you translated covetousness in the previous verse. | |
1186 | 7:8 | r5i2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | χωρὶς & νόμου, ἁμαρτία νεκρά | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were something which could be dead. Paul means that his desire to sin would not have increased if God had not given his laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if there were no law, my desire to sin would not have been stimulated” | |
1187 | 7:9 | cag9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | χωρὶς νόμου | 1 | Here Paul speaks about the law as if it did not exist before he knew about it. Paul means that he was not aware of God’s law at one time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while unaware of the law” or “without knowledge of the law” | |
1188 | 7:9 | sz5q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐλθούσης & τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | Paul speaks of the commandment as if it were a person who could come to Paul. He means that he became aware of the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I became aware of the commandment” | |
1189 | 7:9 | i90y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἐντολῆς, ἡ ἁμαρτία | 1 | See how you translated commandment and sin in the previous verse. | |
1190 | 7:9 | d4wm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | Here, the commandment could refer to: (1) all the commandments that make up God’s law. Alternate translation: “God’s commandments” (2) the commandment against coveting, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the commandment against coveting” | |
1191 | 7:9 | q9le | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ ἁμαρτία ἀνέζησεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could come to life. This could mean: (1) Paul’s desire to sin was stimulated, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin was stimulated” (2) Paul realized that he was sinning, as mentioned in 7:7. Alternate translation: “I became aware of my sin” | |
1192 | 7:10 | ouxm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγὼ & ἀπέθανον | 1 | Paul uses died here to refer to being spiritually dead, which is the spiritual condition of all non-Christians. Spiritual death results in eternal punishment in hell after a person’s body dies. Paul means here that he realized that he was spiritually dead when he understood God’s law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I died spiritually” | |
1193 | 7:10 | mzx2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἐντολὴ | 1 | See how you translated commandment in the previous verse. | |
1194 | 7:10 | jmso | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζωὴν | 1 | Here, life refers to “eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” or “for living forever” | |
1195 | 7:10 | yu1u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἡ ἐντολὴ, ἡ εἰς ζωὴν | 1 | Here, for indicates the purpose for the commandment. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “the commandment that was intended to cause life” | |
1196 | 7:10 | a0rz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εὑρέθη μοι & αὕτη εἰς θάνατον | 1 | Here, for indicates that what follows is the result of the commandment. Paul means that God’s laws resulted in eternal death for people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “it was found to result in death for me” | |
1197 | 7:10 | hkce | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | εὑρέθη & αὕτη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I found it to be” | |
1198 | 7:10 | jrrw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εὑρέθη & αὕτη | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the commandment as if it were an object that could be found. Paul means that he realized that God’s law results in spiritual death for people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I realized it was to be” | |
1199 | 7:10 | y97i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | θάνατον | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1200 | 7:11 | r582 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ & ἁμαρτία ἀφορμὴν λαβοῦσα διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | See how you translated this clause in 7:8. | |
1201 | 7:11 | qi99 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐξηπάτησέν με | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could deceive people. Paul means that his desire to sin tricked him into thinking that he could become righteous by obeying the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to deceive myself” | |
1202 | 7:11 | qljg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | δι’ αὐτῆς | 1 | The pronoun it refers to the commandment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the commandment” | |
1203 | 7:11 | f6sx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἀπέκτεινεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could kill people. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused me to die spiritually” | |
1204 | 7:12 | h0li | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in 7:7–11. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” | |
1205 | 7:12 | i3ka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἐντολὴ | 1 | See how you translated commandment in 7:9. | |
1206 | 7:13 | us69 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows is the result of what Paul said in 7:7–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” or “This is why” or “Because of this” | |
1207 | 7:13 | e1bx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τὸ & ἀγαθὸν ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος? | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that the law did not directly cause him to become spiritually dead. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “surely what is good did not become death to me!” | |
1208 | 7:13 | g451 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ & ἀγαθὸν & διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ | 1 | Here, what is good refers to the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s good laws … through those good laws” | |
1209 | 7:13 | qwe9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐμοὶ ἐγένετο θάνατος | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it could become death. Paul is referring to the idea that God’s laws directly caused him to become spiritually dead. He rejects this idea in the next sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did … cause me to die spiritually” | |
1210 | 7:13 | ee64 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | θάνατος & θάνατον | 1 | In this verse death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1211 | 7:13 | r84l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θάνατος & ἡ ἁμαρτία & ἁμαρτία & θάνατον & ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | See how you translated the abstract nouns sin and commandment in 7:11 and death in 7:10. | |
1212 | 7:13 | hgm6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο! | 1 | ||
1213 | 7:13 | f9md | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἀλλὰ ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But sin produced death in me in order that it might be shown to be sin through what is good” | |
1214 | 7:13 | qoe9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἁμαρτία, ἵνα φανῇ ἁμαρτία διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον | 1 | Here, in order that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “sin produced death in me for the purpose of showing itself to be sin through what is good” | |
1215 | 7:13 | kvhi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | φανῇ ἁμαρτία | 1 | Here Paul uses shown as if sin were an object that people could see. Paul means that God’s laws enable people to recognize what sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it might be recognized to be sin” | |
1216 | 7:13 | e7r4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that what is good is the means by which sin is clearly understood to be sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of what is good” | |
1217 | 7:13 | m4l5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ ἁμαρτία & μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον; | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could kill someone. Paul means that his desire to sin caused him to disobey God’s law, which resulted in Paul being spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin … caused me to die spiritually” | |
1218 | 7:13 | pnq6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μοι κατεργαζομένη θάνατον | 1 | Here Paul speaks of death as if it were an object that could be inside a person. He means that he was spiritually dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “killed me spiritually” | |
1219 | 7:13 | cuct | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | Here, so that indicates a purpose clause. Paul is stating another purpose for sin producing death. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order for sin to become sinful beyond measure through the commandment” | |
1220 | 7:13 | a6zb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς | 1 | Here, through indicates that the commandment is the means by which sin becomes sinful beyond measure. Paul means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the commandment” | |
1221 | 7:13 | clht | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | γένηται καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἁμαρτωλὸς ἡ ἁμαρτία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could become more sinful. He means that God’s laws provide a standard by which people can understand how extremely sinful sin is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sin might be recognized as sinful beyond measure” | |
1222 | 7:13 | oy2w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν | 1 | Here, beyond measure is an idiom that means “to a great degree” or “exceedingly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar idiom from your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to an extreme degree” | |
1223 | 7:14 | k5mg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things I have just said are true because” | |
1224 | 7:14 | quen | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ νόμος πνευματικός ἐστιν | 1 | Here, spiritual means that the source of the law is God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law comes from God’s Spirit” | |
1225 | 7:14 | vxn0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | ἐγὼ & σάρκινός εἰμι | 1 | Paul uses the word myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the law. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am fleshly” | |
1226 | 7:14 | big5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | σάρκινός | 1 | Here, fleshly refers to the weakness of sinful human nature, which is the inability to stop sinning without God’s help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “spiritually frail” | |
1227 | 7:14 | lx8f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πεπραμένος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sold myself into slavery” | |
1228 | 7:14 | sr9e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of himself as if he were a slave. Here, sold into slavery could refer to: (1) being influenced by one’s sinful human nature. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation even after becoming a Christian. Alternate translation: “being under the influence of my sinful nature” (2) being controlled by one’s desire to sin. In this case Paul would be speaking about his situation before he became a Christian. Alternate translation: “being controlled by my desire to sin” | |
1229 | 7:14 | p9pi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | See how you translated the similar use of this phrase in 3:9. | |
1230 | 7:15 | udc8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | *For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” | |
1231 | 7:15 | u3av | ὃ & κατεργάζομαι, οὐ γινώσκω | 1 | Alternate translation: “I am not sure why I do some of the things that I do” | ||
1232 | 7:15 | gneb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 2 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of “what I produce,” in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1233 | 7:15 | e8ki | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐ & ὃ θέλω & ὃ μισῶ | 2 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “what I do not want to do … what I hate to do” | |
1234 | 7:15 | az2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | οὐ & ὃ θέλω, τοῦτο πράσσω & ὃ μισῶ, τοῦτο ποιῶ. | 2 | The phrases I practice and I do are exaggerations that Paul uses to emphasize that he often does what he does not want to do. It does not mean that Paul always does these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I do not want, this I often practice … what I hate, this I often do” | |
1235 | 7:16 | xho0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since what I do not want” | |
1236 | 7:16 | y26s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. | |
1237 | 7:16 | q3b5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | σύνφημι τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι καλός | 1 | Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I agree with the law and thus confess that it is good” | |
1238 | 7:17 | x667 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | νυνὶ δὲ | 1 | But now indicates that this verse is the logical conclusion based on what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So it is” | |
1239 | 7:17 | k7ag | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι | 1 | Paul uses the word myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is no longer I who produces” | |
1240 | 7:17 | id6v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτὸ | 1 | The pronoun it here refers to doing the sinful acts that he does not want to do, as mentioned in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful deeds that I do not want to do” | |
1241 | 7:17 | f6n8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ ἐνοικοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a person who could live inside of a person. Paul means that his desire to sin causes him to do what he does not want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my desire to sin deeply influences me” | |
1242 | 7:18 | nqhc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1243 | 7:18 | kf8z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | οἶδα & ὅτι οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί, τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “I know that good does not live in me, (that is, in my flesh)” | |
1244 | 7:18 | p0ma | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | οὐκ οἰκεῖ ἐν ἐμοί & ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου, ἀγαθόν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of good as if it were a person who could live inside someone. He means that his sinful nature is not good at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there is nothing good about me … about my flesh” | |
1245 | 7:18 | p1c1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῇ σαρκί μου | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh to refer to his sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my sinful nature” | |
1246 | 7:18 | kyx9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀγαθόν & τὸ καλὸν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “any good thing … what is good” | |
1247 | 7:18 | ye8x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | For indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. For here indicates that the following sentence is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” | |
1248 | 7:18 | gvev | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the wanting to do good is present in me” | |
1249 | 7:18 | h934 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ & θέλειν παράκειταί μοι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of wanting as if it were a thing that could exist inside a person. Paul means that he truly wants to do something good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I truly want” or “I deeply desire” | |
1250 | 7:18 | uxwb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὸ & κατεργάζεσθαι τὸ καλὸν οὔ | 2 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the ability to produce the good is not in me” or “I am not able to produce the good” | |
1251 | 7:19 | xftc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the last sentence of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1252 | 7:19 | ri3b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀγαθόν & κακὸν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and evil, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “good deeds … evil deeds” | |
1253 | 7:19 | j69g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὃ θέλω & ἀγαθόν & ὃ οὐ θέλω κακὸν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the good I want to do … the evil I do not want to do” | |
1254 | 7:20 | kfvj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ & ὃ οὐ θέλω, τοῦτο ποιῶ | 1 | See how you translated this clause in 7:16. | |
1255 | 7:20 | sk9q | οὐκέτι ἐγὼ κατεργάζομαι αὐτὸ, ἀλλὰ ἡ οἰκοῦσα ἐν ἐμοὶ ἁμαρτία | 1 | See how you translated these clauses in 7:17. | ||
1256 | 7:21 | rqfu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εὑρίσκω | 1 | Here Paul speaks of a law as if it were an object that he could find. Paul means that he became aware of the law that is described in the rest of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I became aware that there was” | |
1257 | 7:21 | qae3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἄρα | 1 | Here, then introduces a result clause. 7:21–25 describe the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 7:14–20. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “as a result” | |
1258 | 7:21 | y5vo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν νόμον | 1 | Here, law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” | |
1259 | 7:21 | xxq9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τῷ θέλοντι ἐμοὶ ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν, ὅτι ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “that evil is present in me, in me, the one wanting to do good” | |
1260 | 7:21 | mo4r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐμοὶ & ἐμοὶ τὸ κακὸν παράκειται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of evil as if it were an object that could be inside a person. Paul means that he does evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in me … I do evil” | |
1261 | 7:21 | qn1r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τῷ θέλοντι & ποιεῖν τὸ καλὸν | 1 | Here, the one wanting to do good is giving further information about me, which refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who is the one wanting to do good” | |
1262 | 7:21 | hqp9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ καλὸν & τὸ κακὸν | 1 | See how you translated good and evil in 7:19. | |
1263 | 7:22 | mvod | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse is the reason why the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is true because” | |
1264 | 7:22 | x28l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συνήδομαι & τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law of God as if it were a location in which a person could delight. He means that God’s laws cause him to delight. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I delight because of the law of God” | |
1265 | 7:22 | nt65 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the law of God refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:12. | |
1266 | 7:22 | m13q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον | 1 | Here, the inner man refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner being” or “the mind” | |
1267 | 7:23 | zp7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | βλέπω | 1 | Here Paul uses see to refer to noticing or perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I perceive” | |
1268 | 7:23 | fct8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἕτερον νόμον | 1 | Here, a different law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this rule” or “a different kind of law” | |
1269 | 7:23 | ijp9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου, ἀντιστρατευόμενον | 1 | Here Paul speaks of a different law as if it were a person who could fight within someone’s body parts. He means that his sinful desires caused him to use his body to do sinful things that he did not want to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were causing me to use my members to sin in opposition to” | |
1270 | 7:23 | v8d8 | τοῖς μέλεσίν | -1 | See how you translated members in 6:13. | ||
1271 | 7:23 | t7yh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῷ νόμῳ τοῦ νοός μου | 1 | Here, the law of my mind could refer to: (1) a principle that Paul thinks, which is the delight for God’s laws that he said in the previous verse is in his “inner man.” Alternate translation: “the principle I have thought” or “the principle in my mind” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul says that he serves with his mind in 7:25. Alternate translation: “God’s law that is in my mind” | |
1272 | 7:23 | i8w4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | αἰχμαλωτίζοντά με | 1 | Here Paul speaks of a different law as if it were a person who could take someone captive. He means that his sinful desires controlled him against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “controlling me” | |
1273 | 7:23 | u4ny | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ νόμῳ τῆς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Here the law of the sin could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature. Alternate translation: “the law that is my sinful nature” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in 7:5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin” | |
1274 | 7:23 | po29 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ ὄντι ἐν τοῖς μέλεσίν μου | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law of the sin as if it were something that could be inside someone. He means he has a sinful nature that influences what he does with his body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that influences what I do with my members” | |
1275 | 7:24 | nu6u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ταλαίπωρος ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος! | 1 | This sentence is an exclamation that communicates deep despair. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “O, how miserable I am!” | |
1276 | 7:24 | hmhj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς με ῥύσεται ἐκ τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his despair. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will rescue me from the body of this death!” | |
1277 | 7:24 | md8e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe how the body relates to this death. This phrase could refer to: (1) the body that results in this death. Alternate translation: “the body that causes this death” (2) the body that is characterized by this death. Alternate translation: “this mortal body” | |
1278 | 7:24 | q74f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ θανάτου τούτου | 1 | Here, this death could refer to: (1) physical death. Alternate translation: “that dies” (2) spiritual death. Alternate translation: “of this spiritual death” | |
1279 | 7:25 | w9ui | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν | 1 | This sentence is an exclamation that communicates joy. It is the answer to the rhetorical question that Paul asked in the previous verse. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating joy. Alternate translation: “O, how thankful I am to God through Jesus Christ our Lord!” | |
1280 | 7:25 | omjd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Thanks be to God who did this through Jesus Christ our Lord” | |
1281 | 7:25 | evnn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes previous ideas. Here Paul used it regarding the ideas of 7:14–24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
1282 | 7:25 | adx1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | αὐτὸς ἐγὼ | 1 | Paul uses the phrase I myself to emphasize the contrast between himself and the sin that causes him to do what he does not want to do. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “it is indeed I who” | |
1283 | 7:25 | sxn3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law of God and the law of sin as if they were people whom he could serve. He means that he wants to obey the law of God, but often obeys his desire to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey the law of God with the mind, but with the flesh, I obey the law of sin” | |
1284 | 7:25 | e163 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | νοῒ | 1 | See how you translated mind in 1:28. | |
1285 | 7:25 | dzjl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμῳ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 7:22. | |
1286 | 7:25 | cdkb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but with the flesh, I serve the law of sin” | |
1287 | 7:25 | fm51 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῇ & σαρκὶ | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh to refer to his sinful nature. See how you translated the similar phrase in 7:18. | |
1288 | 7:25 | he4l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 7:23. | |
1289 | 8:intro | ev4r | 0 | Romans 8 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 8:36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this ChapterIndwelling of the SpiritIn 8:9–17 and 26–27 Paul says that the Holy Spirit dwells inside Christians to help them stop sinning and to intercede for them. The presence of the Holy Spirit within a person indicates that that person is a genuine Christian. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) PredestinationMany scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestined” in 8:28–30 and “elect” in 8:33. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) Important Figure of Speech in this ChapterRhetorical questionsIn 8:24 and 8:31–35 Paul uses rhetorical questions in order to emphasize that what he is saying is true. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterFleshPaul uses the word “flesh” in a variety of ways throughout this letter. In this chapter he frequently uses it to refer to sinful human nature. However, he uses the word “flesh” to refer to Christ’s physical body in 8:3. Every use of the word “flesh” will be discussed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) Inclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we”, “us”, and “our” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 8:12. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
1290 | 8:1 | xq2y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα | 1 | Here, therefore now marks the beginning of a new section in the letter. It also introduces a result clause that concludes what Paul discussed in chapters 5–7. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “Since all these things are true, there is no condemnation at all” or “As a result of everything that I have just told you being true, there is no condemnation at all” | |
1291 | 8:1 | xw65 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατάκριμα | 1 | See how you translated condemnation in 5:16. | |
1292 | 8:1 | ti0g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 3:24. | |
1293 | 8:2 | whhz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word relates to what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1294 | 8:2 | h1ka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ & νόμος τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the law that is characterized by the Spirit of life” | |
1295 | 8:2 | vt9k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ & νόμος | 1 | Here, the law refers to a rule or principle. It does not refer to the laws God gave the Jews. See how you translated the similar use of law in 7:21. | |
1296 | 8:2 | hq2t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the Spirit that produces life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit that produces life” | |
1297 | 8:2 | x8uu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, the Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Holy Spirit” | |
1298 | 8:2 | ep3n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ζωῆς & τῆς ἁμαρτίας & τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | See how you translated life in 2:7, sin in 5:20, and death in 5:17. | |
1299 | 8:2 | ionb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς ζωῆς | 1 | Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of life in 5:18. | |
1300 | 8:2 | irh6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς ζωῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ἠλευθέρωσέν σε | 1 | The phrase in Christ Jesus could refer to: (1) the means by which the Spirit set a person free. Alternate translation: “of life set you free in Christ Jesus” (2) a characteristic of the life. Alternate translation: “of the life that is in Christ Jesus set you free” | |
1301 | 8:2 | cgbe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse and in 3:24. | |
1302 | 8:2 | th4n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἠλευθέρωσέν σε ἀπὸ τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law of sin and death as if it were an object or person someone could be set free from. Paul means that the law that resulted in sin and death does not apply to those who are united with Christ Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused the law of sin and death to no longer control you” | |
1303 | 8:2 | u82e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ νόμου τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | This could refer to: (1) the principle that people have a sinful nature that results in death, as mentioned in 7:23–25. Alternate translation: “the principle that is my sinful nature that leads to death” (2) the laws God gave the Jews, which Paul previously said in 7:5 stimulate people to sin more. Alternate translation: “God’s laws that stimulate sin and death” | |
1304 | 8:2 | jlq1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1305 | 8:3 | mbh3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces what follows in this verse and the next verse as an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1306 | 8:3 | n9mr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός, ὁ Θεὸς | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “God did what the law was unable to do, in that it was weak through the flesh” | |
1307 | 8:3 | z2ej | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. | |
1308 | 8:3 | t8lj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου & ὁ Θεὸς | 1 | Paul implies that what the law was unable to do was to make people righteous, which is the main theme of this book. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law was unable to make people righteous … but God did so” | |
1309 | 8:3 | j98t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τὸ & ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου, ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει διὰ τῆς σαρκός | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law as if it were a person who was unable to do something and was weak. Paul means that the laws God gave the Jews could not make people righteous, because people are naturally sinful and unable to obey those laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the law could not stop people from sinning, because sinful human nature prevented people from obeying it” | |
1310 | 8:3 | g6g4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐν ᾧ ἠσθένει | 1 | This phrase is the reason why the law was unable to do what it was supposed to do. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “since it was weak” | |
1311 | 8:3 | uzkh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ τῆς σαρκός | 1 | This phrase states the reason why the law was weak. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. Alternate translation: “on account of the flesh” | |
1312 | 8:3 | etf2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | διὰ τῆς σαρκός | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in 7:18. | |
1313 | 8:3 | p4qq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας, ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας | 1 | This clause indicates how God condemned sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
1314 | 8:3 | tc37 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὸν ἑαυτοῦ Υἱὸν πέμψας | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having sent his own Son to the earth” or “having sent his own Son to mankind” | |
1315 | 8:3 | csl8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Υἱὸν | 1 | Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. | |
1316 | 8:3 | uf94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the likeness that is characterized by sinful flesh. He means that Jesus had the same human flesh that sinful people have, although Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in the same flesh as that of sinful human beings” | |
1317 | 8:3 | xi5c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of likeness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in flesh like sinful flesh” | |
1318 | 8:3 | v0h2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | σαρκὸς ἁμαρτίας & τῇ σαρκί | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to mean “the whole body,” which is made of flesh. See how you translated this use of flesh in 2:28. | |
1319 | 8:3 | hfr2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | περὶ ἁμαρτίας | 1 | This could mean: (1) Jesus was sent for the sake of doing away with sin. Alternate translation: “in order to do away with sin” (2) Jesus was an offering to pay for sin. Alternate translation: “as an offering for sin” | |
1320 | 8:3 | gid8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | κατέκρινε τὴν ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of sin as if it were a guilty person whom a judge could condemn. Paul means that God removed the power that sin had to control people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he canceled the power of sin” or “he destroyed how sin controls people” | |
1321 | 8:3 | es29 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῇ σαρκί | 1 | Here, the flesh refers specifically to Jesus’ body, which died on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in his Son’s body on the cross” | |
1322 | 8:4 | zcsi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God “condemned sin in the flesh” of Jesus. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” | |
1323 | 8:4 | j9ff | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) us. Alternate translation: “we might fulfill the righteous deeds of the law” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill in us the righteous deeds of the law” | |
1324 | 8:4 | puta | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου πληρωθῇ ἐν ἡμῖν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the righteous deeds of the law as if they were something that could be located inside a person. Paul means that God enables Christians to do those righteous deeds that his law required. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds of the law might be done by us” | |
1325 | 8:4 | w2aa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a the righteous deeds that God commanded in the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous deeds that the law requires” | |
1326 | 8:4 | rttr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τοῦ νόμου | 1 | Here, the law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews, which is usually what Paul means when he says the law. See how you translated this expression in 2:12. | |
1327 | 8:4 | bsp0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ἡμῖν, τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ κατὰ Πνεῦμα | 1 | This clause gives further information about us. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “us, that is, those walking not according to the flesh, but according to the Spirit” | |
1328 | 8:4 | acc4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῖς μὴ κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦσιν | 1 | Here Paul uses walking to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those not behaving according to the flesh” | |
1329 | 8:4 | grhf | κατὰ σάρκα & κατὰ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Alternate translation: “determined by the flesh … determined by the Spirit” or “in conformity with the flesh … in conformity with the Spirit” | ||
1330 | 8:4 | bgg7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the similar use of flesh in the previous verse. | |
1331 | 8:5 | xzmt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1332 | 8:5 | s5sb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | σάρκα & τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | See how you translated the flesh in the previous verse. | |
1333 | 8:5 | b9in | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς φρονοῦσιν | 1 | The phrase set their minds on is an idiom that refers to thinking carefully about something or being intent on doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are intent on doing the things of the flesh” | |
1334 | 8:5 | evgr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the flesh” or “fleshly things” | |
1335 | 8:5 | cqwa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οἱ δὲ κατὰ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but those existing according to the Spirit” | |
1336 | 8:5 | x3o6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation (omitting the comma): “set their minds on the things of the Spirit” | |
1337 | 8:5 | a2n5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that are related to the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “things pertaining to the Spirit” | |
1338 | 8:6 | uc6w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1339 | 8:6 | vyw4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ & φρόνημα & τὸ & φρόνημα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mindset, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way of thinking … the way of thinking” | |
1340 | 8:6 | my98 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ & φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the flesh” | |
1341 | 8:6 | b0wo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | See how you translated the flesh in the previous two verses. | |
1342 | 8:6 | czmn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | θάνατος | 1 | Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in death” | |
1343 | 8:6 | mbte | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | θάνατος | 1 | Here, death refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. See how you translated the same use of death in 6:16. | |
1344 | 8:6 | oviz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ & φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος | 2 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a mindset that is focused on the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the mindset that is focused on the Spirit” | |
1345 | 8:6 | q470 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη | 1 | Here, is indicates that what follows is the result of the mindset of the flesh. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “results in life and peace” | |
1346 | 8:6 | rqnl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ζωὴ καὶ εἰρήνη | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of life and peace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “is living and being peaceful” | |
1347 | 8:6 | fjk8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζωὴ | 1 | Here, life refers to eternal life. See how you translated this use of life in 5:18. | |
1348 | 8:7 | lsdo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διότι | 1 | Here, because indicates that this verse and the next verse give the reasons why what Paul said in 8:5–6 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating reasons. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” | |
1349 | 8:7 | gvcr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ φρόνημα τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
1350 | 8:7 | fpt4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἔχθρα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of hostility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is hostile” | |
1351 | 8:7 | pm7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” | |
1352 | 8:7 | thq8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ & δύναται | 1 | Here, it refers to the mindset of the flesh mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this mindset does not subject itself to … this mindset is not able to do so” | |
1353 | 8:7 | z2ih | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται, οὐδὲ γὰρ δύναται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the mindset of the flesh as if it were a person who could subject himself to something. Paul means that the person who thinks with this mindset is unable to submit to God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who thinks this way does not subject himself to … for he is not able to do so” | |
1354 | 8:7 | srp9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑποτάσσεται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the law of God as if it were a king or master to whom someone could subject himself. Paul is referring to someone obeying God’s laws. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it does not obey the law of God” | |
1355 | 8:7 | brde | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | τῷ & νόμῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 7:22. | |
1356 | 8:7 | bhje | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | The word for indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the fact that” | |
1357 | 8:8 | me7u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἱ & ἐν σαρκὶ ὄντες | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 7:5. | |
1358 | 8:9 | vdhw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | However here indicates a strong contrast between people who have “the mindset of the flesh” referred to in the previous verse and the believers to whom Paul is writing this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” | |
1359 | 8:9 | iybo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἐστὲ | 1 | Paul uses the word yourselves to emphasize the contrast between his Christian readers and people who live in the flesh. Use a way that is natural in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However, you are truly not” | |
1360 | 8:9 | czm9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν σαρκὶ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
1361 | 8:9 | e54u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Πνεύματι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the Holy Spirit as if he were a location that someone could be in. He could mean: (1) believers are controlled by the Holy Spirit, which is how in is used earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “controlled by the Spirit” (2) believers are united with the Holy Spirit, which is how Paul used in in 8:1. Alternate translation: “united with the Spirit” | |
1362 | 8:9 | p55f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Πνεύματι & Πνεῦμα Θεοῦ & Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ | 1 | These phrases all refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … the Holy Spirit of God … the Holy Spirit of Christ” | |
1363 | 8:9 | y3vg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὗτος | 1 | Here, this one refers to the person who does not have the Spirit of Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this person without the Spirit” | |
1364 | 8:9 | akl1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | οὗτος οὐκ ἔστιν αὐτοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a person who does not belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “this one does not belong to him” | |
1365 | 8:10 | ntqo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” | |
1366 | 8:10 | q8be | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of you as if you were a location that Christ could be in. See how you translated in you in the previous verse. | |
1367 | 8:10 | q2q4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν, τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ διὰ δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is life because of righteousness even though the body is dead because of sin” | |
1368 | 8:10 | lae8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τὸ & σῶμα νεκρὸν | 1 | Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “the bodies are dead” | |
1369 | 8:10 | e6g9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρὸν διὰ ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the body as if it were already dead. Paul means that the physical body of a Christian will still die because of sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the body will certainly die because of sin” | |
1370 | 8:10 | yb1b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα ζωὴ | 1 | Here, the Spirit is life could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit gives a person eternal life. In this case Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit and life refers to eternal life. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit grants eternal life” (2) a believer’s spirit is alive. In this case Spirit refers to the spirits of individual believers. Alternate translation: “but the spirit is alive” or “but your spirits are alive” | |
1371 | 8:10 | ya21 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διὰ δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of your righteous status” | |
1372 | 8:11 | jlc9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” | |
1373 | 8:11 | i618 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ Πνεῦμα & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα | 1 | These phrases refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit … his Holy Spirit” | |
1374 | 8:11 | b9pu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ὁ ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν | 1 | These phrases refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who raised Jesus from dead ones … God, who raised Christ Jesus from dead ones” | |
1375 | 8:11 | jr6p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐκ νεκρῶν & ἐγείρας ἐκ νεκρῶν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. | |
1376 | 8:11 | t27d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῳοποιήσει καὶ τὰ θνητὰ σώματα ὑμῶν | 1 | Paul uses make alive to imply that he is referring to the resurrection of Christians after they have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will also resurrect your mortal bodies after you have died” | |
1377 | 8:11 | xi76 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ & αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Here, through indicates the means by which God will make Christians alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his Spirit” | |
1378 | 8:11 | e6t8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τοῦ ἐνοικοῦντος αὐτοῦ Πνεῦμα ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, who lives in you gives further information about the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “his Spirit, that is, the Spirit who lives in you” | |
1379 | 8:12 | mv1r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | So then indicates that what follows this phrase explains what came before it. So then here indicates that what follows in 8:12–17 summarizes the ideas of 8:5–11. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
1380 | 8:12 | qw5b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
1381 | 8:12 | e3j8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὀφειλέται ἐσμέν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of Christians as if they are debtors. He means that Christians are obligated to live according to the Spirit and not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have an obligation” | |
1382 | 8:12 | fb3m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐ τῇ σαρκὶ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “we are not debtors to the flesh” | |
1383 | 8:12 | ecoo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῇ σαρκὶ & τοῦ & σάρκα | 1 | Here Paul uses the flesh to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 7:18. | |
1384 | 8:12 | dh1m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν | 1 | Here, to live introduces an explanation of the flesh. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “that is, to live according to the flesh” | |
1385 | 8:12 | gplu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:4. | |
1386 | 8:13 | dczr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1387 | 8:13 | ri75 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα ζῆτε | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:4 and in the previous verse. | |
1388 | 8:13 | b9n5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μέλλετε ἀποθνῄσκειν | 1 | Here, die refers to dying spiritually, which means enduring eternal punishment in hell after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are going to die spiritually” | |
1389 | 8:13 | ld2h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος θανατοῦτε | 1 | Here, put to death means “completely stop doing something.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you stop doing the practices of the body” | |
1390 | 8:13 | ze08 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the practices that are done with the body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “what is done with the body” or “what you do with the body” | |
1391 | 8:13 | o1ly | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰς πράξεις τοῦ σώματος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of practices, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is practiced with the body” | |
1392 | 8:13 | nwul | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὰς πράξεις | 1 | Here, the practices refers specifically to sinful practices that a person does with his body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sinful practices of the body” | |
1393 | 8:13 | xihu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τοῦ σώματος | 1 | Paul is speaking of bodies in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of your bodies” | |
1394 | 8:13 | dr0e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζήσεσθε | 1 | Here, live refers to living forever with God in heaven after experiencing physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will live forever” | |
1395 | 8:14 | utms | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1396 | 8:14 | ojie | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὅσοι & οὗτοι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many people as … these people” | |
1397 | 8:14 | u8pv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὅσοι & Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἄγονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as many as the Spirit of God leads” | |
1398 | 8:14 | yz28 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Πνεύματι Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated the Spirit of God in 8:9. | |
1399 | 8:14 | gd1i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | υἱοί Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul is using the term sons in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the children of God” | |
1400 | 8:14 | wrk1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοί Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of these people as if God were their physical father. He means that these people have a father-son relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spiritual children of God” | |
1401 | 8:15 | wpp9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1402 | 8:15 | zi1c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πάλιν | 1 | Here, again indicates that Paul’s readers had a spirit of slavery before they became Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a second time” | |
1403 | 8:15 | r57o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πνεῦμα | 1 | Here, spirit could refer to: (1) a person’s attitude or emotional state. Alternate translation: “a mental state” (2) a demonic spirit. Alternate translation: “a demonic spirit” | |
1404 | 8:15 | av67 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πνεῦμα δουλείας & Πνεῦμα υἱοθεσίας | 1 | In both of these phrases Paul is using the possessive form to describe something that causes something else to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “a spirit that causes slavery … the Spirit that causes adoption” | |
1405 | 8:15 | iwyy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δουλείας & φόβον & υἱοθεσίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, fear, and adoption, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of being a slave … you being afraid … of those who have been adopted” | |
1406 | 8:15 | c43f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς φόβον | 1 | Here, leading to indicates that fear is the result of receiving a spirit of slavery. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “resulting in fear” | |
1407 | 8:15 | ew0a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Πνεῦμα | 1 | Here, the Spirit could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, as indicated by the use of Spirit in the ULT. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (2) a person’s attitude or emotional state, as with the previous use of spirit in this verse. Alternate translation: “a mental state” | |
1408 | 8:15 | ecq3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ | 1 | Here, cry out indicates that what follows is an emotional exclamation. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “O Abba! Father!” | |
1409 | 8:15 | vxs9 | Ἀββά, ὁ Πατήρ | 1 | Here Paul writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word Abba with Greek letters, which means Father. Since John translates the meaning next in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language. | ||
1410 | 8:15 | ahnr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | ὁ Πατήρ | 1 | Father is an important title for God. | |
1411 | 8:16 | mwbw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ Πνεύματι ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, spirit refers to a person’s attitude or emotional state. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a mental state” | |
1412 | 8:16 | aimw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τέκνα Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses children of God to refer to people who have a father-child relationship with God because they trust in Jesus. Here, children does not refer to young people, but only to the relationship that people have with their fathers. If you translate children using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” | |
1413 | 8:17 | agxk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” | |
1414 | 8:17 | izpd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἰ & τέκνα, καὶ κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if we are children, then we are also heirs: we are both heirs of God” | |
1415 | 8:17 | hfwo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τέκνα | 1 | See how you translated this word in the previous verse. | |
1416 | 8:17 | fj7w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | κληρονόμοι; κληρονόμοι μὲν Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul uses heirs to refer to Christians as if they will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that they will receive everything that God has promised to give Christians. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who will receive what God has promised us: both those who receive those things from God” | |
1417 | 8:17 | q751 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συνκληρονόμοι & Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul uses joint heirs to refer to Christians as if they, along with Christ, will inherit property and wealth from a family member. He means that God will give to Christians what he gives to Christ. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will also receive what God has promised us and Christ together” | |
1418 | 8:17 | q6ka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | συνπάσχομεν, ἵνα καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν | 1 | The pronoun him here refers to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we suffering together with Christ so that we may also be glorified together with Christ” | |
1419 | 8:17 | ggl6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Paul uses so that here to state the goal for which Christians suffer together with Christ. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” | |
1420 | 8:17 | j6ia | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ συνδοξασθῶμεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may also glorify us together with him” | |
1421 | 8:18 | i5nu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in 8:18–25 gives further information about what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1422 | 8:18 | f3sv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λογίζομαι | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to Paul (See: 7:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, consider” | |
1423 | 8:18 | b3b1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | λογίζομαι & ὅτι οὐκ ἄξια τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ, πρὸς | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I cannot compare the sufferings of this present time with” | |
1424 | 8:18 | oj49 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ παθήματα τοῦ νῦν καιροῦ & τὴν & δόξαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of sufferings and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the things that make us suffer in this present time … the glorious situation” | |
1425 | 8:18 | jjb8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μέλλουσαν & ἀποκαλυφθῆναι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will make known” | |
1426 | 8:19 | qoj5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates how what follows this word relates to what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse gives additional support for what Paul said in 8:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1427 | 8:19 | dn11 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται | 1 | Here, the eager expectation is an idiom Paul uses to emphasize how eagerly the creation is waiting. He does not mean that the eager expectation itself is waiting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation is very eagerly expecting” or “the creation is eagerly expecting with much eagerness” | |
1428 | 8:19 | d911 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ & ἀποκαραδοκία τῆς κτίσεως & ἀπεκδέχεται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who eagerly expects something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation is eagerly expecting with eager expectation” | |
1429 | 8:19 | ulvv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς κτίσεως & τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of creation and revelation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of the created things … the sons of God to be revealed” | |
1430 | 8:19 | dm6s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the time when God will reveal his sons” | |
1431 | 8:19 | sr2p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν υἱῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 8:14. | |
1432 | 8:20 | nh58 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in 8:20–22 is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1433 | 8:20 | zjl2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ & ματαιότητι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of futility, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the condition of being futile” | |
1434 | 8:20 | gdfe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ κτίσις | 1 | See how you translated this in the previous verse. | |
1435 | 8:20 | l9ab | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God subjugated the creation” | |
1436 | 8:20 | yvl3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ κτίσις ὑπετάγη, οὐχ ἑκοῦσα | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who could be subjected to someone and could have a will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if the creation were subjected against its will” | |
1437 | 8:20 | taz4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν ὑποτάξαντα | 1 | This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who subjected it” | |
1438 | 8:20 | l7bf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐφ’ ἑλπίδι | 1 | Here, hope refers to the creation’s hope, which is why the creation is “eagerly expecting the revelation of the sons of God” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of giving hope” | |
1439 | 8:20 | tof4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἑλπίδι | 1 | See how you translated hope in 5:4. | |
1440 | 8:21 | m3fi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς, εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a person who was enslaved to someone and needed to be freed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the creation itself will no longer decay, but will experience the glory” | |
1441 | 8:21 | l6qc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | αὐτὴ ἡ κτίσις ἐλευθερωθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will free the creation itself” | |
1442 | 8:21 | ovn5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ κτίσις | 1 | See how you translated the creation in the previous two verses. | |
1443 | 8:21 | l3vw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς & τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of slavery, decay, freedom, and glory, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay … being free to experience what is glorious” | |
1444 | 8:21 | r2n9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe slavery to decay. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “being enslaved to decay” | |
1445 | 8:21 | ba5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῆς δουλείας τῆς φθορᾶς | 1 | Here Paul speaks of decay as if it could enslave someone. He means that the creation was certain to decay. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being destined to decay” | |
1446 | 8:21 | tx57 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς τὴν ἐλευθερίαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of freedom as if it were a location someone could enter into. Paul means that the creation will experience this freedom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the freedom” | |
1447 | 8:21 | bv03 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῆς δόξης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the freedom that relates to the glory. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the freedom that comes from the glory” or “the freedom pertaining to the glory” | |
1448 | 8:21 | zsks | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς δόξης τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form the glory of the children of God to refer to the glory that God shares with believers. This was the same glory that God shared with humans when he created them, but which they lost when the first humans sinned, as mentioned in 3:23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the glory that God gives the children of God” | |
1449 | 8:21 | a5ix | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν τέκνων τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the 8:16. | |
1450 | 8:22 | pcay | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in this verse gives further support for what Paul said about the miserable condition of the creation in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1451 | 8:22 | l69k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συνστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the creation as if it were a woman who groans and labors in pain while giving birth to a baby. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the creation is like a woman groaning and laboring in pain while giving birth” or “all the creation is suffering greatly together” | |
1452 | 8:23 | b5sz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔχοντες | 1 | This clause could refer to: (1) Paul and his Christian readers. Alternate translation: “those who have the firstfruits of the Spirit” (2) the reason why Christians groan. Alternate translation: “because we have the firstfruits of the Spirit” | |
1453 | 8:23 | qyic | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the firstfruits that is the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the firstfruits, that is, the Spirit” | |
1454 | 8:23 | wutm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν ἀπαρχὴν | 1 | Here Paul uses firstfruits to refer to the Holy Spirit as if they were the first crop that was harvested during the harvest season. Paul means that the Holy Spirit is the first part of the blessings that God gives Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first gift” | |
1455 | 8:23 | xun5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | αὐτοὶ | 2 | Paul uses the word ourselves here to emphasize that Christians also share in the suffering of the creation. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our very selves” | |
1456 | 8:23 | ch9t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν ἑαυτοῖς στενάζομεν | 1 | Here Paul uses groan to refer to the emotional anguish that Christians experience while they wait to be with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience emotional anguish” | |
1457 | 8:23 | tiij | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | υἱοθεσίαν & τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν | 1 | See how you translated adoption in 8:15 and redemption in 3:24. | |
1458 | 8:23 | k1wy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | υἱοθεσίαν ἀπεκδεχόμενοι | 1 | Here, our adoption refers to when we will become full members of God’s family, as adopted sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “waiting for when we are fully members of God’s family” | |
1459 | 8:23 | qsb9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τοῦ σώματος ἡμῶν | 1 | Paul is speaking of the bodies of believers in general, not of one particular body. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “of our bodies” | |
1460 | 8:24 | oocv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is the reason why Christians “groan” and are “eagerly expecting” to be fully adopted and redeemed. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “We do this because” | |
1461 | 8:24 | sv0h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ & ἐλπίδι & ἐλπὶς & ἐλπίς | 1 | See how you translated the abstract noun hope in 5:4. | |
1462 | 8:24 | xwvy | τῇ & ἐλπίδι | 1 | Here, in could indicate: (1) that hope is associated with being saved. Alternate translation: “in association with this hope” (2) the means by which people are saved. In this case, hope would refer to faith. Alternate translation: “by this hope” | ||
1463 | 8:24 | x4gi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐσώθημεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God saved us” | |
1464 | 8:24 | edze | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | βλεπομένη & βλέπει | 1 | Paul uses seen and sees here to refer to experiencing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being experienced … he experiences” | |
1465 | 8:24 | pgmc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | βλεπομένη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people can see” | |
1466 | 8:24 | rxxy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” | |
1467 | 8:24 | tks9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὃ γὰρ βλέπει τις, ἐλπίζει? | 1 | Paul is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the thrust of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “For surely no one hopes for what he sees!” | |
1468 | 8:25 | ktqd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν | 1 | See how you translated the similar use of “seen” and “sees” in the previous verse. | |
1469 | 8:25 | g2pm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὃ οὐ βλέπομεν & ἀπεκδεχόμεθα | 1 | Here, what we do not see and it refer to the “adoption” and “redemption” mentioned in 8:23. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the adoption and redemption that we do not see … we are eagerly expecting these things” | |
1470 | 8:25 | l91v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δι’ ὑπομονῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of endurance, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while enduring” | |
1471 | 8:26 | bkwx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | συναντιλαμβάνεται & ὑπερεντυγχάνει | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “helps us … intercedes for us” | |
1472 | 8:26 | h8jy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ ἡμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weakness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in our weak condition” | |
1473 | 8:26 | a6e1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” | |
1474 | 8:26 | k5pn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | τὸ & τί προσευξώμεθα καθὸ δεῖ, οὐκ οἴδαμεν | 2 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “For we do not know the thing for which we should pray as we ought” | |
1475 | 8:26 | fbjc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | αὐτὸ τὸ Πνεῦμα | 1 | Paul uses the word himself here to emphasize that Holy Spirit helps Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very Spirit” | |
1476 | 8:26 | jmp8 | στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις | 1 | Alternate translation: “with groanings that we cannot express in words” | ||
1477 | 8:27 | tq4n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας | 1 | Here, the one who searches the hearts refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who searches the hearts,” | |
1478 | 8:27 | v184 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας | 1 | The phrase searches the hearts means “examines thoughts and emotions.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who knows all our thoughts and feelings” | |
1479 | 8:27 | tz5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὁ & ἐραυνῶν τὰς καρδίας | 1 | See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. | |
1480 | 8:27 | bioe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ φρόνημα τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the mindset that belongs to the Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s mindset” | |
1481 | 8:27 | rgcb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ φρόνημα | 1 | See how you translated mindset in 8:6. | |
1482 | 8:27 | fgdd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ Θεὸν | 1 | Here, God implies God’s will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” | |
1483 | 8:28 | u0ev | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀγαθόν & πρόθεσιν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good and purpose, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good … what he purposes” | |
1484 | 8:28 | q3ce | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τοῖς & κλητοῖς οὖσιν | 2 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for those whom God called” | |
1485 | 8:29 | m3vv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὓς προέγνω | 1 | Here, foreknew could mean: (1) God had determined to know them ahead of time, which is how this word is used in 1 Peter 1:20. Alternate translation: “whom he chose beforehand” (2) God knew what they would do ahead of time. Alternate translation: “whom he knew beforehand,” | |
1486 | 8:29 | xhn2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συμμόρφους τῆς εἰκόνος τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, image refers to how Christians will one day resemble Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated image in 1:23. Alternate translation: “to be a similar form that is like his Son” | |
1487 | 8:29 | yuw2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. | |
1488 | 8:29 | ojxg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that he might be” | |
1489 | 8:29 | r3vf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτὸν | 1 | The pronoun he refers to God’s Son, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son” | |
1490 | 8:29 | lf49 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ & πρωτότοκον | 1 | Here, firstborn could mean: (1) the most important person among God’s children. Alternate translation: “the person ranked first” (2) the first person to be resurrected. Alternate translation: “the first person to be resurrected” | |
1491 | 8:29 | s552 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοῖς | 1 | Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” | |
1492 | 8:29 | lxym | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀδελφοῖς | 1 | Here, brothers refers to Christians, whom Paul calls “joint heirs with Christ” in 8:17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “children of God” | |
1493 | 8:30 | hg3f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκάλεσεν & ἐκάλεσεν | 1 | Here, called refers to God choosing people to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “chose to be his people … he chose” | |
1494 | 8:30 | g29g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | καὶ ἐδόξασεν | 1 | Paul uses the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will also glorify” | |
1495 | 8:31 | uqou | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verses. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. | |
1496 | 8:31 | xpu3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν πρὸς ταῦτα? εἰ ὁ Θεὸς ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, τίς καθ’ ἡμῶν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in these two sentences to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say to these things: If God is for us, surely no one can be against us!” | |
1497 | 8:31 | ovfz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Because” | |
1498 | 8:31 | s21a | ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν | 1 | Alternate translation: “is on our side” | ||
1499 | 8:32 | fqim | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ὅς γε τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο, ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτόν, πῶς οὐχὶ καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὰ πάντα ἡμῖν χαρίσεται? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He who indeed did not spare his own Son, but gave him up on behalf of us all will surely also with him freely give us all things!” | |
1500 | 8:32 | mifc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὅς | 1 | He who here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who” | |
1501 | 8:32 | s9l9 | οὐκ ἐφείσατο | 1 | Alternate translation: “did not refrain from giving” or “did not refuse to give up” | ||
1502 | 8:32 | l73i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | τοῦ ἰδίου Υἱοῦ | 1 | Son is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. | |
1503 | 8:32 | b3au | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παρέδωκεν αὐτόν | 1 | Here, gave him up means that God allowed people to kill Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “gave him up to be killed” or “allowed him to be killed” | |
1504 | 8:33 | vr1b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ἐγκαλέσει κατὰ ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can bring an accusation against God’s elect!” | |
1505 | 8:33 | tidd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τίς ἐγκαλέσει | 1 | Here, accusation implies an accusation that is based on facts. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a true accusation” | |
1506 | 8:33 | ekqn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκλεκτῶν Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of elect, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have been chosen by God” or “those whom God has elected” | |
1507 | 8:33 | qmca | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | Θεὸς ὁ δικαιῶν | 1 | This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No on can accuse them, because God is the one who justifies” | |
1508 | 8:34 | vt5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ὁ κατακρινῶν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can condemn!” | |
1509 | 8:34 | j1dj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὁ κατακρινῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who condemns us believers” | |
1510 | 8:34 | u627 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ ἀποθανών, μᾶλλον δὲ ἐγερθείς ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὃς καὶ ἐντυγχάνει ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν | 1 | This sentences states the reason why the idea in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “No one can condemn because Christ Jesus is the one who died—but more than that, he was raised who also is at the right hand of God—who also intercedes on our behalf” | |
1511 | 8:34 | tw3l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐγερθείς | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him” | |
1512 | 8:34 | dea5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐγερθείς | 1 | See how you translated raised in 4:25. | |
1513 | 8:34 | uc9o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” | |
1514 | 8:34 | vd8g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅς, καί ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the place of honor next to God” | |
1515 | 8:35 | h9ba | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one will separate us from the love of Christ!” | |
1516 | 8:35 | btoo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡμᾶς χωρίσει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks figuratively of love as if it were an object that someone could be separated from. He means that Christ cannot stop loving those who believe in him. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause Christ to stop loving us” | |
1517 | 8:35 | ldx1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely neither tribulation, nor distress, nor persecution, nor hunger, nor nakedness, nor danger, nor sword!” | |
1518 | 8:35 | m2hl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς, ἢ γυμνότης, ἢ κίνδυνος, ἢ μάχαιρα? | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Will tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or hunger, or nakedness, or danger, or sword separate us from the love of Christ?” | |
1519 | 8:35 | qe2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία, ἢ διωγμὸς, ἢ λιμὸς | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of Tribulation, distress, persecution, hunger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “If people trouble us, or hurt us, or distress us, or persecute us, or cause us to be hungry” | |
1520 | 8:35 | q2dc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | θλῖψις, ἢ στενοχωρία | 1 | Tribulation and distress mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Extreme tribulation” | |
1521 | 8:35 | kcjr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἢ μάχαιρα | 1 | Here, sword refers to being killed violently. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “or being killed violently” | |
1522 | 8:36 | clec | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
1523 | 8:36 | f2de | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the sons of Korah. Alternate translation: “Just as the sons of Korah wrote” | |
1524 | 8:36 | wegb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ, θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν; ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς | 1 | In these clauses Paul quotes Psalm 44:22. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1525 | 8:36 | t67y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὅτι ἕνεκεν σοῦ | 1 | Here, your is singular and refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For your sake, God,” | |
1526 | 8:36 | s7wj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν | 1 | Here, we refers to the people who wrote this verse, so it would be exclusive. It does not refer to God, who is the one being spoken to. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
1527 | 8:36 | phxq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | θανατούμεθα & ἐλογίσθημεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “our enemies put us to death … They consider us” | |
1528 | 8:36 | h6v7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | θανατούμεθα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν | 1 | The phrase all day long is an exaggeration that emphasizes how frequently these people were being killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are killed regularly” | |
1529 | 8:36 | g3pi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | ἐλογίσθημεν ὡς πρόβατα σφαγῆς | 1 | Here Paul compares to sheep those whom people kill because they are loyal to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We are considered by those who kill us to only be as valuable as the sheep they kill” | |
1530 | 8:36 | gmi0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | σφαγῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of slaughter, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be slaughtered” | |
1531 | 8:37 | wytd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | But here indicates that what follows 8:37–39 is the negative answer to the rhetorical questions in 8:35. If you translated the rhetorical question in 8:35 as a question, then here you could use a natural way in your language for introducing a negative answer to that question. If you changed the rhetorical question in 8:35 to a statement, then here you could use a word that indicates strong contrast. Alternate translation: “No,” or “On the contrary,” | |
1532 | 8:37 | aii8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τούτοις | 1 | Here, these things refers to the list of various types of suffering mentioned in 8:35. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these kinds of suffering” | |
1533 | 8:37 | iui3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑπερνικῶμεν | 1 | Here, more than conquerors refers to those who have complete victory over their enemies. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have complete victory” | |
1534 | 8:37 | wcm6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, the one who loved us could refer to: (1) Christ, as in 8:35. Alternate translation: “through Christ, who loved us” (2) God, as in 8:39. Alternate translation: “through God, who loved us” | |
1535 | 8:38 | fch1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1536 | 8:38 | dgky | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πέπεισμαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God convinced me” | |
1537 | 8:38 | ok7f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θάνατος & ζωὴ & ἀρχαὶ & δυνάμεις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of death, life, governments, or powers, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being dead … being alive … those who govern … powerful things” | |
1538 | 8:38 | js9q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀρχαὶ | 1 | Here, governments could refer to: (1) demons, which is usually how Paul uses this word (1 Corinthians 15:24, Ephesians 6:12). Alternate translation: “ruling demons” (2) human kings and rulers. Alternate translation: “human rulers” | |
1539 | 8:38 | q7ti | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δυνάμεις | 1 | This could refer to: (1) demons with power, which is how Paul uses this word in 1 Corinthians 15:24 and Ephesians 1:21. Alternate translation: “demonic powers” (2) human beings with power. Alternate translation: “powerful people” | |
1540 | 8:39 | ppaz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὕψωμα & βάθος | 1 | Here, height refers to everything that exists above a person, and depth refers to everything that exists below a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is above us … everything that is below us” | |
1541 | 8:39 | ajct | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τις κτίσις ἑτέρα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “any other thing that God has created” | |
1542 | 8:39 | sd7j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | δυνήσεται ἡμᾶς χωρίσαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 8:35. | |
1543 | 8:39 | fr5b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, which marks that Paul is giving further information about the love of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “that is, the love of God in Christ Jesus” | |
1544 | 8:39 | tot5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 6:23. | |
1545 | 9:intro | w6f4 | 0 | Romans 9 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Chapter 9 begins a new topic in this letter. In chapters 9–11, Paul focuses on the nation of Israel. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 9:25–29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this ChapterPredestinationMany scholars believe that in this chapter Paul teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” Some take this to indicate that God has chosen to save some people from before the world existed. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterStone of stumblingIn 9:30–33 Paul explains that God made some Gentiles righteous because they believed in Jesus, but most Jews rejected Jesus because they were trying to obey the law of Moses to become righteous. Paul quotes Isaiah 8:14 and 28:16 to describe Jesus as if he were a stone that the Jews trip over when walking. See the translations and notes for how Peter uses these same verses from Isaiah in 1 Peter 2:6, 8. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |||
1546 | 9:1 | yg93 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι | 1 | These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the absolute truth in Christ” | |
1547 | 9:1 | igs8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 3:24. | |
1548 | 9:1 | h9mp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς | 1 | Here Paul uses conscience as if it were a person bearing witness in a courtroom. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See how you translated a similar phrase in 2:15. | |
1549 | 9:1 | dsaj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ | 1 | Here, in the Holy Spirit indicates that the Holy Spirit is the one who guided Paul’s conscience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the guidance of the Holy Spirit” | |
1550 | 9:2 | jx3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | λύπη μοί ἐστιν μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη τῇ καρδίᾳ μου | 1 | Here, unceasing pain in my heart is an idiom that Paul uses to share his emotional distress. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am experiencing great and unceasing sorrow” | |
1551 | 9:2 | jky1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | λύπη & μεγάλη, καὶ ἀδιάλειπτος ὀδύνη | 1 | These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize how intense his emotions are. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “exceedingly great sorrow” | |
1552 | 9:3 | sju1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why the previous statement is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” | |
1553 | 9:3 | b1g6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀνάθεμα εἶναι αὐτὸς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of accursed, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “myself to be cursed” or “myself to be an accursed person” | |
1554 | 9:3 | rh5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God separating me from Christ” | |
1555 | 9:3 | oma4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἀπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, separated from Christ refers to the idea of Paul losing his salvation, which is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “eternally kept apart from Christ” | |
1556 | 9:3 | og9y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου | 1 | Here, for the sake of implies that Paul is talking about the salvation of his brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the salvation of my brothers” | |
1557 | 9:3 | gaim | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου | 1 | Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” | |
1558 | 9:3 | eg9b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου | 1 | Here, brothers refers to Jews, who are Paul’s kinsmen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “my Jewish kinsmen” | |
1559 | 9:3 | gn5p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τῶν συγγενῶν μου, κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | This clause gives further information about my brothers. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those of my own race according to the flesh” | |
1560 | 9:3 | qckq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3. | |
1561 | 9:4 | p1ys | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οἵτινές εἰσιν Ἰσραηλεῖται | 1 | ||
1562 | 9:4 | jfzg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ υἱοθεσία & ἡ δόξα & ἡ νομοθεσία & ἡ λατρεία & αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of adoption, glory, law-giving, service, and promises, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being adopted … glorious things … being given the law … serving … what has been promised” | |
1563 | 9:4 | l6vs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ υἱοθεσία | 1 | Here, adoption refers to the idea that the Israelites were like God’s children. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the status as God’s children” | |
1564 | 9:4 | n2vu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ νομοθεσία | 1 | Here, the law-giving refers to God giving his laws to the Jews. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the giving of God’s laws to them” | |
1565 | 9:4 | vu6j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ λατρεία | 1 | Here, the service refers to Jewish worship in the temple, which was a way of serving God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “serving God in his temple” | |
1566 | 9:5 | tic7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἱ πατέρες | 1 | Here, the fathers refers to the first ancestors of the Israelites, who are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” | |
1567 | 9:5 | q5w4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated according to the flesh in 1:3 and 8:3. | |
1568 | 9:5 | offl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων | 1 | This clause refers to the Christ, mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection clearer. Alternate translation: “Christ is the one who is over all” | |
1569 | 9:5 | l07v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων | 1 | The phrase is over all implies ruling as king over all things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who reigns over all” | |
1570 | 9:5 | blop | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Θεὸς, εὐλογητὸς | 1 | Here, blessed God refers to Jesus. It does not refer to Father God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is the blessed God” | |
1571 | 9:6 | equ8 | οὐχ οἷον & ὅτι ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Alternate translation: “it is not as if the word of God has failed” or “the word of God has not failed” | ||
1572 | 9:6 | vedq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἐκπέπτωκεν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks about the word of God as if it were a person who had not failed. He means that what God has said will certainly happen as he said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the word of God will remain unfulfilled” or “the word of God has proved false” | |
1573 | 9:6 | bmq6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the word of God refers to what God promised to do for Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s word of promise” | |
1574 | 9:6 | r8se | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this sentence gives the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1575 | 9:6 | wy8z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐ & πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ οὗτοι, Ἰσραήλ | 1 | Here Paul uses the word Israel in two different ways. The phrase all the ones from Israel refers to all the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. However, the second occurrence of Israel refers to physical descendants of Jacob who trust in Jesus. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “not all the ones from physical Israel are part of spiritual Israel” or “not every physical Israelite is a true Israelite” | |
1576 | 9:7 | s3rj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐδ’ ὅτι εἰσὶν σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ πάντες τέκνα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Neither is it such a thing that all the children are seed of Abraham” or “Neither is it true that all the children are seed of Abraham” | |
1577 | 9:7 | m5av | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πάντες τέκνα | 1 | Here, children refers specifically to “the children of Israel,” which is a name for the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the children of Israel” | |
1578 | 9:7 | kpls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πάντες τέκνα | 1 | Here, children refers to someone’s descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the descendants” | |
1579 | 9:7 | y86t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ & σοι σπέρμα | 1 | Here, seed refers to refers to physical descendants of Abraham who trust in Jesus, as did the second occurrence of “Israel” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “true descendants of Abraham … your true seed” | |
1580 | 9:7 | kbnn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἀλλ’ | 1 | But ere indicates that what follows in some way contradicts what was said previously. Here, Paul is using a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 21:12). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But God says in the Scriptures,” | |
1581 | 9:7 | z2f3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 21:12. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1582 | 9:7 | wam8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα | 1 | Here, your refers to Abraham, and so, it is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham, in Isaac your seed will be called” | |
1583 | 9:7 | obgo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Ἰσαὰκ | 1 | Here, in Isaac means “through the descendants of Isaac.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Isaac’s descendants” | |
1584 | 9:7 | i640 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that God is the one who will do the action, and he is speaking in first person. Alternate translation: “I will call your seed” | |
1585 | 9:8 | yhq8 | τοῦτ’ ἔστιν | 1 | Alternate translation: “Another way to say this is” | ||
1586 | 9:8 | s5xa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκὸς, | 1 | Here, children of the flesh refers to the physical descendants of Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Abraham’s physical descendants” | |
1587 | 9:8 | y17u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the 8:16. | |
1588 | 9:8 | ta8t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe children who are the result of the promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the children who result from the promise” | |
1589 | 9:8 | z5no | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of promise, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who had been promised” | |
1590 | 9:8 | h751 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῆς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | Here, the promise refers to God’s promise to give Abraham descendants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the promise God made to Abraham” | |
1591 | 9:8 | p768 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σπέρμα | 1 | See how you translated seed in the previous verse. | |
1592 | 9:9 | f4ap | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1593 | 9:9 | ptfv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος οὗτος | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 18:10, 14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “this is the word of promise that God spoke in the Scriptures” | |
1594 | 9:9 | up57 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is a promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word that was promised” | |
1595 | 9:9 | vplh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐπαγγελίας & ὁ λόγος | 1 | Here, Paul used the term word to describe what God had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s spoken promise” | |
1596 | 9:9 | sufo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | κατὰ τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον, ἐλεύσομαι, καὶ ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 18:10, 14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1597 | 9:9 | r9dw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐλεύσομαι | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, will come” | |
1598 | 9:9 | hxl1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καὶ | 1 | Here, and indicates that what follows this word is related to what came before it. Here, and indicates that what follows is the result of what happened in the previous clause. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a result. Alternate translation: “and the result will be that” | |
1599 | 9:9 | h4kf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός | 1 | This clause is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “a son will be born to Sarah” | |
1600 | 9:9 | wqb2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἔσται τῇ Σάρρᾳ υἱός | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Sarah will have a son” | |
1601 | 9:10 | icc1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ μόνον δέ | 1 | Here, this refers to what Paul said in the previous verse, which was an example of God’s promises. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, this is not the only example” or “Now, what God promised Abraham is not the only example” | |
1602 | 9:10 | nqkc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀλλὰ καὶ Ῥεβέκκα | 1 | Paul implies that God made a promise to Rebekah and he states that promise in 9:12. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but Rebekah also received a promise from God” | |
1603 | 9:10 | mb5q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, father refers to Isaac as the ancestor of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “our forefather” | |
1604 | 9:11 | h16y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | The words for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows gives further information about what Paul says in the previous verse and the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” | |
1605 | 9:11 | ekxa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | γὰρ | 1 | Here Paul is referring to God choosing to bless Jacob instead of Esau, the twin sons of Rebekah and Isaac. However, he does not state this explicitly until 9:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God chose to bless only one of Rebekah’s two sons,” | |
1606 | 9:11 | luly | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | μήπω & γεννηθέντων, μηδὲ πραξάντων τι ἀγαθὸν ἢ φαῦλον | 1 | Paul is leaving out some words that these clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “her sons not yet having been born, nor indeed having done anything good or bad” | |
1607 | 9:11 | h32d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God chose only one of Rebekah’s sons. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause, as in the UST. | |
1608 | 9:11 | a1gz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ & πρόθεσις τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of purpose, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God had purposed” | |
1609 | 9:11 | ts50 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατ’ ἐκλογὴν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of election, you could express the same idea in another way. The context indicates that Paul is referring to God electing people. Alternate translation: “according to electing people” or “in relation to choosing people” | |
1610 | 9:12 | ze3m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων, ἀλλ’ ἐκ τοῦ καλοῦντος | 1 | Here Paul is referring to the election of one of Rebekah’s sons, Jacob, as stated in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not elect Jacob by works, but by the one who calls” | |
1611 | 9:12 | h6uj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἔργων | 1 | Here, works refers to human actions in general. It does not refer to “the works of the law” because God had not yet given his law to Moses when Jacob and Esau lived. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what people do” | |
1612 | 9:12 | d6mr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦ καλοῦντος | 1 | Here, the one who calls refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God who calls” | |
1613 | 9:12 | sie3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τοῦ καλοῦντος | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “the one who calls people” | |
1614 | 9:12 | wv7n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God said to her” | |
1615 | 9:12 | fcho | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἐρρέθη αὐτῇ | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Genesis 25:23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was said to her, as recorded in the Scriptures” | |
1616 | 9:12 | y9cc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῇ | 1 | Here, the pronoun her refers to Rebekah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
1617 | 9:12 | hwwn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Genesis 25:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1618 | 9:12 | b8px | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ μείζων δουλεύσει τῷ ἐλάσσονι | 1 | The phrases the older and the younger refer to Rebekah’s older and younger twin sons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
1619 | 9:13 | heon | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
1620 | 9:13 | mxfw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Malachi, and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “It is just as God had Malachi write” | |
1621 | 9:13 | xt7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τὸν Ἰακὼβ ἠγάπησα, τὸν δὲ Ἠσαῦ ἐμίσησα | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Malachi 1:2–3. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1622 | 9:13 | jcfs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἠγάπησα & ἐμίσησα | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, loved … I hated” | |
1623 | 9:13 | y3zu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ἐμίσησα | 1 | Paul quotes God using the word hated as an exaggeration to say that he did not love Esau and had completely rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I completely rejected” | |
1624 | 9:14 | lf2k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:6–13. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. | |
1625 | 9:14 | m8xk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is not asking for information, but is using questions to address an objection that some people may have to what he said in the previous verses because they misunderstood him. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations or communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say that God is truly unrighteous!” | |
1626 | 9:14 | xvei | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ? | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is speaking as if he were a person who misunderstood what Paul had taught in the previous verses. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1627 | 9:14 | ya6m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of unrighteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no unrighteous character with God, is there” | |
1628 | 9:14 | euci | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ἀδικία παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of unrighteousness as if it were an object that could not be with God. He is referring to the idea of God being unrighteous. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God is not unrighteous, is he” | |
1629 | 9:14 | s1hm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ γένοιτο! | 1 | In this sentence Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions he wrote in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘May it never be!’” | |
1630 | 9:14 | jrp5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο! | 1 | ||
1631 | 9:15 | x9ri | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1632 | 9:15 | k9i0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τῷ Μωϋσεῖ γὰρ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Exodus 33:19). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For he says to Moses that which is written in the Scriptures” | |
1633 | 9:15 | v2x6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγει & ἐλεήσω & ἐλεῶ & οἰκτειρήσω & οἰκτείρω | 1 | The pronouns he and I here refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … ‘I, God, will have mercy … I will have mercy … I, God, will have compassion … I will have compassion’” | |
1634 | 9:15 | kq2c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” | |
1635 | 9:15 | c2t0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Exodus 33:19. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1636 | 9:15 | f61q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of mercy and compassion, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I will act mercifully to whomever I will act mercifully, and I will act compassionately to whomever I will act compassionately” | |
1637 | 9:15 | f1hi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | ἐλεήσω ὃν ἂν ἐλεῶ, καὶ οἰκτειρήσω ὃν ἂν οἰκτείρω | 1 | These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They emphasize that God does whatever he wants. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another form that emphasizes that God is graciously kind to exactly those and only those to whom he chooses to show kindness, and he does so without outside influence. | |
1638 | 9:16 | y06j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 9:11–15. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
1639 | 9:16 | hn5j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ | 1 | Here, it refers to God acting mercifully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God’s mercy is not” | |
1640 | 9:16 | d4f5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τοῦ θέλοντος, οὐδὲ τοῦ τρέχοντος, ἀλλὰ & Θεοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe what God’s mercy does or does not depend on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “depending on the one who wills, nor depending on the one who runs, but depending on God” | |
1641 | 9:16 | ues3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοῦ τρέχοντος | 1 | Here Paul uses the one who runs to refer to a person who does good things to try to gain God’s favor as if that person were running a race. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who tries to gain favor” or “the one who works very hard” | |
1642 | 9:16 | plbr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τοῦ ἐλεῶντος | 1 | This phrase gives further information about God. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “he being the one who has mercy” | |
1643 | 9:16 | p1fn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τοῦ ἐλεῶντος | 1 | See how you translated mercy in the previous verse. | |
1644 | 9:17 | st77 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the another reason why what Paul said in 9:14 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “What I said previously is also true, due to the fact that” | |
1645 | 9:17 | x1cj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ | 1 | Here Paul uses the scripture as if it were a person who could speak. He means that the scripture he is about to quote contains information that God said to Pharaoh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says to Pharaoh in the scripture” | |
1646 | 9:17 | e0r9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | λέγει & ἡ Γραφὴ τῷ Φαραὼ | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Exodus 9:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God said to Pharaoh in the Scriptures” | |
1647 | 9:17 | w1ki | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
1648 | 9:17 | ipl3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὅτι εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐξήγειρά σε, ὅπως ἐνδείξωμαι ἐν σοὶ τὴν δύναμίν μου, καὶ ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Exodus 9:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1649 | 9:17 | wfwo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | αὐτὸ τοῦτο | 1 | See how you translated purpose in 9:11. | |
1650 | 9:17 | xu7s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐξήγειρά σε & ἐνδείξωμαι & μου | 1 | Here the pronouns I and my refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, raised you up … I might demonstrate my” | |
1651 | 9:17 | pz5x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐξήγειρά σε | 1 | Paul quotes God using the phrase raised you up to refer to causing someone to become king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I caused you to become king” | |
1652 | 9:17 | nfv5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | σε & σοὶ | 1 | Both occurrences of you in this verse are singular and refer to Pharaoh. | |
1653 | 9:17 | ho3g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ὅπως & ὅπως | 1 | Both occurrences of so that in this verse introduce purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose that” | |
1654 | 9:17 | dp4p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δύναμίν μου | 1 | See how you translated power in 1:16. | |
1655 | 9:17 | wspw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν σοὶ | 1 | Paul quotes God speaking of his power as if it were an object that could be in Pharaoh. He means that Pharaoh is the means by which God would show his power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by means of you” | |
1656 | 9:17 | gps5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄνομά μου | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that people might proclaim my name” | |
1657 | 9:17 | jp6i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὸ ὄνομά μου | 1 | Here, my name represents God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “who I am” | |
1658 | 9:18 | qlty | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 9:14–17. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. See how you translated this phrase in 5:18 and in 9:16. | |
1659 | 9:18 | jrj5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | θέλει, ἐλεεῖ & θέλει, σκληρύνει | 1 | In this verse he refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has mercy … he wills … God wills … he hardens” | |
1660 | 9:18 | bf3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐλεεῖ | 1 | See how you translated mercy in 9:15. | |
1661 | 9:18 | qzvz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σκληρύνει | 1 | Here, he hardens refers to causing someone to become stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he causes to become stubborn” | |
1662 | 9:19 | z4j2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ἐρεῖς | 1 | You here is singular and refers to a hypothetical person who opposes Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You people who oppose me will say” | |
1663 | 9:19 | r6r7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐρεῖς μοι οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:14–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then you will respond to what I just said by saying to me” | |
1664 | 9:19 | zt94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | μοι | 1 | The pronoun me here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to me, Paul” | |
1665 | 9:19 | bbe4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἔτι μέμφεται? τῷ γὰρ βουλήματι αὐτοῦ, τίς ἀνθέστηκεν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using these two questions here to express the objections that someone who opposes him might have to what he said in 9:14–18. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then he should not find fault with us! No one has ever been able to withstand his will!” | |
1666 | 9:19 | eqph | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:14–18. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then why” | |
1667 | 9:19 | hqr7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | μέμφεται & αὐτοῦ | 1 | In this verse the pronouns he and his refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does God … find fault … God’s” | |
1668 | 9:19 | zioz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἔτι μέμφεται | 1 | Here, find fault refers to blaming someone for doing something bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “does he blame us for our sins” | |
1669 | 9:20 | n1ti | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὦ ἄνθρωπε | 1 | In this verse Paul begins to respond to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying, ‘O man’” | |
1670 | 9:20 | g7mn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὦ ἄνθρωπε, μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ? μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? | 1 | In this verse Paul is responding to the rhetorical questions from his hypothetical opponent in the previous verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1671 | 9:20 | hci6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὦ ἄνθρωπε, | 1 | O man here is an exclamation word that here communicates indignance. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How dare you, man!” | |
1672 | 9:20 | uu1t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπε | 1 | Although the term man is masculine, Paul is using the word here to emphasize human weakness. Alternate translation: “human being” or “mere mortal” | |
1673 | 9:20 | r5uu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ? | 1 | Here, the one answering against God gives further information about who you is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these words clearer. Alternate translation: “who indeed are you who answer against God” | |
1674 | 9:20 | qvsd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μενοῦνγε σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἀνταποκρινόμενος τῷ Θεῷ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize his outrage at what was said in the previous verse. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you who are answering against God indeed are nothing!” | |
1675 | 9:20 | i3fa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | σὺ | 1 | Here, you is singular and refers to a hypothetical person who opposes Paul. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. | |
1676 | 9:20 | knb3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The one molded surely must not say to the one having molded it, ‘Why did you make me this way?’” | |
1677 | 9:20 | y6jz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως? | 1 | Here Paul speaks of a person whom God created as if that person were an object that was molded by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The created person surely must not say to the one having created him, ‘Why did you make me this way?’” | |
1678 | 9:20 | styp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸ πλάσμα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one whom God molded” | |
1679 | 9:20 | s9hg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ πλάσαντι | 1 | Here, the one having molded it refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who molded it” | |
1680 | 9:20 | dzn4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes | μὴ ἐρεῖ τὸ πλάσμα, τῷ πλάσαντι, τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως | 1 | If you translated this verse as a direct quotation, then this sentence would be a direct quotation inside a direct quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The one molded will not ask the one having molded it why he made it this way. Will it?” | |
1681 | 9:20 | wcj3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί με ἐποίησας οὕτως | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize what his hypothetical opponent is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not have made me this way!” | |
1682 | 9:21 | e94a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The potter surely has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor!” | |
1683 | 9:21 | nsdy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν? | 1 | Paul speaks about God’s authority over people by using the metaphor of a potter and his clay. Paul means that God has the right to do whatever he wants with people, because he made them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Or does God not have authority over us like a potter has authority over the clay to make from the same lump not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” | |
1684 | 9:21 | falq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | ἢ οὐκ ἔχει ἐξουσίαν ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος ποιῆσαι ὃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος, ὃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν? | 1 | A potter is a person who makes containers out of a type of soil called clay that becomes hard after it is heated. The potter takes a lump of clay and forms it into different kinds of containers that are used for various purposes. If your readers would not be familiar with clay containers, you could use the name of a different type of material that is used in your area to make containers, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “Or does the person who makes something not have authority over his materials to make from those materials not only what is a vessel for honor, but also what is for dishonor?” | |
1685 | 9:21 | lm6k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of honor and dishonor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “a vessel for what is honorable … for what is dishonorable” | |
1686 | 9:21 | pe9t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς τιμὴν σκεῦος & εἰς ἀτιμίαν | 1 | Here, honor and dishonor refer to how these vessels will be used. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a vessel for honorable use … for dishonorable use” | |
1687 | 9:22-24 | gk5u | 0 | General Information:9:22–24 are one long sentence. If you divide these verses into multiple sentences, as the UST does, then you may need to repeat some phrases in order to make the meaning clear. | |||
1688 | 9:22 | a9tl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἰ | 1 | Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, especially the idea in 9:20 that no one can speak against God. Alternate translation: “what can you say against God if” | |
1689 | 9:22 | afmb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | εἰ | 1 | Here, what if indicates the beginning of one long rhetorical question that extends from 9:22 to 9:24. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God if” | |
1690 | 9:22 | dzpq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Here, if indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from 9:22 to 9:24. Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly say anything against God since” | |
1691 | 9:22 | cqto | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make his power known” | |
1692 | 9:22 | bqkv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | θέλων & ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν | 1 | This clause could indicate: (1) the reason why God endured vessels of wrath. Alternate translation: “as a result of being willing to demonstrate his wrath” (2) a contrast between God being willing to demonstrate his wrath and enduring vessels of wrath. Alternate translation: “even though he was willing to demonstrate his wrath” | |
1693 | 9:22 | yyyp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ὀργὴν, καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ, ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ, σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath, power, patience, and destruction, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how wrathful he is and to make known how powerful he is, being very patient, endured vessels for being wrathful against that were prepared for being destroyed” | |
1694 | 9:22 | cj94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to make people know his power” | |
1695 | 9:22 | we86 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σκεύη ὀργῆς | 1 | Paul refers to people as if they were vessels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people of wrath” | |
1696 | 9:22 | ba9v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | σκεύη ὀργῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe vessels that deserve wrath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that deserve wrath” or “people who deserve wrath” | |
1697 | 9:22 | at71 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the vessels of wrath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are the ones prepared for destruction” | |
1698 | 9:22 | o4ub | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one who does the action could be: (1) God, who is the main subject of this verse. Alternate translation: “God prepared for destruction” (2) the people themselves. Alternate translation: “who prepared themselves for destruction” | |
1699 | 9:22 | bney | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | The word for indicates that what follows this word connects to what came before it. Here, for indicates the purpose for which the vessels of wrath were prepared. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for purpose of being destroyed” | |
1700 | 9:22 | webu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς ἀπώλειαν | 1 | Here, destruction refers to experiencing punishment forever in hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal destruction” | |
1701 | 9:23 | rtom | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ | 1 | Here, and indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in the previous verse. If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse here. Alternate translation: “What if God also endured vessels of wrath so that” or “God also endured vessels of wrath so that” | |
1702 | 9:23 | u6tn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα & εἰς | 1 | Here, so that and for indicate purpose clauses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that … for the purpose of” | |
1703 | 9:23 | ufj7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | γνωρίσῃ & αὐτοῦ & προητοίμασεν | 1 | In this verse the pronouns he and his refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God might make known … God’s … God prepared beforehand” | |
1704 | 9:23 | o1fl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γνωρίσῃ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might make people know” | |
1705 | 9:23 | hgau | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸν πλοῦτον | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of riches, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the rich character” | |
1706 | 9:23 | iq94 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ & ἐλέους & εἰς δόξαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of glory and mercy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of how glorious he is … toward which he acts mercifully … for being glorious” | |
1707 | 9:23 | ojeo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸν πλοῦτον τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a glory that is characterized by wealth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “his rich glory” | |
1708 | 9:23 | she3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | σκεύη ἐλέους | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe vessels that will receive God’s mercy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “vessels that will receive mercy” | |
1709 | 9:23 | v33r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σκεύη ἐλέους | 1 | See how you translated vessels in the previous verse. | |
1710 | 9:23 | kuim | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ἃ προητοίμασεν εἰς δόξαν | 1 | This clause gives further information about the vessels of mercy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are the ones he prepared beforehand for glory” | |
1711 | 9:23 | jcjx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς δόξαν | 1 | Here, for indicates the purpose for which the vessels of mercy were prepared. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “prepared for the purpose of being glorified” | |
1712 | 9:23 | t41s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς δόξαν | 1 | Here, glory refers to experiencing glory forever with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for experiencing eternal glory” | |
1713 | 9:24 | yowi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ & ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, even indicates that this verse continues the sentence that Paul began in 9:22. If you divide the sentence into shorter sentences, you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verses here. Alternate translation: “What if even we are vessels of mercy” or “Even we are vessels of mercy” | |
1714 | 9:24 | y6vp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
1715 | 9:24 | t8rn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐκάλεσεν | 1 | Here, he refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God called” | |
1716 | 9:24 | zp1t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οὐ μόνον ἐξ Ἰουδαίων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐξ ἐθνῶν | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the people whom God called. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not only from the Jews, but also from the Gentiles” | |
1717 | 9:25 | eqc2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ Ὡσηὲ λέγει | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse are quotations from an Old Testament book (Hosea 2:23; 1:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “As he says also in the scripture written by Hosea” | |
1718 | 9:25 | ewb4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγει & καλέσω & μου & μου | 1 | Here, he, I, and my refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God says … I, God, will call … my … my” | |
1719 | 9:25 | is9f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” | |
1720 | 9:25 | f0rx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου, λαόν μου, καὶ τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Hosea 2:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1721 | 9:25 | yy15 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην, ἠγαπημένην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I did not love, ‘One I love’” | |
1722 | 9:26 | t46e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | καὶ ἔσται ἐν τῷ τόπῳ οὗ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς, οὐ λαός μου ὑμεῖς, ἐκεῖ κληθήσονται υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος | 1 | This verse is a quotation from Hosea 1:10. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1723 | 9:26 | ciif | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐρρέθη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context indicates that God said this in first person. Alternate translation: “I said” | |
1724 | 9:26 | yh4w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κληθήσονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “I will call them” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people will call them” | |
1725 | 9:26 | wpuw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | υἱοὶ Θεοῦ ζῶντος | 1 | See how you translated sons in 8:14. | |
1726 | 9:26 | brl6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | Θεοῦ ζῶντος | 1 | Here, the living God could refer to: (1) God being the one who lives. Alternate translation: “the God who is alive” (2) God being the one who makes living things become alive. Alternate translation: “the God who gives life” or “the God who makes alive” | |
1727 | 9:27 | oej1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Ἠσαΐας δὲ κράζει ὑπὲρ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 10:22–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, as recorded in the Scriptures, Isaiah cries out concerning Israel” | |
1728 | 9:27 | zqi1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | κράζει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb cries out to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “cried out” | |
1729 | 9:27 | xjca | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | Ἰσραήλ | 1 | Here, Israel refers to the Israelites. They are the descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Israelites” or “the descendants of Israel” | |
1730 | 9:27 | kgza | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐὰν ᾖ ὁ ἀριθμὸς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ, ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης, τὸ ὑπόλειμμα σωθήσεται. | 1 | This sentence is the beginning of a quotation from Isaiah 10:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. | |
1731 | 9:27 | b0is | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | Here, the word sons means refers to descendants. Paul quotes Isaiah identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” | |
1732 | 9:27 | qr8l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης, | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “as the number of the grains of sand of the sea” | |
1733 | 9:27 | k9j8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | ὡς ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης | 1 | Here Paul quotes Isaiah comparing the number of Israelites to the number of grains of sand beside the sea in order to emphasize how numerous they are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “too many to count” | |
1734 | 9:27 | nstd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ ἄμμος τῆς θαλάσσης | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using the possessive form to describe the sand that is next to the sea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the sand by the sea” | |
1735 | 9:27 | wek9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ ὑπόλειμμα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of remnant, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who remain” | |
1736 | 9:27 | wig1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σωθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save” | |
1737 | 9:28 | rupx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why the statement in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” | |
1738 | 9:28 | cm32 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | λόγον | 1 | Here, word refers to God’s promise to both punish the Israelites and save a remnant from among them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his promise to punish and save” | |
1739 | 9:28 | pqri | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | συντελῶν | 1 | Here, finishing refers to successfully completing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “successfully completing it” | |
1740 | 9:28 | md3o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συντέμνων | 1 | Here, cutting it short refers to finish doing something quickly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “ending it quickly” | |
1741 | 9:28 | x832 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | συντελῶν καὶ συντέμνων | 1 | The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Isaiah 10:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. | |
1742 | 9:29 | gq8u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καὶ καθὼς προείρηκεν Ἠσαΐας | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 1:9). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And just as Isaiah has said beforehand in the Scriptures” | |
1743 | 9:29 | xem9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εἰ μὴ Κύριος Σαβαὼθ ἐνκατέλιπεν ἡμῖν σπέρμα, ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 1:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1744 | 9:29 | dl9x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῖν & ἂν ἐγενήθημεν & ὡμοιώθημεν | 1 | In this verse us and we refer to Isaiah and those to whom he spoke, so us and we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
1745 | 9:29 | iqy3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σπέρμα | 1 | Here, seed is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in 4:13. | |
1746 | 9:29 | yicp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν | 1 | Paul’s readers would have known that Sodom and Gomorrah were cities that God completely destroyed because the people who lived in them were very wicked (Genesis 19). If your readers might not be familiar with this story, you could state this explicitly or indicate this in a note. Alternate translation: “we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom, and we would have been destroyed like the people of Sodom” | |
1747 | 9:29 | mkmt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | ὡς Σόδομα ἂν ἐγενήθημεν, καὶ ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν | 1 | These two phrases mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that Israel could have been completely destroyed by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “we would have become just like Sodom and Gomorrah” | |
1748 | 9:29 | obdz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὡς Γόμορρα ἂν ὡμοιώθημεν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God would have made us like Gomorrah” | |
1749 | 9:30 | xv7y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word then indicates that what follows is a response. Here, then is a response to what Paul said in 9:20–29. See how you translated this phrase in 6:1. | |
1750 | 9:30 | m5l2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form in this sentence to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then we will say this:” | |
1751 | 9:30 | ki4k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὅτι ἔθνη | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We will say that the Gentiles” | |
1752 | 9:30 | bnl6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τὰ μὴ διώκοντα δικαιοσύνην | 1 | This clause gives further information about the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who are those people not pursuing righteousness” | |
1753 | 9:30 | x51u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην & δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated this word in 6:13. | |
1754 | 9:30 | gl4m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 4:16. | |
1755 | 9:31 | z133 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | See how you translated this name in 9:27. | |
1756 | 9:31 | f18n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον & νόμον | 1 | In this verse law refers to the laws that God gave the Jews by dictating them to Moses. See how you translated this use of law in 2:12. | |
1757 | 9:31 | x1o0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | νόμον δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a law that was for the purpose of righteousness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a law for righteousness” | |
1758 | 9:31 | gjmu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνης | 1 | See how you translated this word in the previous verse. | |
1759 | 9:32 | y4pf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | διὰ τί? | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Why could they not attain righteousness?” | |
1760 | 9:32 | e7p7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | διὰ τί? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is why:” | |
1761 | 9:32 | fty2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “They did not attain righteousness because it was not by faith” | |
1762 | 9:32 | scnv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 9:30. | |
1763 | 9:32 | j5jp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ ἔργων | 1 | Paul assumes that his readers would understand that works means “works of the law.” See how you translated the same use of works in 4:2. | |
1764 | 9:32 | s0r6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | προσέκοψαν | 1 | They stumbled over introduces a sentence that states the result of what Paul described in the previous sentence. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, they stumbled over” | |
1765 | 9:32 | hzww | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | προσέκοψαν τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος | 1 | Here Paul speaks of Christ as if he were a stone that the Jews stumbled over. He means that the Jews were offended by Christ because they tried to become righteous by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were offended by Jesus, like people who stumbled over a stone of stumbling” or “They were offended by Jesus” | |
1766 | 9:32 | r14f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῷ λίθῳ τοῦ προσκόμματος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a stone that causes stumbling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the stone that causes stumbling” | |
1767 | 9:33 | kx9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in [1:17]. | |
1768 | 9:33 | ivt3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation was written by the prophet Isaiah and God is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” or “just as God said through Isaiah” | |
1769 | 9:33 | uo7d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται. | 1 | This sentence is Paul’s paraphrase of parts of Isaiah 8:14 and 28:16. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1770 | 9:33 | m6ll | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἰδοὺ | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using the term Behold to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. | |
1771 | 9:33 | hmmn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τίθημι | 1 | In this quotation from the Old Testament, I refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, place” | |
1772 | 9:33 | dy6x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν Σιὼν | 1 | Here, Zion refers to the city of Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in Jerusalem” | |
1773 | 9:33 | mf6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου & αὐτῷ | 1 | Here, stone of stumbling, rock of offense, and it refer to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person who will be like a stone of stumbling and a rock of offense” or “a person who will cause people to stumble and will offend them” | |
1774 | 9:33 | u3dj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how offensive the Messiah would be to the Jews. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “a stone that causes great offense” | |
1775 | 9:33 | h3tw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | λίθον προσκόμματος | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
1776 | 9:33 | c8t8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πέτραν σκανδάλου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a rock that causes offense. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the rock that causes offense” | |
1777 | 9:33 | knfh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | σκανδάλου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of offense, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that offends” | |
1778 | 9:33 | tu4i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not shame the one who believes on it” | |
1779 | 10:intro | c2li | 0 | Romans 10 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in 10:8. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 10:18–20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterRhetorical questionsPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Jewish people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterDifferent uses of “they,” “them,” and “their”In 10:1–4, the pronouns “they,” “them,” and “their” always refer to the people of Israel. However, those pronouns refer to various things and people in 10:5–21, which will be addressed in the notes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |||
1780 | 10:1 | hj4b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
1781 | 10:1 | v3jp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ & εὐδοκία & ἡ δέησις & σωτηρίαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of good pleasure, prayer, and salvation, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the very pleasing thing … what I pray … them to be saved” | |
1782 | 10:1 | tq7k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῆς ἐμῆς καρδίας | 1 | Here, heart refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of my inner being” or “of my mind” | |
1783 | 10:1 | tmf2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῶν | 1 | The pronoun them in 10:1–4 refers to Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” | |
1784 | 10:2 | y7qg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I feel this way because” | |
1785 | 10:2 | adka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ζῆλον & ἔχουσιν & οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of zeal and full knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they are zealous … not by fully knowing” | |
1786 | 10:2 | rjqd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ζῆλον Θεοῦ ἔχουσιν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a zeal that is directed toward God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “they have a zeal for God” | |
1787 | 10:2 | pxyj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐ κατ’ ἐπίγνωσιν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they have zeal of God that is not according to full knowledge” | |
1788 | 10:3 | e7p2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1789 | 10:3 | bw97 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ δικαιοσύνην & τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated the righteousness of God in 1:17. | |
1790 | 10:3 | dgjn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἰδίαν δικαιοσύνην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “being righteous on their own” | |
1791 | 10:3 | a6r4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐχ ὑπετάγησαν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the righteousness of God as if it were a person to whom someone could submit. He means that they refused to attain righteousness in the way God requires, which is by faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they refuse to receive the righteousness of God attained according to his way” | |
1792 | 10:4 | x1w8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why the Jews were wrong to try to make themselves righteous, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “They were wrong to seek to establish their own righteousness because” | |
1793 | 10:4 | y30a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τέλος & νόμου | 1 | Here, the completion of the law could mean: (1) the end of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the end of the law” (2) the goal of the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “is the goal of the law” | |
1794 | 10:4 | a9up | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τέλος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of completion, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is what completes” | |
1795 | 10:4 | y3sx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12. | |
1796 | 10:4 | nprh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς δικαιοσύνην | 1 | Here, for could indicate that: (1) righteousness was the purpose for the completion of the law. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of becoming righteous” (2) righteousness was the result of the completion of the law. Alternate translation: “resulting in righteousness” | |
1797 | 10:4 | f6pu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated righteousness in the previous verse. | |
1798 | 10:4 | z3z9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | παντὶ τῷ πιστεύοντι | 1 | See how you translated everyone who believes in 1:16. | |
1799 | 10:5 | vsyn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1800 | 10:5 | ozvf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Μωϋσῆς & γράφει τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Leviticus 18:5). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses writes in the Scriptures about the righteousness that is from the law” | |
1801 | 10:5 | m8my | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | γράφει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb writes to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “wrote” | |
1802 | 10:5 | qby2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δικαιοσύνην τὴν ἐκ νόμου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of righteousness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about being righteous based on the law” | |
1803 | 10:5 | dufv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12 and in the previous verse. | |
1804 | 10:5 | jyjx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ἄνθρωπος, ζήσεται ἐν αὐτῇ | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Leviticus 18:5. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1805 | 10:5 | bh04 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπος | 1 | Although the term man is masculine, Paul quotes Moses using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “man or woman” | |
1806 | 10:5 | kt66 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὐτὰ | 1 | Here, these things refers to everything that God commanded the Jews in the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things written in the law” | |
1807 | 10:5 | e3po | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὐτὰ | 1 | Paul quotes Moses implying that the person must do all of these things perfectly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all these things perfectly” or “every single one of these things” | |
1808 | 10:5 | qkz4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζήσεται | 1 | Here, will live could refer to: (1) eternal life. Alternate translation: “will live forever” (2) a mortal life that God blesses. Alternate translation: “will stay alive” | |
1809 | 10:5 | gsls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῇ | 1 | Here, it refers to the law of Moses, which was called these things earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the law” | |
1810 | 10:6 | r3ey | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη οὕτως λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 9:4; 30:12–14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the righteousness by faith says thus in the Scriptures” | |
1811 | 10:6 | sr9z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ & ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη & λέγει | 1 | Here, righteousness is described as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the real meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the righteousness by faith, Moses says” | |
1812 | 10:6 | cgv8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ πίστεως δικαιοσύνη | 1 | See how you translated righteousness in 6:13 and by faith in 4:16. | |
1813 | 10:6 | ksbr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
1814 | 10:6 | ezma | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | μὴ εἴπῃς ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Deuteronomy 9:4 and Deuteronomy 30:12. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1815 | 10:6 | x7h4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σου | 1 | Here Paul quotes Moses addressing the people of Israel as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronoun your is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of your in your translation. | |
1816 | 10:6 | nwlw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῇ καρδίᾳ | 1 | See how you translated heart in 10:1. | |
1817 | 10:6 | tf9r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ἀναβήσεται εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? | 1 | Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can ascend into heaven!” | |
1818 | 10:6 | gi7s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν | 1 | In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “meaning, to make Christ come down to earth” | |
1819 | 10:6 | y5c3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | Χριστὸν καταγαγεῖν | 1 | Here, to indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of bringing Christ down” | |
1820 | 10:7 | g827 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἤ | 1 | Paul uses or here to connect a quotation from Deuteronomy 30:12 with a paraphrase of Deuteronomy 30:13. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that shows this explicitly. Alternate translation: “or do not to say” | |
1821 | 10:7 | j2t4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον | 1 | In this sentence Paul paraphrases Deuteronomy 30:13. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1822 | 10:7 | w8xe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς καταβήσεται εἰς τὴν Ἄβυσσον? | 1 | Paul quotes Moses using a question to teach his audience. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely no one can descend into the abyss!” | |
1823 | 10:7 | gw0r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῦτ’ ἔστιν Χριστὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν | 1 | In this clause Paul explains the meaning of the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “That means to make Christ come up from dead ones” | |
1824 | 10:7 | iw13 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναγαγεῖν | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. | |
1825 | 10:8 | ian2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τί λέγει? | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 30:14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does it say in the Scriptures” | |
1826 | 10:8 | sen1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί λέγει? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “it surely says,” | |
1827 | 10:8 | gz7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τί λέγει? | 1 | The word it refers to “the righteousness” referred to in 10:6. Here Paul continues to describe righteousness as if it were a person who could speak. See how you translated “the righteousness by faith says” in 10:6. | |
1828 | 10:8 | n63g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb say to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did it say” | |
1829 | 10:8 | hybn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Deuteronomy 30:14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1830 | 10:8 | kzb2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγγύς σου τὸ ῥῆμά ἐστιν, ἐν τῷ στόματί σου, καὶ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου | 1 | Paul quotes Moses speaking of the word as if it were an object that could be near or in someone. He means that God’s message could be easily known and spoken by Moses’ audience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You can easily know and speak the word” | |
1831 | 10:8 | sx8r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὸ ῥῆμά | 1 | Paul quotes Moses using word to describe what God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message” | |
1832 | 10:8 | wpvg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σου & σου & σου | 1 | ||
1833 | 10:8 | y6mq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῷ στόματί σου | 1 | ||
1834 | 10:8 | zvx4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου | 1 | See how you translated heart in 10:1. | |
1835 | 10:8 | lh5d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ ῥῆμα τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a word that is about faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about faith” | |
1836 | 10:8 | v7ho | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about believing” | |
1837 | 10:8 | o4oy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | κηρύσσομεν | 1 | Here, we refers to Paul and other Christians who proclaim the gospel, so we would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
1838 | 10:9 | q5un | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὅτι | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it indicates that what follows is an explanation of what “the word of faith” is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This word we proclaim is that” | |
1839 | 10:9 | pawz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | ὁμολογήσῃς & σου & σου & σωθήσῃ | 1 | Paul addresses his readers as if he were speaking to only one person. The pronouns you and your are singular. See how you translated you and your in the previous verse. | |
1840 | 10:9 | tz7r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ στόματί σου | 1 | This phrase indicates the means by which a person confesses Jesus is Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by using your mouth you confess, ‘Jesus is Lord’” | |
1841 | 10:9 | ie71 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου | 1 | ||
1842 | 10:9 | zdf5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | αὐτὸν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. | |
1843 | 10:9 | c3cq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σωθήσῃ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” | |
1844 | 10:10 | iv0v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1845 | 10:10 | g7i1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | καρδίᾳ & πιστεύεται | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. | |
1846 | 10:10 | g3nf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πιστεύεται & ὁμολογεῖται | 1 | The subjects of these phrases are implied from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “one believes that God raised Jesus from the dead … one confesses that Jesus is Lord” | |
1847 | 10:10 | o3a7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰς δικαιοσύνην & εἰς σωτηρίαν | 1 | Both occurrences of to in this verse indicate that what follows them are results. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding both phrases): “resulting in righteousness … resulting in salvation” | |
1848 | 10:10 | h20k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνην | 1 | See how you translated this abstract noun in 10:6. | |
1849 | 10:10 | xs8c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | στόματι & ὁμολογεῖται | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. | |
1850 | 10:10 | uroy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | σωτηρίαν | 1 | See how you translated this abstract noun in 10:1. | |
1851 | 10:11 | rlqi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1852 | 10:11 | r6tf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | λέγει & ἡ Γραφή | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 28:16). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures” | |
1853 | 10:11 | gu99 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | λέγει & ἡ Γραφή | 1 | Here Paul uses the scripture as if it were a person who could speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God says in the scripture” | |
1854 | 10:11 | whdz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
1855 | 10:11 | nv71 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ οὐ καταισχυνθήσεται | 1 | See how you translated this sentence in 9:33. | |
1856 | 10:12 | ygv8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, it introduces another explanation for what Paul said in 10:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1857 | 10:12 | fvlg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οὐ & ἐστιν διαστολὴ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of distinction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God does not distinguish” | |
1858 | 10:12 | z8p4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1859 | 10:12 | j7vw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | Κύριος πάντων | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the Lord who rules over all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Lord is ruling over all” | |
1860 | 10:12 | r2jx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πάντων & πάντας | 1 | Paul is using the adjective all as a noun in order to describe a group of people. If your language does not use adjectives in the same way, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “is of all people … all people” | |
1861 | 10:12 | p9py | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πλουτῶν | 1 | Here, being rich means to bless others generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “generously giving blessing” | |
1862 | 10:12 | oe6l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπικαλουμένους αὐτόν | 1 | Here, call on implies calling out to be saved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who call upon him to be saved” | |
1863 | 10:13 | cxph | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1864 | 10:13 | t4j7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | γὰρ | 1 | For here introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book (Joel 2:32). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For Joel wrote in the Scriptures,” | |
1865 | 10:13 | gpyj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Joel 2:32. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1866 | 10:13 | qvbd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj | πᾶς | 1 | See how you translated all in the previous verse. | |
1867 | 10:13 | n4yp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου | 1 | See how you translated “call on” in the previous verse. | |
1868 | 10:13 | pe96 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου | 1 | Here, the name of the Lord represents the Lord himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Lord” | |
1869 | 10:13 | rht3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται | 1 | Here Paul implies that the Lord refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. However, since this sentence is a quotation from the Old Testament, you will need to state this outside of the quotation. Alternate translation: “all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord will be saved. This Lord is Jesus.” | |
1870 | 10:13 | js1b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πᾶς & ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου, σωθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all, whoever calls on the name of the Lord” | |
1871 | 10:14 | utr4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πῶς οὖν ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν? πῶς δὲ πιστεύσωσιν οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? πῶς δὲ ἀκούσωσιν χωρὶς κηρύσσοντος? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using three rhetorical questions here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Then surely they would not call on whom they have not believed! And surely they would not believe in whom they have not heard! And surely they would not hear without someone preaching!” | |
1872 | 10:14 | syzi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | πῶς οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows in 10:14–15 is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, how” | |
1873 | 10:14 | zqzi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐπικαλέσωνται & οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & πιστεύσωσιν & οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν | 1 | In this verse they refers to all people, both Jews and Gentiles, as stated in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would all people call … they have not believed … would all people believe in … they have not heard … would all people hear” | |
1874 | 10:14 | vww6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπικαλέσωνται εἰς ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν | 1 | See how you translated call on in 10:12. | |
1875 | 10:14 | n02w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὃν οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν & οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν | 1 | These clauses refer to Jesus, whom Paul called the Lord in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom they have not believed … Jesus, whom they have not heard” | |
1876 | 10:14 | mrl8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν & ἀκούσωσιν & κηρύσσοντος | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “whom they have not heard about … would they hear about him … someone preaching about him” | |
1877 | 10:15 | hcz3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πῶς δὲ κηρύξωσιν ἐὰν μὴ ἀποσταλῶσιν | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely they would not preach unless they would be sent!” | |
1878 | 10:15 | nqwf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | κηρύξωσιν & ἀποσταλῶσιν | 1 | In this verse they refers to the people who preach, as mentioned at the end of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “would those who preach be able to preach … those preachers would be sent” | |
1879 | 10:15 | l0xu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀποσταλῶσιν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone sent them” | |
1880 | 10:15 | atg0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
1881 | 10:15 | ylan | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Isaiah wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah wrote” | |
1882 | 10:15 | bb0k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες τῶν εὐαγγελιζομένων τὰ ἀγαθά! | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Isaiah 52:7. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1883 | 10:15 | e8rt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὡς ὡραῖοι οἱ πόδες | 1 | Here, feet refers to the action of going to other people and telling them the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How beautiful is the going and preaching” | |
1884 | 10:16 | gxqu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” | |
1885 | 10:16 | hku8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ πάντες | 1 | Here, them could refer to (1) the Jews, who are the main topic of chapters 9–11. Alternate translation: “not all of the Jews” (2) all people, as in 10:13–15. Alternate translation: “not everyone” | |
1886 | 10:16 | dqe6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ὑπήκουσαν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the gospel as if it were a person who could be obeyed. Paul is referring to obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obeyed what God commanded in the gospel” or “believed the gospel” | |
1887 | 10:16 | eze8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that this sentence explains what Paul said in the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
1888 | 10:16 | o91x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Ἠσαΐας & λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce quotations from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 53:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah says in the Scriptures” | |
1889 | 10:16 | e25r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
1890 | 10:16 | jvah | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? | 1 | This verse is a quotation from Isaiah 53:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1891 | 10:16 | j3se | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? | 1 | Isaiah is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, surely no one has believed our report!” | |
1892 | 10:16 | z4s9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, our refers to God and Isaiah, which would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
1893 | 10:16 | yore | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of report, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what we report” | |
1894 | 10:17 | hqcv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα | 1 | Here, So indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes the ideas of 10:14–16. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “In summary” | |
1895 | 10:17 | qdug | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ πίστις | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what someone believes” | |
1896 | 10:17 | wu5a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ πίστις | 1 | Here, this faith refers to believing in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “believing in Christ” | |
1897 | 10:17 | xab6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐξ ἀκοῆς | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is received by hearing” | |
1898 | 10:17 | x765 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀκοῆς & ἀκοὴ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that these sentences would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “hearing about Jesus … hearing about him is” | |
1899 | 10:17 | nq87 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ῥήματος Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the word that is about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the word about Christ” | |
1900 | 10:17 | aunq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ῥήματος | 1 | See how you translated this word in 10:8. | |
1901 | 10:18 | a8bk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “By contrast” | |
1902 | 10:18 | teco | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγω | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” | |
1903 | 10:18 | vkvg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν | 1 | Here Paul is quoting himself. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1904 | 10:18 | f6jy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They most surely heard!” | |
1905 | 10:18 | djbd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἤκουσαν | 1 | See how you translated they in the previous verse. | |
1906 | 10:18 | wxxj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | μὴ οὐκ | 1 | The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. | |
1907 | 10:18 | zux3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν | 1 | See how you translated hear in 10:14. | |
1908 | 10:18 | lz77 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 19:4). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures,” | |
1909 | 10:18 | tnzy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | In this sentence Paul quotes Psalm 19:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1910 | 10:18 | s5zh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes David saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “What they said went everywhere in the whole world” | |
1911 | 10:18 | g4vd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ φθόγγος αὐτῶν; καὶ εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης, τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | In this sentence, both Their and their refer to the sun, moon, and stars as if they were people who could make a sound or speak words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The sun, moon, and the stars are proof that went out into all the earth, and they are proof to the ends of the world.” | |
1912 | 10:18 | e2nx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τὰ πέρατα τῆς οἰκουμένης | 1 | The phrase the ends of the world is an idiom that refers to every place on the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on the earth” | |
1913 | 10:19 | n3q8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in 10:17, in the same way that the statement in the previous verse contrasted 10:17. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression that shows the agreement between this verse and the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Furthermore,” | |
1914 | 10:19 | uu9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγω | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” | |
1915 | 10:19 | imik | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω & ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is quoting himself and then the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1916 | 10:19 | ib4m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ Ἰσραὴλ οὐκ ἔγνω? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Israel most surely knew!” | |
1917 | 10:19 | zyw0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | Here Paul uses the word Israel to refer to the physical descendants of Jacob, whom God also called Israel. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” | |
1918 | 10:19 | dkcp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | μὴ & οὐκ | 1 | The phrase certainly not translates two negative words in Greek. Paul uses them together to emphasize what he is saying. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them canceling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. | |
1919 | 10:19 | k4gk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Μωϋσῆς λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 32:21). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Moses says in the Scriptures” | |
1920 | 10:19 | jjt3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Μωϋσῆς λέγει | 1 | This phrase means that Moses wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote down that God said” | |
1921 | 10:19 | yt4r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
1922 | 10:19 | qvfa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει, ἐπ’ ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ, παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I myself will make you jealous and angry by using a non-nation” | |
1923 | 10:19 | u7p4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς, & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | In this sentence the pronoun I here refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, myself will provoke you to jealousy … I will provoke you to anger” | |
1924 | 10:19 | fklp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς | 1 | God uses the word myself to emphasize who is provoking Israel to be jealous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am indeed the one who will provoke you to jealousy” | |
1925 | 10:19 | vxzz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | In this verse you refers to the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I myself will provoke you Israelites to jealousy … I will provoke you Israelites to anger.” | |
1926 | 10:19 | o0gr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐγὼ παραζηλώσω ὑμᾶς & παροργιῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of jealousy and anger, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I myself will cause you to become jealous … I will cause you to become angry” | |
1927 | 10:19 | ve6t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐπ’ οὐκ ἔθνει | 1 | The phrase a non-nation refers to a group of people with whom God did not previously have a relationship. The meaning of non-nation is similar to “not my people” used in 9:25–26. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by those people who did not belong to me” or “by those people whom I did not consider to be a nation” | |
1928 | 10:19 | s3nz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἔθνει ἀσυνέτῳ | 1 | Here, senseless means that these people do not know God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by a nation with people who do not know me” | |
1929 | 10:20 | mrwz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Ἠσαΐας δὲ ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he says in the Scriptures” | |
1930 | 10:20 | kig6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verbs is and says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “was very bold, and he said” | |
1931 | 10:20 | cv1x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | Ἠσαΐας & ἀποτολμᾷ καὶ λέγει | 1 | This phrase means that Isaiah wrote down what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Isaiah is very bold, and he wrote down that God said” | |
1932 | 10:20 | pp4f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is quoting Isaiah 65:1 from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1933 | 10:20 | yoxf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | εὑρέθην & ἐμὲ & ἐμφανὴς & ἐμὲ | 1 | In this verse the pronoun I refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, was found … me; I, God, appeared … for me” | |
1934 | 10:20 | wona | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν | 1 | These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul quotes God saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I was revealed to those people who did not even want to know me” | |
1935 | 10:20 | fc4b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | εὑρέθην & ἐμφανὴς | 1 | Paul quotes God using the past tense in order to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will be found … I will appear” | |
1936 | 10:20 | u60f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | εὑρέθην ἐν τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those who were not seeking me found me” | |
1937 | 10:20 | t78j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ζητοῦσιν; ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην τοῖς ἐμὲ μὴ ἐπερωτῶσιν | 1 | These two clauses refer to non-Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the non-Jews, who were not seeking me; I appeared to the non-Jews, who were not asking for me” | |
1938 | 10:21 | pziq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | The word But introduces a contrast. Here, But indicates that what follows is in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that makes this contrast clearer. Alternate translation: “By contrast,” | |
1939 | 10:21 | afo5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | πρὸς & τὸν Ἰσραὴλ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this phrase to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:2). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “to Israel God says in the Scriptures” | |
1940 | 10:21 | ksjg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | See how you translated Israel in 10:19. | |
1941 | 10:21 | tp8d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” | |
1942 | 10:21 | gtwp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν, ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα | 1 | In these two sentences Paul is quoting Isaiah 65:2 from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1943 | 10:21 | hw4w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν | 1 | The whole day here refers to doing something constantly or continually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Continually” | |
1944 | 10:21 | il8s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction | ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα | 1 | The action of stretching out hands toward someone represents welcoming or inviting someone to be a friend. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I welcomed a disobedient and contrary people to be my friends” | |
1945 | 10:21 | g03t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα | 1 | This phrase refers to Israel, to whom God was speaking in this quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you disobedient and contradictory people” | |
1946 | 11:intro | e9qz | 0 | Romans 11 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 11:9–10, 26–27, and 34–35, which are words from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this ChapterGraftingIn 11:17–24 Paul uses the image of “grafting” to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Permanently attaching a branch from one plant onto another plant is called “grafting.” Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles into his people as a wild branch is grafted into a cultivated olive tree. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as a natural part of the tree. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus and they will rejoin God’s people. | |||
1947 | 11:1 | wp35 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγω | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” | |
1948 | 11:1 | yiki | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | λέγω οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 9:30–10:21. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, I say” | |
1949 | 11:1 | p4zd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely God did not reject his people!” | |
1950 | 11:1 | b8tg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, his people refers to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his people, the Jews” | |
1951 | 11:1 | wqu2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο | 1 | ||
1952 | 11:1 | mls4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces the reason why what Paul said earlier in the verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
1953 | 11:1 | ra9c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | καὶ & ἐγὼ & εἰμί | 1 | Paul uses the word myself to emphasize that he is proof that God has not rejected the Israelites. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I, indeed, also am” | |
1954 | 11:1 | ewxc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σπέρματος | 1 | Here, seed is singular but refers to a group of people. See how you translated seed in 4:13. | |
1955 | 11:2 | wzs6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν λαὸν αὐτο | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
1956 | 11:2 | h4qe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | ὃν προέγνω | 1 | This phrase gives further information about God’s people. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the people whom he foreknew” | |
1957 | 11:2 | k2al | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | προέγνω | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 8:29. | |
1958 | 11:2 | cjp6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel!” | |
1959 | 11:2 | q3lx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν Ἠλείᾳ τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή, ὡς ἐντυγχάνει τῷ Θεῷ κατὰ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ? | 1 | This sentence indicates that what follows in the next verse is a quotation from an Old Testament book (1 Kings 19:10, 14). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or do you not know what the scripture says about Elijah, how he pleads with God against Israel? He says in the scriptures,” | |
1960 | 11:2 | dd1e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | τί λέγει ἡ Γραφή | 1 | See how you translated the scripture says in 10:11. | |
1961 | 11:2 | z5lk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει & ἐντυγχάνει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verbs says and pleads to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … he pleaded” | |
1962 | 11:2 | ki3n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰσραήλ | 1 | See how you translated Israel in 10:19. | |
1963 | 11:3 | rnut | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τοὺς προφήτας σου ἀπέκτειναν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from 1 Kings 19:10, 14. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1964 | 11:3 | fh9i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἀπέκτειναν & κατέσκαψαν & ζητοῦσιν | 1 | In this verse they refers to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel killed … they tore down … those people of Israel seek” | |
1965 | 11:3 | fd5k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος & μου | 1 | In this verse I and my refer to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and only I, Elijah, was left behind … my life” | |
1966 | 11:3 | ut1s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I alone am remaining” | |
1967 | 11:3 | dhg7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κἀγὼ ὑπελείφθην μόνος | 1 | Here, left behind means that Elijah thought he remained alive and all the other prophets had been killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I alone remained alive” | |
1968 | 11:3 | dv5u | ζητοῦσιν τὴν ψυχήν μου | 1 | The phrase seek my life refers to people trying to kill Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they want to kill me” | ||
1969 | 11:4 | rj4e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | ἀλλὰ τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to get his audience to pay attention to what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But pay attention to what the divine response says to him!” | |
1970 | 11:4 | ougb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τί λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ χρηματισμός | 1 | Here Paul uses this question to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 65:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “what does the divine response say to him in the Scriptures” | |
1971 | 11:4 | w8cl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τί λέγει & ὁ χρηματισμός? | 1 | Paul speaks of the divine response as if it were a person who would say something. Paul is referring to God responding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what does God say in response” | |
1972 | 11:4 | rvmy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verbs says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “did … say” | |
1973 | 11:4 | x6e9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῷ | 1 | Here, him refers to Elijah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
1974 | 11:4 | w03b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction | οὐκ ἔκαμψαν γόνυ τῇ Βάαλ | 1 | This action was an expression of worship in this culture. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “have not worshiped Baal” | |
1975 | 11:5 | ce2r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὕτως οὖν | 1 | The word then indicates that what follows is a result. Here, then introduces the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated about Elijah in the previous two verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result, in the same way” | |
1976 | 11:5 | l6yu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | λῖμμα & ἐκλογὴν χάριτος | 1 | See how you translated remnant in 9:27, election in 9:11, and grace in 4:16. | |
1977 | 11:5 | whv0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἐκλογὴν χάριτος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe election that is characterized by grace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gracious election” | |
1978 | 11:6 | qkgx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” | |
1979 | 11:6 | q6es | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | χάριτι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “election is by grace” | |
1980 | 11:6 | b4tx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χάριτι & ἔργων & χάρις & χάρις | 1 | ||
1981 | 11:6 | rm7g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐκέτι | 1 | Here, it refers to “the election of grace” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the election of grace is no longer” | |
1982 | 11:6 | a9l4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐκέτι | 1 | Here, no longer indicates the logical conclusion of the preceding clause. It does not imply that election used to be by works. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is logically not” | |
1983 | 11:7 | cksi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τί οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in 9:30–11:6. If it might help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “If these things are true, then what” | |
1984 | 11:7 | c69z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τί οὖν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “What should we conclude” | |
1985 | 11:7 | k94b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί οὖν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This is what we should conclude:” | |
1986 | 11:7 | crpn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὃ & τοῦτο | 1 | The thing and this here refer to righteousness, as indicated in 9:30–31. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The righteousness … this righteousness” | |
1987 | 11:7 | ctkj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰσραήλ | 1 | See how you translated this name in 10:19. | |
1988 | 11:7 | xbkh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐκ ἐπέτυχεν & οἱ & λοιποὶ | 1 | Here, it and them refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel did not obtain … the rest of the people of Israel” | |
1989 | 11:7 | rzet | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ & ἐκλογὴ & οἱ & λοιποὶ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of elect and rest, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who have been elected … the ones of them who remain” | |
1990 | 11:7 | jib7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐπωρώθησαν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The next verse indicates that God is the one who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hardened” | |
1991 | 11:7 | bp19 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπωρώθησαν | 1 | Here, hardened refers to being made stubborn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were made stubborn” | |
1992 | 11:8 | cv7s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
1993 | 11:8 | u829 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the quotation is a paraphrase of Isaiah 29:10 and Deuteronomy 29:4. Alternate translation: “just as God stated” | |
1994 | 11:8 | o53g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα κατανύξεως, ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, ἕως τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας | 1 | In these clauses Paul paraphrases Isaiah 29:10 and Deuteronomy 29:4. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
1995 | 11:8 | kaqc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πνεῦμα κατανύξεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe a spirit that is characterized by dullness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a dull spirit” | |
1996 | 11:8 | z47a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πνεῦμα κατανύξεως | 1 | Here, spirit refers to a person’s attitude or manner of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an attitude of dullness” | |
1997 | 11:8 | zyk1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν | 1 | Paul quotes Moses using eyes not to see and ears not to hear to refer to being unable to understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “being unable to perceive and unable to comprehend” | |
1998 | 11:8 | ny8w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν, καὶ ὦτα τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the people of Israel were completely unable to understand how to become righteous. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely unable to comprehend” | |
1999 | 11:9 | kr0g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | Δαυεὶδ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses this clause to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book (Psalm 69:22–23). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “David says in the Scriptures” | |
2000 | 11:9 | zobm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | Δαυεὶδ λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” | |
2001 | 11:9 | b507 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν | 1 | This phrase begins a quotation of Psalm 69:22–23 that continues into the next verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. | |
2002 | 11:9 | x0wl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God, cause their table to become a net and a trap” | |
2003 | 11:9 | kpg8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | γενηθήτω ἡ τράπεζα αὐτῶν εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν | 1 | This clause is an idiom. The word table represents feasting, which is a situation in which a person feels safe, and net and trap represent punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let them be punished while they are feeling safe” or “Punish them while they are comfortable” | |
2004 | 11:9 | l6re | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | εἰς παγίδα, καὶ εἰς θήραν | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize David’s plea for judgment. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “for thorough punishment” | |
2005 | 11:9 | lbs2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰς σκάνδαλον | 1 | Here, stumbling block refers to something that tempts people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for tempting them to sin” | |
2006 | 11:9 | xex5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀνταπόδομα αὐτοῖς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of retribution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “paying them back” | |
2007 | 11:10 | c1nj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν, τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν | 1 | This clause refers to being unable to understand something. See how you translated “eyes not to see” in 11:8. Alternate translation: “Let them be unable to understand” | |
2008 | 11:10 | j9ag | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σκοτισθήτωσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Blind their eyes” | |
2009 | 11:10 | biqg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸν νῶτον αὐτῶν διὰ παντὸς σύνκαμψον | 1 | This clause refers to making people suffer like how slaves suffer by carrying heavy burdens on their backs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “make them suffer continually” | |
2010 | 11:10 | p4s5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | παντὸς | 1 | The end of this verse is the end of a quotation from Psalm 69:22–23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. | |
2011 | 11:11 | z8tw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | λέγω οὖν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 11:1. | |
2012 | 11:11 | dysl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | μὴ ἔπταισαν & πέσωσιν & αὐτῶν & αὐτούς | 1 | In this verse the pronouns they, their, and them refer to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jewish people did not stumble … they might fall, did they … the Jewish people’s … the Jews” | |
2013 | 11:11 | r9hg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | μὴ ἔπταισαν ἵνα πέσωσιν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely they did not stumble so that they might fall!” | |
2014 | 11:11 | y9x7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ἔπταισαν | 1 | See how you translated “stumbled” in 9:32. | |
2015 | 11:11 | ai6y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πέσωσιν | 1 | Here, fall refers to being completely rejected by God forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might be eternally rejected” | |
2016 | 11:11 | qbx4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | μὴ γένοιτο! | 1 | ||
2017 | 11:11 | a4kf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ αὐτῶν παραπτώματι, ἡ σωτηρία & τὸ παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς | 1 | See how you translated transgression in 4:15, salvation in 1:16, and jealousy in 10:19. | |
2018 | 11:11 | f1jw | παραζηλῶσαι αὐτούς | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 10:19. | ||
2019 | 11:12 | ew4i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | εἰ & τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος κόσμου, καὶ τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν, πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν | 1 | Both of these clauses mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “if their transgression certainly resulted in wealth for the nations” | |
2020 | 11:12 | v024 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” | |
2021 | 11:12 | zibw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ παράπτωμα αὐτῶν | 1 | See how you translated transgression in the previous verse. | |
2022 | 11:12 | rnsk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πλοῦτος κόσμου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe wealth that is for the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “is wealth for the world” | |
2023 | 11:12 | it9k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | κόσμου | 1 | Here, world refers to the people living in the world, especially the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people living in the world” | |
2024 | 11:12 | hqch | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of loss and fullness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what they lost … how full they are” | |
2025 | 11:12 | fxoo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ ἥττημα αὐτῶν & τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, loss refers to Israel’s failure to make themselves righteous, and fullness refers to the complete number of Israelites who will become righteous by trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their failure … their full number of believers” | |
2026 | 11:12 | dh1g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | πλοῦτος ἐθνῶν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe wealth that is for the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “is wealth for the Gentiles” | |
2027 | 11:12 | hsbv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will be their fullness!” | |
2028 | 11:12 | b9fi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῶν? | 1 | Paul implies that there will be much more wealth when the full amount of Israelites believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in how much more wealth will their fullness result” | |
2029 | 11:13 | r0jt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, you is plural and refers to Paul’s non-Jewish Christian readers. | |
2030 | 11:13 | z6p4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | εἰμι ἐγὼ | 1 | Paul uses the word myself to emphasize that he was apostle to the Gentiles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed am the one who is” | |
2031 | 11:13 | ngfl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν διακονίαν μου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of ministry, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how I minister” | |
2032 | 11:14 | ua2k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | παραζηλώσω | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 10:19. | |
2033 | 11:14 | h1qe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μου τὴν σάρκα & αὐτῶν | 1 | These phrases refer to Paul’s Jewish kinsmen who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jews, who are of my own flesh … my fellow Jews” | |
2034 | 11:14 | oxqg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μου τὴν σάρκα | 1 | See how you translated flesh in 1:3. | |
2035 | 11:15 | q99e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2036 | 11:15 | es22 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | See how you translated if in 11:12. | |
2037 | 11:15 | ui3i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις | 1 | In this verse their refers to Jews who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews’ … the Jewish people’s acceptance” | |
2038 | 11:15 | sy8u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀποβολὴ αὐτῶν & ἡ πρόσλημψις & ζωὴ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of rejection, acceptance, and life, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “them rejecting … them being accepted … to become alive” | |
2039 | 11:15 | teab | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | καταλλαγὴ κόσμου | 1 | Here, is indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of their rejection. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “led to reconciliation of the world” | |
2040 | 11:15 | sdhl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | καταλλαγὴ | 1 | See how you translated reconciliation in 5:11. | |
2041 | 11:15 | m3fs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | κόσμου | 1 | See how you translated world in 11:12. | |
2042 | 11:15 | em8m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις εἰ μὴ ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize how wonderful it will be when God accepts the Jews. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “their acceptance is certainly life from dead ones!” | |
2043 | 11:15 | ic9z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τίς ἡ πρόσλημψις | 1 | Here, is indicates that the phrase that follows is the result of their acceptance. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “what would their acceptance lead to if not life from the dead” | |
2044 | 11:15 | po4h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | This phrase could refer to: (1) the final resurrection of all Christians that will take place after the whole Jewish remnant has believed in Jesus. Elsewhere in this letter, Paul uses a similar phrase to refer to Jesus’ resurrection. Alternate translation: “bringing the dead back to life” (2) the Jewish remnant changing from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive. Alternate translation: “eternally alive from being eternally dead” | |
2045 | 11:15 | jn4l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἐκ νεκρῶν | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 4:24. | |
2046 | 11:16 | ao3u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ & εἰ | 1 | See how you translated if in 11:12. | |
2047 | 11:16 | bi5b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ τὸ φύραμα & καὶ οἱ κλάδοι | 1 | In these clauses Paul implies that the lump of dough and the branches are also holy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the lump of dough is also holy … the branches are also holy” | |
2048 | 11:16 | b2s5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰ & ἡ ἀπαρχὴ ἁγία, καὶ τὸ φύραμα; | 1 | Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the firstfruits to be harvested. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men, as if they were a lump of dough that was made from the firstfruits that had been harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the first of what has been offered to God, all of his descendants should also be considered an offering” | |
2049 | 11:16 | dci1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰ ἡ ῥίζα ἁγία, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι | 1 | Paul is speaking of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the Israelites’ ancestors, as if they were the root of a tree. He is also speaking of the Israelites who descended from those men as if they were the branches of that same tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “if Abraham is like the root of a tree, all of his descendants should also be considered branches of that tree” | |
2050 | 11:17 | qkc0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | εἰ | 1 | Here, if indicates that this verse and the next verse are one conditional sentence. You may need to adjust the words to divide these verses into separate sentences. | |
2051 | 11:17 | imrh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” | |
2052 | 11:17 | slf6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | εἰ & τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν, σὺ δὲ ἀγριέλαιος ὢν ἐνεκεντρίσθης ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ συνκοινωνὸς τῆς ῥίζης τῆς πιότητος τῆς ἐλαίας ἐγένου | 1 | Paul continues using the metaphor of a tree to speak about how God rejected unbelieving Jews and accepted non-Jews to be part of his people instead. The olive tree represents God’s people. The branches that were broken off represent Jews who don’t believe in Jesus. The wild olive branch represents non-Jewish people who believe in Jesus. The richness represents the blessings God gives his people. The root represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (as in the previous verse) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “if some of the Jews were rejected, like branches are broken off of a tree, and you, being foreigners were joined to God’s people as wild olive branches are grafted onto a tree, and you received the blessings of the first Israelites as part of God’s people, as branches receive the nutrients of the root of the olive tree” | |
2053 | 11:17 | b8ic | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τινες τῶν κλάδων ἐξεκλάσθησαν & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & συνκοινωνὸς & ἐγένου | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The context of chapters 9–11 indicates that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God broke off some of the branches … God grafted … God made to be partakers with them” | |
2054 | 11:17 | qv65 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ | 1 | Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, non-Jewish Christians, you is singular throughout this verse. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of you in your translation. | |
2055 | 11:17 | z6hr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτοῖς & συνκοινωνὸς | 1 | In this verse them refers to the Jewish people who believe in Jesus. It does not refer to the branches that were broken off. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believing Jewish people … partakers with those Jews who believe” | |
2056 | 11:18 | d81u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων | 1 | This is the end of a factual conditional sentence that began in the previous verse. You may need to adjust the words if you make this clause into a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Since this is true, do not boast over the branches” | |
2057 | 11:18 | gqd6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | μὴ κατακαυχῶ τῶν κλάδων. εἰ δὲ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ | 1 | Paul continues using the metaphor of a tree from the previous two verses. Here, branches represents those Jews whom God rejected because they did not believe in Jesus. The root represents either the ancestors of the Israelites (like in 11:16) or the Jewish people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. See also the discussion of this metaphor in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do not boast over the unbelieving Jews whom God rejected, like branches were broken off of a tree. But if you boast, you yourself do not sustain Gods people, like branches cannot sustain the root, but the first Israelites sustain you, like the root sustains the branches” | |
2058 | 11:18 | kd87 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | κατακαυχᾶσαι & σὺ & βαστάζεις & σέ | 1 | See how you translated you in the previous verse. | |
2059 | 11:18 | llz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐ σὺ τὴν ῥίζαν βαστάζεις, ἀλλὰ ἡ ῥίζα σέ | 1 | Paul implies that Gentile believers who boast should remember that they are supported by the root of the faith of Abraham and the first Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “remember that you yourself do not support the root, but the root supports you” | |
2060 | 11:19 | w28y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | ἐρεῖς | 1 | See how you translated you in the previous two verses. | |
2061 | 11:19 | uqji | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows is a response to what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “in response to this” | |
2062 | 11:19 | d21e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι, ἵνα ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ | 1 | In this sentence Paul is speaking as if he were a non-Jewish Christian arguing against Paul. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2063 | 11:19 | mm6w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ | 1 | See how you translated branches, broken off, and grafted in in 11:17. | |
2064 | 11:19 | qk8c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐξεκλάσθησαν κλάδοι & ἐγὼ ἐνκεντρισθῶ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated similar phrases in 11:17. Alternate translation: “God broke branches off … God might graft me in” | |
2065 | 11:19 | p9ti | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” | |
2066 | 11:20 | r80y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καλῶς | 1 | This sentence introduces Paul’s response to the statement in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would respond by saying that what you said is true” | |
2067 | 11:20 | puj9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ ἐξεκλάσθησαν | 1 | They and their in this verse refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The unbelieving Jews were broken off in unbelief” | |
2068 | 11:20 | lce6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | ἐξεκλάσθησαν | 1 | See how you translated were broken off in 11:17. | |
2069 | 11:20 | cvr0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving Jews were broken off. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to unbelief” | |
2070 | 11:20 | pw92 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ & ἕστηκας & | 1 | See how you translated you in the previous three verses. | |
2071 | 11:20 | v2ua | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σὺ & ἕστηκας | 1 | Paul speaks of Gentile believers remaining part of God’s people as if they were standing firm. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourself remain among God’s people” | |
2072 | 11:20 | xtnu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ πίστει | 1 | The phrase in faith could indicate: (1) the means by which Gentile believers should stand firm. Alternate translation: “by means of faith” (2) the reason why Gentile believers should stand firm. Alternate translation: “because of faith” | |
2073 | 11:20 | qlmq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ πίστει | 1 | See how you translated faith in 1:5. | |
2074 | 11:20 | rx22 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑψηλὰ | 1 | Here, arrogant things refers to the arrogant thoughts that a Gentile Christian might have against the Jews. Specifically, they might think that they are better than Jews who are not Christian, as indicated by the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “arrogantly against unbelieving Jews” | |
2075 | 11:20 | k4l5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | φοβοῦ | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the next verse, as in the UST. | |
2076 | 11:21 | nsq3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces the reason why Paul wants his Gentile Christian readers to “fear,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You must fear because” | |
2077 | 11:21 | xy3h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | See how you translated if in 11:12. | |
2078 | 11:21 | f6i7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν κατὰ φύσιν κλάδων | 1 | Here,natural branches refers to the Jewish people who rejected Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “of the unbelieving Jews” | |
2079 | 11:21 | ywgs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐδὲ σοῦ φείσεται | 1 | Paul implies that God will not spare anyone who stops trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “neither will he spare you if you do not keep trusting in Jesus” | |
2080 | 11:21 | m59a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σοῦ | 1 | See how you translated you in 11:17–20. | |
2081 | 11:22 | bfsu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἴδε | 1 | Paul uses the term See to focus his audiences’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. | |
2082 | 11:22 | i0r3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Here, then indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the 11:17–21. Use a natural way in your language for expressing result. Alternate translation: “as a result” | |
2083 | 11:22 | xdm3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | χρηστότητα & ἀποτομίαν Θεοῦ & ἀποτομία & χρηστότης Θεοῦ & τῇ χρηστότητι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of kindness and severity, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the kind character … the severe character of God … his severe character … the kind character of God … his kind character” | |
2084 | 11:22 | i3ok | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πεσόντας, ἀποτομία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God’s severity as if it were an object that could be on someone. He means that God punishes them severely. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he severely punishes those who fell” | |
2085 | 11:22 | scf8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τοὺς πεσόντας | 1 | Paul refers to the Jews who failed to trust God as if they were people who fell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those Jews who failed to trust in God” | |
2086 | 11:22 | fy84 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπὶ δὲ σὲ, χρηστότης Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God’s kindness as if it were an object that could be on someone. He means that God acts kindly toward those who trust in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is kind to you” | |
2087 | 11:22 | i4ue | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὲ & ἐπιμένῃς & σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ | 1 | See how you translated you in 11:17–21. | |
2088 | 11:22 | rw2i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐπιμένῃς τῇ χρηστότητι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God’s kindness as if it were a place in which someone could continue staying. He means that his readers should continue trusting in God’s kindness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you continue trusting in his kindness” | |
2089 | 11:22 | t4mk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ | 1 | Here Paul refers to his Gentile Christian audience as if they were branches that God could cut off. He means that God would reject them if they do not remain faithful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you yourself also will be rejected” or “you yourself also will be rejected like a branch that is cut off” | |
2090 | 11:22 | l17i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ σὺ ἐκκοπήσῃ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will cut off you yourself also” | |
2091 | 11:23 | osvn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | κἀκεῖνοι & μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ & αὐτούς | 1 | In this verse those, they, their, and them refer to the Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus at first but become believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those unbelieving Jewish people … those Jews do not continue in their unbelief … those Jews” | |
2092 | 11:23 | k0i0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | See how you translated continue in in the previous verse. | |
2093 | 11:23 | lvk7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιμένωσι τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if they start believing” | |
2094 | 11:23 | e68i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ | 1 | See how you translated unbelief in 4:20. | |
2095 | 11:23 | zu7k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐνκεντρισθήσονται & ἐνκεντρίσαι αὐτούς | 1 | Paul speaks of the Jews becoming part of God’s people as if they were branches that could be grafted in to a tree. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be joined to God’s people … to join them to his people” or “will be joined to God’s people, like a branch is grafted into a tree … to join them to his people, like a farmer grafts a branch into a tree” | |
2096 | 11:23 | lx11 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐνκεντρισθήσονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will graft in” | |
2097 | 11:23 | yxtp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
2098 | 11:24 | onko | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse is an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2099 | 11:24 | q1vp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | See how you translated if in 11:12. | |
2100 | 11:24 | s1a4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor | σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου, καὶ παρὰ φύσιν ἐνεκεντρίσθης εἰς καλλιέλαιον, πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ | 1 | Paul continues speaking of the Gentile believers and Jews as if they were branches of a tree, as he did in 11:17–22. Here, a wild olive tree represents all non-Jewish people who do not believe in Jesus, cut off represents being separated from unbelieving non-Jewish people, and good olive tree and their own olive tree represents God’s people. See how you translated grafted into in 11:17. Alternate translation: “you were separated from the nations, as a branch is cut off from what is by nature a wild olive tree, and contrary to nature were joined to God’s people, as a branch is grafted into a good olive tree, how much more will these, who are according to nature like olive branches, be joined to their own people, like a branch is grafted back into its own olive tree” | |
2101 | 11:24 | hl07 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ | 1 | See how you translated you in 11:17–22. | |
2102 | 11:24 | dem3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σὺ ἐκ τῆς κατὰ φύσιν ἐξεκόπης ἀγριελαίου & ἐνεκεντρίσθης & οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God cut you off from what is by nature a wild olive tree … God grafted … will God graft these, who are according to nature, back into” | |
2103 | 11:24 | ko5o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | πόσῳ μᾶλλον οὗτοι, οἱ κατὰ φύσιν ἐνκεντρισθήσονται τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐλαίᾳ? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so much more will these, who are according to nature, be grafted back into their own olive tree!” | |
2104 | 11:24 | ncwk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὗτοι & τῇ ἰδίᾳ | 1 | Here, they and their refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews’ own” | |
2105 | 11:24 | yn21 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οἱ κατὰ φύσιν | 1 | This phrase gives further information about the Jewish people whom God will rejoin to his people. If it might be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “they who are the people who are according to nature” | |
2106 | 11:25 | jb0b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what Paul says in 11:25–32 is the reason why he said what he did in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “I am telling you these things because” | |
2107 | 11:25 | ye5w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I very much want you to be aware” | |
2108 | 11:25 | q3i2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐ & θέλω | 1 | The pronoun I here refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, do not want” | |
2109 | 11:25 | ykop | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμᾶς & μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι | 1 | Here, you and yourselves are plural and could refer to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ … you non-Jews might be wise not in yourselves” (2) all the unbelievers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “you believers in Jesus … you believers might not be wise in yourselves” | |
2110 | 11:25 | evc9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | οὐ & θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν, ἀδελφοί, τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο, ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι, ὅτι πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους τῷ Ἰσραὴλ γέγονεν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “in order that you, brothers, might not be wise in yourselves, I do not want you to be ignorant of this mystery, that a partial hardening has occurred in Israel” | |
2111 | 11:25 | aj7j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο | 1 | Here Paul uses the word mystery to refer to God saving a remnant of Jews after he saves a certain amount of Gentiles. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use mystery to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” | |
2112 | 11:25 | w7lx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | Although the term brothers is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Paul could be referring to: (1) non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. Alternate translation: “my fellow non-Jewish believers in Christ” (2) all the believers to whom Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers in Christ” | |
2113 | 11:25 | me1g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι | 1 | Here, wise in yourselves refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is wiser than he really is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might not arrogantly think that you are wiser than you really are” | |
2114 | 11:25 | ec4j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πώρωσις ἀπὸ μέρους | 1 | Here, hardening refers to being stubborn and unwilling to believe in Jesus. This hardening is only partial because some Jews believe in Jesus. See how you translated similar words in 11:7 and 9:18. | |
2115 | 11:25 | dry1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῷ Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | See how you translated Israel in 10:19. | |
2116 | 11:25 | db1x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ πλήρωμα τῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Here, fullness refers to the full amount of non-Jewish people whom God will save. See how you translated fullness in 11:12. | |
2117 | 11:25 | px38 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εἰσέλθῃ | 1 | Here Paul uses come in to speak about people joining God’s people as if they were entering a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has become his people” | |
2118 | 11:26 | jo0j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ οὕτως | 1 | Here, thus indicates that all Israel will be saved in the same manner as “the fullness of the Gentiles,” as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in the same manner” | |
2119 | 11:26 | vu7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ σωθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save all Israel” | |
2120 | 11:26 | xjq4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | See how you translated Israel in 10:19. | |
2121 | 11:26 | wuyz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
2122 | 11:26 | n7yf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote (Isaiah 59:20–21 and 27:9), you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” | |
2123 | 11:26 | eb3j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἥξει ἐκ Σιὼν ὁ ῥυόμενος, ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας ἀπὸ Ἰακώβ | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Isaiah 59:20–21. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2124 | 11:26 | dm4e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Σιὼν | 1 | See how you translated Zion in 9:33. | |
2125 | 11:26 | at55 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀποστρέψει ἀσεβείας | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah speaking of ungodly things as if they were an object that someone could turn away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He will cause ungodly activity to stop” | |
2126 | 11:26 | bkr2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | Ἰακώβ | 1 | Here, Jacob refers to the descendants of Jacob, who are also called Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” or “the descendants of Jacob” | |
2127 | 11:27 | cie8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | καὶ αὕτη αὐτοῖς, ἡ παρ’ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, ὅταν ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν | 1 | This verse is a quotation of Isaiah 59:20–21 and 27:9 in which God is speaking. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2128 | 11:27 | q7e3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτοῖς & παρ’ ἐμοῦ & ἀφέλωμαι & αὐτῶν | 1 | The pronouns I and me here refer to God, and them and their refer to the people of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the people of Israel … with me, God, … I take away Israel’s” | |
2129 | 11:27 | ll39 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀφέλωμαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν | 1 | Paul quotes God speaking of sins as if they were objects that someone could take away. He means that people are forgiven for the sins they have done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will remove the guilt of their sins” or “I will forgive them for their sins” | |
2130 | 11:28 | ctn9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ & τὸ εὐαγγέλιον | 1 | Here Paul implies that the Jewish people are rejecting the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to the Jews rejecting the gospel” | |
2131 | 11:28 | girf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐχθροὶ & ὑμᾶς & ἀγαπητοὶ & τοὺς πατέρας | 1 | The pronouns they and their refer to the people of Israel, and your refers to Gentile Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel are enemies … you non-Jews' … the people of Israel are beloved … their forefathers” | |
2132 | 11:28 | x6aa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐχθροὶ | 1 | Paul implies that the Jewish people are enemies of God because they rejected the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are God’s enemies” | |
2133 | 11:28 | dr2q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κατὰ & τὴν ἐκλογὴν | 2 | See how you translated this phrase in 9:11. | |
2134 | 11:28 | d82k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀγαπητοὶ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God loves them” | |
2135 | 11:28 | jas2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοὺς πατέρας | 1 | Here, for the sake of their forefathers refers to the promises that God made to their forefathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of what he promised to do for their ancestors” | |
2136 | 11:29 | nr47 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous verse is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You can be sure this is true because” | |
2137 | 11:29 | p2sf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ χαρίσματα & ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of gifts and calling, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously given … what has been called by God” | |
2138 | 11:29 | mnqs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ κλῆσις τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the calling of God refers to the fact that God called the Jews to be his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fact that God called them” | |
2139 | 11:30 | gmrm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse and the next verse explains what Paul said about the Jews in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2140 | 11:30 | bj8g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμεῖς ποτε ἠπειθήσατε | 1 | Here, you and yourselves are plural and refer to non-Jewish Christians, as in verses 11:17–24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you non-Jewish believers in Christ yourselves were formerly disobedient” | |
2141 | 11:30 | df91 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἠλεήθητε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has shown mercy” | |
2142 | 11:30 | zk91 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἠλεήθητε τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of mercy and disobedience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “were shown how merciful God is in how disobedient these were” | |
2143 | 11:30 | iufr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τῇ τούτων ἀπειθείᾳ | 1 | Here, in indicates that what follows is one reason why God showed mercy to non-Jewish people. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “due to the disobedience of these” | |
2144 | 11:30 | g3cn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τούτων | 1 | Here, these refers to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of these Jews” | |
2145 | 11:31 | wmub | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὗτοι & αὐτοὶ | 1 | Here, these and they refer to Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these Jews … the Jews” | |
2146 | 11:31 | enhi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἠπείθησαν τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν | 1 | The phrase in your mercy could be connected to: (1) the verb translated as were disobedient, as in the ULT. (2) the verb translated as be shown mercy. Alternate translation: “were disobedient so that, in your mercy, they might also now be shown mercy” | |
2147 | 11:31 | mwhx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει | 1 | Here, in could indicate that what follows: (1) is one reason for the Jews being disobedient. Alternate translation: “because of your mercy” (2) is one purpose for the Jews being disobedient. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of your mercy” | |
2148 | 11:31 | qh7s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει | 1 | Here, your mercy refers to the mercy that God has shown to non-Jewish people whom he saves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the mercy that God has shown you” | |
2149 | 11:31 | kzgo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει | 1 | Here, your is plural and refers to non-Jewish believers in Jesus. See how you translated you in the previous verse. | |
2150 | 11:31 | dtmn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ ὑμετέρῳ ἐλέει & καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of mercy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in God acting mercifully to you … God might also now act mercifully to them” | |
2151 | 11:31 | cfgv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | The phrase so that indicates that what follows is a purpose. Here, so that indicates that what follows is one purpose for the disobedience of the Jews. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” | |
2152 | 11:31 | onqo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ αὐτοὶ νῦν ἐλεηθῶσιν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might also now show them mercy” | |
2153 | 11:32 | wxjl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows in this verse is the conclusion to what Paul said in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In conclusion,” | |
2154 | 11:32 | t6cb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συνέκλεισεν & ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς πάντας εἰς ἀπείθειαν | 1 | Here Paul refers to people whom God allows to disobey him as if they were prisoners shut up in a prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has allowed all people to be disobedient” | |
2155 | 11:32 | obi0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀπείθειαν & ἐλεήσῃ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of disobedience and mercy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how disobedient they are … he might show how merciful he is toward” | |
2156 | 11:33 | veuz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὦ βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ | 1 | Oh is an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “How amazing is the depth of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” | |
2157 | 11:33 | ldc5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of depth, wealth, wisdom, and knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how deeply wealthy and wise and knowledgeable is God” | |
2158 | 11:33 | x3kb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | βάθος πλούτου, καὶ σοφίας καὶ γνώσεως Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul refers to God’s wealth, wisdom, and knowledge as if they were like a deep place. He means that God’s wealth, wisdom, and knowledge are truly great. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of the wealth and the wisdom and the knowledge of God” | |
2159 | 11:33 | jbyn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “How completely incomprehensible are the things he does” | |
2160 | 11:33 | u322 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations | ὡς ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ | 1 | How here is used as an exclamation word that communicates awe. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. | |
2161 | 11:33 | qb5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀνεξεραύνητα τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God’s judgments as if they were objects that people cannot search for. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s judgments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “incomprehensible are his judgments” | |
2162 | 11:33 | urwo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ κρίματα αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgments, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is how he judges” | |
2163 | 11:33 | m755 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδοὶ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God’s ways as if they were objects that people cannot discover. He means that people cannot fully understand God’s ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his ways are incomprehensible” | |
2164 | 11:34 | w1ck | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For introduces a quotation from an Old Testament book (Isaiah 40:13). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it is written in the Scriptures” | |
2165 | 11:34 | uh2x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο? | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 40:13. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2166 | 11:34 | r2wj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς & ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ἢ τίς σύμβουλος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο? | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using this question to emphasize that no one is as wise as the Lord. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has known the mind of the Lord or become his advisor!” | |
2167 | 11:34 | yy52 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | νοῦν Κυρίου | 1 | Here, mind refers to what a person knows and thinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all that the Lord knows” or “what the Lord thinks about” | |
2168 | 11:35 | wonz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἢ | 1 | The word Or introduces another item. Here, Or indicates that what follows is Paul’s paraphrase of a verse in an Old Testament book (Job 41:11). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Or, as is written in the Scriptures” | |
2169 | 11:35 | dc62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ | 1 | This sentence is a paraphrase of part of Job 41:11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2170 | 11:35 | j5cn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ? | 1 | Paul quotes Job using this question to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one has ever given anything to God, that he should be repaid by him!” | |
2171 | 11:35 | wm4s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ | 1 | Paul quotes Job leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Who gave something to him” | |
2172 | 11:35 | jbjk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God should repay him” | |
2173 | 11:36 | tuup | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what Paul says in this verse is the reason why what he said in 11:34–35 is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “These things are true because” | |
2174 | 11:36 | abc1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐξ αὐτοῦ, καὶ δι’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν, τὰ πάντα. αὐτῷ | 1 | In this verse him refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from God and through God and to God are all things. To God” | |
2175 | 11:36 | p0l8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐξ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, from indicates that all things came from God because he made them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “originating from him” | |
2176 | 11:36 | a9gg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | δι’ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, through indicates that God is the means by which all things continue to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “continuing to exist through him” | |
2177 | 11:36 | s63u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εἰς αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, to indicates that God is the reason all things exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for him” | |
2178 | 11:36 | rpx6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea of glory, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May people glorify him” | |
2179 | 11:36 | ut8l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας | 1 | Here, to the ages is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” | |
2180 | 12:intro | aky9 | 0 | Romans 12 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of 12:20, which are from the Old Testament. Many scholars believe Paul uses the word therefore in Romans 12:1 to refer back to all of Chapters 1–11. After having carefully explained the Christian gospel in chapters 1–11, Paul explains in chapters 12–16 how Christians should live in response to these great truths. In these chapters, Paul gives many different commands that are practical instructions for how Christians should behave. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterBody of ChristThe body of Christ is an important metaphor used in the New Testament to refer to the church. Every Christian plays a unique and important function within the people of God. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc:///ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |||
2181 | 12:1 | wklb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | παρακαλῶ | 1 | The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, urge” | |
2182 | 12:1 | fwds | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν & ὑμῶν | 1 | The pronouns you and your here and throughout most of this chapter are plural and refer to the believers in Rome to whom Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers … your … your” | |
2183 | 12:1 | xgcr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, therefore indicates that what follows in the rest of this letter is what Paul wants his readers to do in response to what he has written in chapters 1–11. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a fuller expression. Alternate translation: “Since everything I have said is true, I urge you” | |
2184 | 12:1 | kr1a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
2185 | 12:1 | d50i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν & θυσίαν ζῶσαν & τὴν λογικὴν λατρείαν ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of compassions, sacrifice, and service, you could express the same ideas in another way. These words indicate different ways in which people serve God. Alternate translation: “the ways that God is compassionate … a living one that is sacrificed … which is how you reasonably serve” | |
2186 | 12:1 | wuyl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν | 1 | Here Paul refers to a believer in Christ who obeys God as if that person were one of the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God as a sacrifice, except that this sacrifice is still living. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive, as if you were a living sacrifice on the temple altar” | |
2187 | 12:1 | w1mz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν | 1 | Here, bodies refers to whole people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your whole selves” | |
2188 | 12:2 | pyb6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε & μεταμορφοῦσθε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not conform yourselves … let God transform you” | |
2189 | 12:2 | clc6 | μὴ συνσχηματίζεσθε | 1 | Alternate translation: “do not become alike” | ||
2190 | 12:2 | d2qq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ | 1 | Here, this age refers to the attitudes and actions of the unbelievers who live during this period of time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the way people think and act in this age” | |
2191 | 12:2 | na8p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός & τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὸ ἀγαθὸν, καὶ εὐάρεστον, καὶ τέλειον | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of renewal and will, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by renewing the mind … the good and well-pleasing and perfect thing that God wills” | |
2192 | 12:2 | c6ch | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ νοός | 1 | Here Paul speaks of changing the way a person thinks as if that person’s mind is being renewed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the changing of how one thinks” | |
2193 | 12:3 | cp9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2194 | 12:3 | l6c6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “through the grace God has given to me” | |
2195 | 12:3 | nyc2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τῆς χάριτος τῆς δοθείσης μοι | 1 | Here, grace refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the grace that caused me to become an apostle” | |
2196 | 12:3 | s6yg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν | 1 | Here, think more highly of himself refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than he really is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to not think he is a better person than he really is” | |
2197 | 12:3 | j20s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | μὴ ὑπερφρονεῖν παρ’ ὃ δεῖ φρονεῖν | 1 | Although himself and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to not think more highly of oneself than what one ought to think” | |
2198 | 12:3 | me4t | φρονεῖν εἰς τὸ σωφρονεῖν | 1 | Alternate translation: “you should be wise with regard to how you think about yourselves” | ||
2199 | 12:3 | m8z7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως | 1 | Here, faith could refer to: (1) different degrees of faith in God that God gives believers. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you an degree of ability to trust in him” (2) the spiritual gifts that result from faith and are given to believers in different degrees. Alternate translation: “as God has given each of you a degree of faith demonstrated in spiritual gifts” | |
2200 | 12:4 | zm8p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul’s readers should “think with a sound mind,” as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “You must do this because” | |
2201 | 12:4 | v2pi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile | καθάπερ | 1 | Here, just as indicates that what follows in this verse is a simile. Paul uses this simile to compare all believers in Christ to the parts of a human body. Since Paul explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to express the meaning plainly here. | |
2202 | 12:4 | v5iy | μέλη & μέλη | 1 | See how you translated members in 6:13. | ||
2203 | 12:4 | v8bo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχει πρᾶξιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of function, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “function for the same purposes” | |
2204 | 12:5 | sd03 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἐσμεν | 1 | Here, we refers to all Christians, so it is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
2205 | 12:5 | v93h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 6:23. | |
2206 | 12:5 | dhx8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ δὲ καθ’ εἷς ἀλλήλων μέλη | 1 | Paul speaks of the believers as if God had physically joined them together like the parts of the human body are joined. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “and the individual believers are united to one another” | |
2207 | 12:5 | cutl | μέλη | 1 | See how you translated members in the previous verse. | ||
2208 | 12:6 | j3x5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἔχοντες & ἡμῖν | 1 | Here, we and us refer to all Christians, so they are inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
2209 | 12:6 | hrr1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἔχοντες & χαρίσματα & διάφορα | 1 | Paul speaks of the different abilities to serve other believers that God gives believers as being gracious gifts from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have different spiritual abilities” | |
2210 | 12:6 | y267 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατὰ τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the grace that God has given to us” | |
2211 | 12:6 | tlk4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν χάριν & προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of grace and prophecy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is graciously … being able to prophecy, according to what has been proportioned” | |
2212 | 12:6 | zs97 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἴτε προφητείαν, κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of prophecy, then that person must use that gift according to the proportion of his faith” | |
2213 | 12:6 | bnk9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ τὴν ἀναλογίαν τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here Paul uses faith in the same way he did in 12:3. See how you translated the clause “as God has distributed to each one a measure of faith” in that verse. | |
2214 | 12:7 | todc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἴτε διακονίαν, ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ; εἴτε ὁ διδάσκων, ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of service, then that person must use that gift for serving; if God has given someone the gift to be the one teaching, then that person must use that gift for teaching” | |
2215 | 12:7 | wmuw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διακονίαν & τῇ διακονίᾳ & τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of service and teaching, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “serving others … serving others … teaching others” | |
2216 | 12:8 | m2as | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | εἴτε ὁ παρακαλῶν, ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει; ὁ μεταδιδοὺς, ἐν ἁπλότητι; ὁ προϊστάμενος, ἐν σπουδῇ; ὁ ἐλεῶν, ἐν ἱλαρότητι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has given someone the gift of encouraging, then that person must use that gift for encouraging; if God has given someone the gift of giving, then that person must use that gift for generosity; if God has given someone the gift of leading, then that person must use that gift with diligence; if God has given someone the gift of showing mercy, then that person must use that gift with cheerfulness” | |
2217 | 12:8 | teso | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει & ἐν ἁπλότητι & ἐν σπουδῇ & ἐν ἱλαρότητι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of encouragement, generosity, diligence, and cheerfulness, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by encouraging others … generously … diligently … cheerfully” | |
2218 | 12:9 | dmsa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | ἡ ἀγάπη ἀνυπόκριτος; ἀποστυγοῦντες τὸ πονηρόν, κολλώμενοι τῷ ἀγαθῷ | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “Love without hypocrisy, abhor the wicked, hold on to the good” | |
2219 | 12:9 | o8z9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | ἀνυπόκριτος | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “sincere” | |
2220 | 12:9 | iv5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ πονηρόν & τῷ ἀγαθῷ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wicked and good, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “wicked things … good things” | |
2221 | 12:10 | mr8i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ εἰς ἀλλήλους φιλόστοργοι; τῇ τιμῇ ἀλλήλους προηγούμενοι | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in brotherly love, be affectionate to one another; in honor, outdo one another” | |
2222 | 12:10 | ng86 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ & τῇ τιμῇ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of brotherly love and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in loving others as brothers … in honoring others” | |
2223 | 12:10 | ux2y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ | 1 | Although the word brotherly is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “in your love for fellow believers” | |
2224 | 12:11 | iu2i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | τῇ σπουδῇ μὴ ὀκνηροί, τῷ πνεύματι ζέοντες, τῷ Κυρίῳ δουλεύοντες | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in diligence, do not be lazy; in the spirit, be eager; serve the Lord” | |
2225 | 12:11 | jhe7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ σπουδῇ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of diligence, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in being diligent” | |
2226 | 12:11 | ddvz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ πνεύματι | 1 | Here, the spirit could refer to: (1) a person’s spirit, as in 1:9. Alternate translation: “in your spirit” or “wholeheartedly” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit” | |
2227 | 12:12 | l3es | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | τῇ ἐλπίδι χαίροντες, τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες, τῇ προσευχῇ προσκαρτεροῦντες | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in hope, rejoice; in suffering, be patient; in prayer, persist” | |
2228 | 12:12 | wept | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | τῇ ἐλπίδι | 1 | Here, in indicates that hope is the reason for rejoicing. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of hope, rejoicing” | |
2229 | 12:12 | uv64 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | τῇ θλίψει ὑπομένοντες | 1 | Here, in indicates the situation in which someone should be patient. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time of suffering, being patient” | |
2230 | 12:12 | xoy0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῇ προσευχῇ προσκαρτεροῦντες | 1 | Here, in indicates that prayer is what one needs to do persistently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in regard to prayer, persisting” | |
2231 | 12:13 | vk5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες, τὴν φιλοξενίαν διώκοντες | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “in the needs of the saints, share; pursue hospitality” | |
2232 | 12:13 | m53s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων & τὴν φιλοξενίαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of needs and hospitality, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the things the saints need … hospitable actions” | |
2233 | 12:13 | i3nm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ταῖς χρείαις τῶν ἁγίων κοινωνοῦντες | 1 | Here Paul implies sharing the things that a person has with those saints who have needs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “sharing what you have to meet the needs of the saints” | |
2234 | 12:14 | exd8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | εὐλογεῖτε καὶ μὴ καταρᾶσθε | 1 | These two commands mean the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must absolutely bless” | |
2235 | 12:15 | szpn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | χαίρειν μετὰ χαιρόντων, κλαίειν μετὰ κλαιόντων | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “rejoice with those who rejoice; weep with those who weep” | |
2236 | 12:16 | agio | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες, μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “think the same thing toward one another; do not think the high things, but accept the lowly ones” | |
2237 | 12:16 | hwd1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τὸ αὐτὸ εἰς ἀλλήλους φρονοῦντες | 1 | This clause is an idiom that refers to having the same concern for the wellbeing of other people as a person has for himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caring about others the same way you care about yourselves” | |
2238 | 12:16 | ar7y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μὴ τὰ ὑψηλὰ φρονοῦντες | 1 | Here, thinking the high things refers to someone arrogantly thinking that he is better than other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not thinking that you are better than others” | |
2239 | 12:16 | cc23 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοῖς ταπεινοῖς συναπαγόμενοι | 1 | Here, the lowly ones could refer to: (1) people who are poor or are not respected by society. Alternate translation: “accepting people who do not seem important” (2) doings things that people think are humiliating or unimportant. Alternate translation: “accepting the lowly tasks” | |
2240 | 12:16 | h469 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | μὴ γίνεσθε φρόνιμοι παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς | 1 | See how you translated this expression in 11:25. | |
2241 | 12:17 | h2tz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες, προνοούμενοι καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Paul is using statements to give commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “repay no one evil for evil; give careful thought to good things in the sight of all men” | |
2242 | 12:17 | ae3j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ & προνοούμενοι & ἐνώπιον | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of evil, thought, and sight, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things for evil things; thinking carefully about … as seen by” | |
2243 | 12:17 | hnte | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μηδενὶ κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ ἀποδιδόντες | 1 | Here Paul uses paying back to refer to doing something evil to someone in response to the evil that person has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “doing something evil to no one for the evil that person has done to you” | |
2244 | 12:17 | fzh8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | καλὰ ἐνώπιον πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Here Paul uses sight to refer to what people mentally perceive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “do things that all men perceive to be good” | |
2245 | 12:17 | c8lw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” | |
2246 | 12:18 | pgt7 | τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν | 1 | Alternate translation: “so far as it depends on you” or “as much as it is up to you” | ||
2247 | 12:18 | nzwf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | μετὰ πάντων ἀνθρώπων εἰρηνεύοντες | 1 | Paul is using a statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “live at peace with all men” | |
2248 | 12:18 | fbzh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” | |
2249 | 12:19 | e0hc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative | μὴ ἑαυτοὺς ἐκδικοῦντες | 1 | Paul is using a statement to give a command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for commands. Alternate translation: “do not avenge yourselves” | |
2250 | 12:19 | ew6x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | δότε τόπον τῇ ὀργῇ | 1 | Here, wrath refers to God’s punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “give way to God’s punishment” | |
2251 | 12:19 | zre0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ὀργῇ & ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and vengeance, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to God being wrathful … I will avenge” | |
2252 | 12:19 | tcwn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. You may need to start a new sentence, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
2253 | 12:19 | omjp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:17. | |
2254 | 12:19 | ns3b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Moses wrote this quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” | |
2255 | 12:19 | kf44 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Deuteronomy 32:35. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2256 | 12:19 | lkpl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes | ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω, λέγει Κύριος | 1 | If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord says that vengeance is for him; he will repay.” | |
2257 | 12:19 | l2i8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις; ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that God will avenge his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “I will certainly avenge you” | |
2258 | 12:19 | xo5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀνταποδώσω | 1 | Here Moses quotes God using repay to refer to appropriately punishing someone as if the punishment were reciprocal payment for that person’s deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will appropriately punish” | |
2259 | 12:19 | mco6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀνταποδώσω | 1 | Moses quotes God leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will repay them” | |
2260 | 12:20 | n96q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἀλλὰ | 1 | But here indicates that what follows is a quotation from an Old Testament book (Proverbs 25:21–22). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “But, God says in the Scriptures,” | |
2261 | 12:20 | q7dq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἐὰν πεινᾷ ὁ ἐχθρός σου, ψώμιζε αὐτόν; ἐὰν διψᾷ, πότιζε αὐτόν; τοῦτο γὰρ ποιῶν, ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ. | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Proverbs 25:21–22. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2262 | 12:20 | c4ig | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὁ ἐχθρός σου & σωρεύσεις | 1 | Here the pronouns your and you are singular and addressed as though to one person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plural forms here. | |
2263 | 12:20 | uwbq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, For indicates that what follows is the reason why what was said in the previous sentence is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
2264 | 12:20 | wce6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ | 1 | This clause is an idiom. It could refer to: (1) a person feeling shame as a result of being helped by someone whom that person had harmed. Alternate translation: “you will make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you” (2) God very severely punishing the person who is being helped. Alternate translation: “you will give God a reason to judge him more harshly” | |
2265 | 12:21 | q761 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν | 1 | Paul describes evil as if it were a person who could conquer someone or be conquered by someone. He is referring to someone doing evil in response to someone doing evil to that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil cause you to do evil, but use good to prevent evil from influencing you” | |
2266 | 12:21 | p7fd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τοῦ κακοῦ & τῷ ἀγαθῷ & τὸ κακόν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of evil and good, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “evil things … evil things … good things” | |
2267 | 12:21 | k8et | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let evil overcome you” | |
2268 | 13:intro | l4q7 | 0 | Romans 13 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this chapterSubmission to rulersIn 13:1–7 Paul commands his readers to obey rulers and pay taxes. Some readers will find this difficult to accept, especially if they live in places where wicked rulers persecute the church. It is important to recognize that the Holy Spirit led Paul to write these words while the Roman government was persecuting Christians. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God. The only time a Christian should disobey governing authorities is when those rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do (for an example of such a situation, see Acts 5:28–29). “The night advanced, and the day has come near”In 13:11–14 Paul tells his readers that they should behave like Jesus because Jesus is coming back soon. He calls the current time in which people do what is evil the “night,” and he calls the time when Jesus returns the “day.” | |||
2269 | 13:1 | i1kf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις ὑποτασσέσθω | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let every soul subject itself to governing authorities” or “Let everyone subject themselves to governing authorities” | |
2270 | 13:1 | b8nf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | πᾶσα ψυχὴ | 1 | Paul uses soul here to refer to the whole life of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every human being” | |
2271 | 13:1 | gkmd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐξουσίαις & ἐξουσία & οὖσαι | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of authorities and authority, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those who are authorized to govern … authorized person … existing ones who are authorized” | |
2272 | 13:1 | wii2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ & ἔστιν ἐξουσία, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “all authority comes from God” | |
2273 | 13:1 | j3lr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | αἱ δὲ οὖσαι ὑπὸ Θεοῦ τεταγμέναι εἰσίν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and God appointed the existing authorities” | |
2274 | 13:2 | ezg5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | So then indicates that what follows in this verse summarizes ideas that were previously expressed. So then here introduces the result of what Paul said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Since this is true” | |
2275 | 13:2 | ui8y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ, τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ διαταγῇ & ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of authority, command, and judgment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are authorized … what God has commanded … will cause themselves to be judged” | |
2276 | 13:2 | vc3u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οἱ δὲ ἀνθεστηκότες | 1 | Here, it refers to that authority stated earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the ones who have opposed that authority” | |
2277 | 13:2 | dsa3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will cause God to bring judgment on them” | |
2278 | 13:2 | y21s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἑαυτοῖς κρίμα λήμψονται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of judgment as if it were an object that one could bring and put on someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause God to judge them” | |
2279 | 13:3 | m3yf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2280 | 13:3 | c2xa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | φόβος & τὴν ἐξουσίαν & τὸ ἀγαθὸν & ἕξεις ἔπαινον | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of terror, authority, good, and praise, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “terrifying … whom God has authorized … good things … you will be praised” | |
2281 | 13:3 | jt2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ ἀγαθῷ ἔργῳ, & τῷ κακῷ | 1 | Here, the good deed and the evil deed refer to the people who do those deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those who do the good deed … to those who do the evil deed” | |
2282 | 13:3 | z4sq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | θέλεις δὲ μὴ φοβεῖσθαι τὴν ἐξουσίαν? | 1 | Paul is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Now this is how you can not fear the authority:” | |
2283 | 13:3 | nohi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἕξεις ἔπαινον | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the authorities will praise you” | |
2284 | 13:3 | ahl9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | ἐξ αὐτῆς | 1 | Here, from indicates the reason why you will have praise. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “because of it” | |
2285 | 13:4 | w4s0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | The word for indicates that what follows explains what came before this word. Here, for indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” | |
2286 | 13:4 | j4kb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ἐστιν & οὐ & φορεῖ & ἐστιν | 1 | In this verse the pronoun he refers to a person who rules. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the ruler is … the ruler does not carry … the ruler is” | |
2287 | 13:4 | zgz2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | Θεοῦ & διάκονός & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακὸν & Θεοῦ & διάκονός & ὀργὴν & τὸ κακὸν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of servant, good, evil, and wrath, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who serves God … doing good … evil things … one who serves God … what is wrathful … evil things” | |
2288 | 13:4 | quy4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | The word for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for introduces the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” | |
2289 | 13:4 | ink8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes | οὐ & εἰκῇ τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ | 1 | Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that means the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he carries the sword for a very good reason” | |
2290 | 13:4 | s3vz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | οὐ & τὴν μάχαιραν φορεῖ | 1 | Here, the sword refers to a ruler’s authority to punish wicked people, which could include killing them with a sword. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he does not have the authority to punish” | |
2291 | 13:4 | vx6b | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 3 | The word for indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “in fact,” | |
2292 | 13:4 | d61t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς ὀργὴν | 1 | Here, for indicates that what follows is the purpose of an avenger. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of wrath” | |
2293 | 13:4 | au7j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὀργὴν | 1 | See how you translated wrath in 1:18. | |
2294 | 13:4 | cq0x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὀργὴν τῷ τὸ κακὸν πράσσοντι | 1 | Paul speaks of wrath as if it were an object that could be put on a person. He means that every evil person will experience wrathful punishment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “wrath that will be experienced by the one who practices the evil” | |
2295 | 13:5 | jqz7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:24. | |
2296 | 13:5 | sxq1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὑποτάσσεσθαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to subject yourselves” | |
2297 | 13:5 | aq7p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑποτάσσεσθαι | 1 | Paul implies that his readers should be subjected to the rulers described in 13:1–4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to be subjected to rulers” | |
2298 | 13:5 | q81v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | διὰ τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ καὶ διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “because of the wrathful deeds they can do to you, but also because your conscience knows that you should do submit to them” | |
2299 | 13:5 | ykg9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ὀργὴν & τὴν συνείδησιν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of wrath and conscience, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is wrathful … what you know is right” | |
2300 | 13:5 | bs1u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὴν ὀργὴν | 1 | See how you translated this word in the previous verse. | |
2301 | 13:6 | x5i2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2302 | 13:6 | r1jy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | διὰ τοῦτο | 1 | Here, this could refer to: (1) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience” (2) “the wrath” and “the conscience” mentioned in the previous verse, and the fact that rulers are servants of God. Alternate translation: “because of the wrath and your conscience, and because rulers are servants of God” | |
2303 | 13:6 | hy4f | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 2 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. Here, for indicates that what follows is another reason why Christians should pay taxes. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since” | |
2304 | 13:6 | ib5x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | εἰσιν | 1 | Here, they refers to the rulers described in 13:1–4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the rulers are” | |
2305 | 13:6 | gh12 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | λειτουργοὶ & Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 13:4. | |
2306 | 13:6 | e8ey | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο προσκαρτεροῦντες | 1 | This clause gives additional information about the rulers, who are called servants of God in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “and these rulers are the ones persisting in this very thing” | |
2307 | 13:6 | xmsa | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | αὐτὸ τοῦτο | 1 | Here, this very thing refers to serving God by ruling over people, as is indicated by Paul calling them servants of God in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this service” | |
2308 | 13:7 | z9cn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰς ὀφειλάς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of obligations, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you are obligated to pay” | |
2309 | 13:7 | wg2l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος; τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “pay tax to whom tax is due, pay toll to whom toll is due, show fear to whom fear is due, show honor to him to whom honor is due” | |
2310 | 13:7 | jg3u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | τῷ τὸν φόρον, τὸν φόρον; τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος | 1 | Paul is speaking of taxes and tolls in general, not of one particular tax and toll. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “taxes to whom taxes, tolls to whom tolls” | |
2311 | 13:7 | s2nf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | τῷ τὸ τέλος, τὸ τέλος | 1 | The word toll refers to a specific kind of tax that must be paid in addition to regular taxes. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of tax, you could use a general expression for additional taxes. Alternate translation: “government fees to whom government fees” or “revenues to whom revenues” | |
2312 | 13:7 | ao8q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fear and honor, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “fear to whomever should be feared, honor to whomever should be honored” | |
2313 | 13:7 | nwi2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ τὸν φόβον, τὸν φόβον; τῷ τὴν τιμὴν, τὴν τιμήν | 1 | Here Paul refers to fearing and honoring those who deserve to be feared and honored as if someone is paying them fear and honor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fear those who should be feared, honor those who should be honored” or “respect those whom you ought to respect, honor those whom you ought to honor” | |
2314 | 13:8 | a69g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Do not owe anyone anything” | |
2315 | 13:8 | ay3n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μηδενὶ μηδὲν ὀφείλετε, εἰ μὴ τὸ ἀλλήλους ἀγαπᾶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of loving other believers as if it were a debt owed to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Owe nothing to anyone, but love one another as if it were a debt that you owed them” | |
2316 | 13:8 | dptn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ ἀλλήλους | 1 | Here, one another refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “other believers” | |
2317 | 13:8 | auu3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμον | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12. | |
2318 | 13:9 | qcri | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why loving others fulfills the law, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is true since” | |
2319 | 13:9 | r7kd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | τὸ | 1 | Here Paul uses this to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Exodus 20:13–15, 17). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “God had said in the law” | |
2320 | 13:9 | t0os | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ κλέψεις, οὐκ ἐπιθυμήσεις | 1 | These clauses are a quotation from Exodus 20:13–15, 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2321 | 13:9 | ng84 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἴ τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή | 1 | Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if there is any other commandment, and there is” | |
2322 | 13:9 | mgc9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τις ἑτέρα ἐντολή | 1 | Here, any other commandment refers to any of the commandments that God gave the Israelites other than those that Paul has just mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there is any other commandment” | |
2323 | 13:9 | jva8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐντολή | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of commandment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thing God has commanded” | |
2324 | 13:9 | x8i1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ, ἀνακεφαλαιοῦται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this word summed it up” | |
2325 | 13:9 | ytof | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses word to refer to a commandment that is made up of words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this commandment” | |
2326 | 13:9 | ylb1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses this word to indicate a quotation from the law that is written in the Old Testament (Leviticus 19:18). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “in this commandment in the law” | |
2327 | 13:9 | so4u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Leviticus 19:18. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2328 | 13:10 | vy62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον κακὸν οὐκ ἐργάζεται | 1 | Here Paul speaks of love as if it were a person who could do some kind of work. He means that people who love other people do not do evil things to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People who love do not work evil to a neighbor” | |
2329 | 13:10 | xa4n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἀγάπη τῷ πλησίον & κακὸν & πλήρωμα & νόμου & ἡ ἀγάπη | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of love, evil, and fulfillment, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Loving a neighbor … what is evil … loving others fulfills the law” | |
2330 | 13:10 | l92e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns | νόμου | 1 | See how you translated the law in 2:12. | |
2331 | 13:11 | okty | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | καὶ τοῦτο | 1 | Paul is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “And do this” | |
2332 | 13:11 | dxm0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τοῦτο | 1 | Here, this refers back to all the commands Paul stated in 12:1–13:10. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these commands that I have given you” | |
2333 | 13:11 | cdwh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰδότες τὸν καιρόν | 1 | This clause indicates one reason for Paul’s readers to obey the commands he gave in 12:1–13:10. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “since you know the time” | |
2334 | 13:11 | vd49 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | τὸν καιρόν, ὅτι ὥρα ἤδη | 1 | Here, that indicates that what follows in this clause is a description of the time stated in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the connection between these clauses more explicit. Alternate translation: “that it is already the time” | |
2335 | 13:11 | gvlw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ὥρα | 1 | Here, hour refers to a point in time when something happens. It has the same meaning as time in the previous clause. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the point in time” | |
2336 | 13:11 | b6l3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι | 1 | Paul speaks of the need for the Roman believers to be spiritually vigilant as if they needed to wake up from being asleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for you to be spiritually vigilant” | |
2337 | 13:11 | acg2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates a reason why Paul’s readers should awake from sleep. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do this since” | |
2338 | 13:11 | s3p9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of salvation, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “our being saved” | |
2339 | 13:11 | jgib | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡμῶν ἡ σωτηρία | 1 | Here Paul uses salvation to refer to the future event when Christ returns and Christians receive the full blessings of their salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the completion of our salvation” | |
2340 | 13:11 | sj56 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγγύτερον | 1 | Here Paul speaks of our salvation as if it were an object that could become nearer to a person. He means that our salvation will occur soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen sooner” | |
2341 | 13:11 | ra5t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅτε ἐπιστεύσαμεν | 1 | This phrase indicates the time at which Paul’s Christian readers first started believing in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we first believed” | |
2342 | 13:11 | rhdr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐπιστεύσαμεν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we believed in Jesus” | |
2343 | 13:12 | ahn4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ νὺξ | 1 | The night here refers the time period when people do evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This time when people act sinfully” | |
2344 | 13:12 | dioj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | προέκοψεν | 1 | Here, advanced refers to the night being almost over. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon be over” | |
2345 | 13:12 | p7xp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ δὲ ἡμέρα | 1 | Paul speaks of the time when Jesus will return to earth as the day. This event is referred to as “the day of the Lord” elsewhere in the Bible and is related to Paul’s reference to a future “salvation” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the time when Jesus returns” | |
2346 | 13:12 | v3m1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἤγγικεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the day as if it were an object that could come near a person. He means that the time when Jesus returns will be soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is going to happen soon” | |
2347 | 13:12 | b4ed | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἀποθώμεθα & ἐνδυσώμεθα | 1 | In this verse us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
2348 | 13:12 | bb8t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀποθώμεθα οὖν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους | 1 | Here, put off means to completely stop doing something, and the works of the darkness refers to evil deeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us therefore stop doing evil things” | |
2349 | 13:12 | o888 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ ἔργα τοῦ σκότους | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe works that are characteristic of the darkness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that are characteristic of the darkness” | |
2350 | 13:12 | y5n4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐνδυσώμεθα | 1 | Here, put on means to start doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us therefore start using” | |
2351 | 13:12 | rjz0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe weapons that are characteristic of the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the weapons that are characteristic of the light” | |
2352 | 13:12 | dw5m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ ὅπλα τοῦ φωτός | 1 | Here, weapons refers to what Christians do to oppose evil, and the light refers to good deeds, which is in contrast to the darkness in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the good deeds used for opposing evil” or “the good deeds that are like weapons for fighting evil” | |
2353 | 13:13 | gv4q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | περιπατήσωμεν | 1 | Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
2354 | 13:13 | ketz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εὐσχημόνως περιπατήσωμεν | 1 | Here Paul uses walk to refer to how people behave or lives their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let us behave decently” | |
2355 | 13:13 | e6ij | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὡς ἐν ἡμέρᾳ | 1 | Here Paul refers to the unashamed way that Christians are supposed to behave as if they were walking during the day, when people can see what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as if everyone can see what we are doing” | |
2356 | 13:13 | svuf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | μὴ κώμοις καὶ μέθαις, μὴ κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις, μὴ ἔριδι καὶ ζήλῳ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that clauses would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not walking in drunken celebrations or drunkenness; not walking in sexual immorality and uncontrolled lust, not walking in strife and jealousy” | |
2357 | 13:13 | wd5c | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κώμοις & μέθαις & κοίταις & ἀσελγείαις & ἔριδι & ζήλῳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of celebrations, drunkenness, immorality, lust, strife, and jealousy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being drunk while celebrating … being drunk … in acting sexually immorally … lusting uncontrollably … in quarreling with others … being jealous” | |
2358 | 13:13 | qes3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | κοίταις καὶ ἀσελγείαις | 1 | These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize all kinds of sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “in every kind of sexually immoral act” | |
2359 | 13:14 | emp4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | But here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing those things,” | |
2360 | 13:14 | sir6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν | 1 | Paul speaks of Christ as if he were clothing that someone could put on. He means that people should behave like Jesus behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act like the Lord Jesus Christ” | |
2361 | 13:14 | j795 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε, εἰς ἐπιθυμίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of forethought or desires, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “do not think ahead with regard to what the flesh desires” | |
2362 | 13:14 | xre7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῆς σαρκὸς | 1 | Here Paul uses flesh figuratively to refer to sinful human nature. See how you translated a similar use of flesh in 7:18. | |
2363 | 14:intro | kt8c | 0 | Romans 14 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 14:11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament. Special Concepts in this ChapterWeak in faithPaul teaches that Christians can have real faith, and yet at the same time be “weak in faith” regarding some situations. This describes Christians whose faith is immature and who feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Dietary restrictionsIn the law of Moses, God forbade the Jews from eating the meat of some animals which God said were unclean. However, since Christians have been “made dead to the law” (7:4), they are free to eat what they want. The Roman church to which Paul wrote this letter was made up of both Jews and Gentiles. Some of the Jewish believers were offended by the non-Jewish believers eating foods that God had previously forbidden in the law of Moses. The non-Jewish believers were also judging the Jewish believers for not eating those foods. Paul uses this situation to teach that Christians must use their freedom in a way that honors the Lord and shows love to other believers. (See: [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc:///tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterInclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we” and “us” refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
2364 | 14:1 | jf8v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει | 1 | Here, weak in the faith refers to someone who does not have a mature faith, but feels guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. The word weak here does not refer to physical weakness. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose faith is not mature” | |
2365 | 14:1 | bdy7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῇ πίστει & διακρίσεις | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of faith and judgments, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in what he believes … judging” | |
2366 | 14:1 | p697 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “not accepting that one for passing judgments on opinions” | |
2367 | 14:1 | i45s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν | 1 | Here, for indicates that this clause is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “not for the purpose of passing judgments on opinions” | |
2368 | 14:2 | tuf5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun | ὃς | 1 | One person here does not refer to one particular person. It refers to any person who believes he can eat any food without sinning against God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “One type of person” | |
2369 | 14:2 | ii8g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὃς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “One person believes that God has permitted people to eat any type of food” | |
2370 | 14:2 | n2n6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ & ἀσθενῶν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. | |
2371 | 14:2 | yhhy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | λάχανα ἐσθίει | 1 | Here Paul implies that this person eats only vegetables. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. | |
2372 | 14:3 | n0xd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ ἐσθίων, τὸν μὴ ἐσθίοντα μὴ ἐξουθενείτω; ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐσθίων, τὸν ἐσθίοντα μὴ κρινέτω | 1 | Here, the one eating refers to the person mentioned in the previous verse who believes that he can eat any kind of food, and the one not eating refers to the person called “the one being weak” in the previous two verses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let the one who eats any type of food not despise the one who does not eat every type of food, and let the one who does not eat every type of food not judge the one who eats every type of food” | |
2373 | 14:3 | pqrp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ὁ Θεὸς & αὐτὸν προσελάβετο | 1 | Although the pronoun him is singular, here it refers to both the one eating and the one not eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has accepted them” | |
2374 | 14:4 | q9bx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | σὺ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην? | 1 | Paul is using a question to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have no right to judge a household slave belonging to another!” | |
2375 | 14:4 | xq7r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ | 1 | Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. | |
2376 | 14:4 | vaym | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην | 1 | Paul speaks of any Christian as if he were a household slave who belongs to another. He means that all Christians belong to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who belongs to God” | |
2377 | 14:4 | ba38 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ | 1 | Paul speaks of God as if he were a master who owns slaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “To God, who is his master,” | |
2378 | 14:4 | cp9y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῷ ἰδίῳ κυρίῳ στήκει ἢ πίπτει. σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν | 1 | This could mean: (1) stands and stand refer to pleasing God, and falls refers to not pleasing God. Alternate translation: “He pleases or does not please his own master. But he will be made to please God, for the Lord is able to make him be pleasing” (2) stands and stand refer to being accepted by God at the final judgment, and falls refers to being condemned by God at the final judgment. Alternate translation: “He will either be approved or condemned by his own master. But he will be approved by God, for the Lord is able to approve him” | |
2379 | 14:4 | togo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σταθήσεται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will make him stand” | |
2380 | 14:4 | ucto | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σταθήσεται δέ, δυνατεῖ γὰρ ὁ Κύριος στῆσαι αὐτόν | 1 | You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “But the Lord will accept him because he is able to make the servant acceptable” | |
2381 | 14:5 | x7j2 | κρίνει ἡμέραν παρ’ ἡμέραν | 1 | Alternate translation: “considers one day to be different from another day” or “considers one day to be more important than another day” | ||
2382 | 14:5 | vm8j | κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν | 1 | Alternate translation: “considers all days to be the same” or “considers no day to be more important than another day” | ||
2383 | 14:5 | m511 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ νοῒ, πληροφορείσθω | 1 | Paul implies that each person should be convinced about what he thinks honors the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Let each one be fully convinced in his own mind that what he does honors the Lord” | |
2384 | 14:5 | y5ea | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἕκαστος & πληροφορείσθω | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let each one be completely certain” or “Let each one fully convince himself” | |
2385 | 14:6 | pfn6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ φρονῶν τὴν ἡμέραν | 1 | The one regarding refers to the person in the previous verse who “judges day from day”. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The one who regards one day as more important than another day” | |
2386 | 14:6 | esu5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ὁ ἐσθίων | 1 | Here, the one who eats refers to the person in 14:3 who eats all kinds of food. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from 14:3. Alternate translation: “the one eating every kind of food” | |
2387 | 14:6 | f9tm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ & Κυρίῳ | 1 | In this verse the phrase for the Lord indicates the purpose for which these people act in these ways. They do so in order to benefit or honor the Lord. Use the most natural way in your language to express a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord … for the purpose of honoring the Lord” | |
2388 | 14:6 | ad27 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | εὐχαριστεῖ & τῷ Θεῷ & καὶ εὐχαριστεῖ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of expressing thanks as if words of gratitude were something that could be given to a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he thanks God … he also thanks God” | |
2389 | 14:6 | jh8j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | καὶ ὁ μὴ ἐσθίων | 1 | Here, the one who not eating refers to the person in 14:3 who only eats vegetables. Paul is leaving out a word that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from 14:3. Alternate translation: “the one who eats does not eat every kind of food” | |
2390 | 14:7 | t6q7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul said in the previous clause is true. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
2391 | 14:7 | u9ar | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, us refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so us would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
2392 | 14:7 | txm3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἑαυτῷ & ἑαυτῷ | 1 | Here, for himself means to do something only to benefit oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of himself … for the benefit of himself” | |
2393 | 14:7 | c9ls | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | οὐδεὶς | 2 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause, as in the UST. | |
2394 | 14:8 | gbxd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2395 | 14:8 | s3lb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ζῶμεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἀποθνῄσκομεν & ζῶμεν & ἀποθνῄσκωμεν & ἐσμέν | 1 | In this verse we refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so we would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
2396 | 14:8 | xf7x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ Κυρίῳ | -1 | Here, for the Lord means to do something only to benefit the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of the Lord … for the benefit of the Lord” | |
2397 | 14:8 | r1hh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in 14:14–20. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result” | |
2398 | 14:9 | pbyn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2399 | 14:10 | xciu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ & κρίνεις & σου & σὺ & ἐξουθενεῖς & σου | 1 | Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you and your here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. | |
2400 | 14:10 | db9a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion | τί κρίνεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? ἢ καὶ σὺ τί ἐξουθενεῖς τὸν ἀδελφόν σου? | 1 | Paul is using two questions here to emphasize that Christians should not judge each other. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no right to judge your brother! And you also have no right to despise your brother!” | |
2401 | 14:10 | al55 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τὸν ἀδελφόν | -1 | Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated “brothers” in 1:13. | |
2402 | 14:10 | b497 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why Christians should not judge each other. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Do not judge others due to the fact that” | |
2403 | 14:10 | jq85 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πάντες & παραστησόμεθα τῷ βήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, present ourselves before refers to standing in front of a judge in order to be judged, and the judgment seat of God refers to the place where God judges. Paul means that all believers will be judged by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we will all be judged by God” | |
2404 | 14:11 | pldr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2405 | 14:11 | mr7r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 1:17. | |
2406 | 14:11 | fel6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote (Isaiah 49:18 and 45:23), you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “Isaiah wrote” | |
2407 | 14:11 | lvwr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος, ὅτι ἐμοὶ κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | This sentence contains quotations from Isaiah 49:18 and 45:23. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2408 | 14:11 | yeb5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | ζῶ ἐγώ & ἐμοὶ | 1 | In this sentence I and me refer to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As I, God, live … to me” | |
2409 | 14:11 | dxdt | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ζῶ ἐγώ, λέγει Κύριος | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “The Lord says, ‘As I live,’” | |
2410 | 14:11 | tf76 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ζῶ ἐγώ | 1 | This phrase is used to start an oath or solemn promise. Use the most natural way in your language to indicate an oath. Alternate translation: “You can be certain that” | |
2411 | 14:11 | sb6q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ, καὶ πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσεται τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Paul uses the words knee and tongue to refer to the entire person who is doing these acts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person will bow down and every person will confess to God” | |
2412 | 14:11 | fokd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction | κάμψει πᾶν γόνυ | 1 | This action was an expression of worship in this culture. See how you translated a similar expression in 11:4. Alternate translation: “every person will worship” | |
2413 | 14:11 | glhx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἐξομολογήσεται | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “will confess that I am Lord” | |
2414 | 14:11 | vngp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | The Lord uses the word God to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person, as in the UST. | |
2415 | 14:12 | q0fv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
2416 | 14:12 | nsy8 | περὶ ἑαυτοῦ, λόγον δώσει τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Alternate translation: “must explain our actions to God” | ||
2417 | 14:12 | zb6k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | περὶ ἑαυτοῦ | 1 | Although the term himself is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “concerning oneself” | |
2418 | 14:13 | epi0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here indicates that what follows in this verse is the result of what Paul said in 14:10–12. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “Because of these things” | |
2419 | 14:13 | ia62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἢ σκάνδαλον | 1 | Here, stumbling block and trap mean basically the same thing. They both refer to tempting someone to sin. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “not to do or say anything at all that might cause a brother to sin” | |
2420 | 14:13 | fgg7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα | 1 | See how you translated stumbling block in 11:9. | |
2421 | 14:13 | cx4s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τῷ ἀδελφῷ | 1 | Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. | |
2422 | 14:14 | t7gc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet | οἶδα καὶ πέπεισμαι ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, know and am persuaded mean very similar things. Paul uses them to emphasize what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am completely certain” | |
2423 | 14:14 | qm09 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, in could indicate: (1) the means by which Paul was persuaded. Alternate translation: “by means of the Lord Jesus” (2) Paul being united with Christ. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord Jesus” | |
2424 | 14:14 | erfx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐδὲν κοινὸν & κοινὸν & κοινόν | 1 | The next verse indicates that here Paul is specifically referring to unclean foods, which were foods that Jews were forbidden to eat according to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “no food is forbidden to be eaten … forbidden … it is forbidden food” | |
2425 | 14:14 | fuk1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐδὲν κοινὸν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything by itself is clean” | |
2426 | 14:14 | mjc5 | δι’ ἑαυτοῦ | 1 | Alternate translation: “by its nature” or “because of what it is” | ||
2427 | 14:15 | vd20 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰ γὰρ διὰ βρῶμα | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why what Paul’s readers should obey the command he gave in 14:13. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: ““Do not place a stumbling block before your brother because, if on account of food,”” | |
2428 | 14:15 | iw7w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ βρῶμα | 1 | This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christians thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and 14:2–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or “because of what you eat” | |
2429 | 14:15 | tfix | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σου & περιπατεῖς & σου | 1 | ||
2430 | 14:15 | ln42 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ὁ ἀδελφός | 1 | Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. | |
2431 | 14:15 | a4kj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | λυπεῖται | 1 | Here, hurt refers to experiencing emotional or spiritual offense or suffering. It does not refer to being physically injured. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is offended” | |
2432 | 14:15 | bj8v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οὐκέτι κατὰ ἀγάπην περιπατεῖς | 1 | Here Paul uses walking to refer to how people behave or live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See similar uses of “walk” in 6:4, 8:4, and 13:13. Alternate translation: “you are no longer behaving according to love” | |
2433 | 14:15 | n099 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ τῷ βρώματί σου ἐκεῖνον ἀπόλλυε, ὑπὲρ οὗ Χριστὸς ἀπέθανεν | 1 | Paul uses destroy here to refer to causing someone to stop trusting in Jesus, which will result in that person experiencing punishment forever in hell. See how you translated “destruction” in 9:22. Alternate translation: “Do not cause that one from whom Christ died to stop trusting in Jesus and experience eternal destruction” | |
2434 | 14:15 | sn7w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ βρώματί σου | 1 | This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in the previous verse and 14:2–6. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “over the matter of food” or, between commas, “because of what you eat” | |
2435 | 14:16 | zgzz | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | The word So indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. So here indicates that what follows in this verse is the logical conclusion to what Paul has stated in the previous verses. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation: “As a result,” | |
2436 | 14:16 | rvtd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of good, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is good for you” | |
2437 | 14:16 | h3af | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸ ἀγαθόν | 1 | Here, good could refer to: (1) the good things that God gives Christians. Alternate translation: “good things” (2) the freedom that Christians have to eat any food they want to eat. Alternate translation: “your freedom to eat anything” | |
2438 | 14:16 | gl48 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | μὴ βλασφημείσθω & ὑμῶν τὸ ἀγαθόν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do not allow people to blaspheme your good” | |
2439 | 14:17 | v6jq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. ddFor here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants his readers to obey what he commanded in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “This is due to the fact that” | |
2440 | 14:17 | m0ya | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οὐ & ἐστιν | 1 | Here, is not indicates that what follows is what the kingdom of God does not consist of or is not concerned with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not consist of” or “is not concerned with” | |
2441 | 14:17 | tyyq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but is” | |
2442 | 14:17 | j92k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | δικαιοσύνη, καὶ εἰρήνη, καὶ χαρὰ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of righteousness, peace, and joy, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is righteous and what is peaceful and what is joyful” | |
2443 | 14:17 | sdlj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ | 1 | Here, in the Holy Spirit could refer to: (1) the means by which Christians experience righteousness and peace and joy. Alternate translation: “by the Holy Spirit” (2) Christians being united with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in union with the Holy Spirit” | |
2444 | 14:18 | i2za | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2445 | 14:18 | iqg3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τούτῳ | 1 | Here, this way refers to the “righteousness and peace and joy” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this righteous, peaceful, and joyful way” | |
2446 | 14:18 | am8m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | δόκιμος τοῖς ἀνθρώποις | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “men approve it” | |
2447 | 14:18 | gy7n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | τοῖς ἀνθρώποις | 1 | Although the term men is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” | |
2448 | 14:19 | q5fk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἄρα οὖν | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 5:18. | |
2449 | 14:19 | xxgm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | διώκωμεν | 1 | Here Paul refers to the things of peace and the things of the building up as if they were something that people could pursue. He is telling Christians to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us commit to doing” | |
2450 | 14:19 | sfpg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης & καὶ τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe things that result in the peace and the building up of other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the things that result in peace and the things that result in building up” | |
2451 | 14:19 | i3rv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ τῆς οἰκοδομῆς τῆς εἰς ἀλλήλους | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of helping other Christians become more spiritually mature as if one were building up a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that help one another grow spiritually mature” | |
2452 | 14:20 | p65h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μὴ & κατάλυε τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, tear down refers to undoing the work God has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not undo the work of God” | |
2453 | 14:20 | zbd1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἕνεκεν βρώματος | 1 | This phrase refers to a Christian eating food that another Christian thinks is unclean, as mentioned in 14:2–6, 13–17. See how you translated the similar phrase in 14:15. | |
2454 | 14:20 | r7u3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πάντα μὲν καθαρά | 1 | Here, things refers to food and clean refers to something that God has permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All foods are indeed permitted by God to be eaten” | |
2455 | 14:20 | l75q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | κακὸν | 1 | Here, it refers to the act of eating a food that someone believes God has not permitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating those things is evil” | |
2456 | 14:20 | dk72 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ διὰ προσκόμματος ἐσθίοντι | 1 | Here, eats with a stumbling block refers to tempting another believer to sin by eating food that the other believer thinks is sinful to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the man to eat what causes another believer to stumble” | |
2457 | 14:20 | fz0m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | προσκόμματος | 1 | See how you translated stumbling block in 11:9. | |
2458 | 14:21 | mrr4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | μηδὲ | 2 | Paul is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is good not” | |
2459 | 14:21 | e1du | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σου | 1 | Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, your here is singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. | |
2460 | 14:21 | iq9g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ὁ ἀδελφός | 1 | Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated this word in 14:10. | |
2461 | 14:21 | m5nb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | προσκόπτει | 1 | Here, stumbles refers to another believer succombing to the temptation to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sins” | |
2462 | 14:21 | k1bn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants | ἢ σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ | 1 | These words are found in some traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting these words in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. | |
2463 | 14:21 | o6kn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | σκανδαλίζεται, ἢ ἀσθενεῖ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that offends him or makes him weak” | |
2464 | 14:21 | mnon | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀσθενεῖ | 1 | Here, weak refers to being spiritually immature. See how you translated “weak in the faith” in 14:1. | |
2465 | 14:22 | u1cf | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of faith, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The things that you yourself believe” | |
2466 | 14:22 | hjk9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | σὺ πίστιν ἣν ἔχεις | 1 | Here, faith refers to what Christians believe that God permits them to do, as mentioned in 14:1–6. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The beliefs that your yourself have about what God permits you do to” | |
2467 | 14:22 | b3hi | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd | σὺ & ἔχεις & σεαυτὸν | 1 | Even though Paul is writing to a group of people, you and yourself here are singular. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of you in your translation. | |
2468 | 14:22 | tkse | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ σεαυτὸν ἔχε ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | This clause refers to keeping one’s beliefs between oneself and God, rather than telling other people about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep it between yourself and God” or “keep it between you and God” | |
2469 | 14:22 | bi7e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of people keeping what they believe before God as if they were standing in front of God. Paul means that people should keep private their beliefs about what God permits them to do, as if God is the only one who knows about those beliefs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and God” | |
2470 | 14:22 | r53r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν | 1 | Here, judge refers to feeling guilty or condemning oneself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the one who does not feel guilty” | |
2471 | 14:22 | odxh | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει | 1 | Although the terms himself and he are masculine, Paul is using the words here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “oneself in what one approves” | |
2472 | 14:22 | r8a1 | ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει | 1 | Alternate translation: “with respect to what he approves” or “in regard to what he approves” | ||
2473 | 14:23 | zexs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word But introduces a contrast. But here indicates that what follows is in strong contrast to what was said in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” | |
2474 | 14:23 | s1ph | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὁ & διακρινόμενος, ἐὰν φάγῃ, κατακέκριται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the action could be: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God condemns the one who passes judgment if he eats” (2) the person who eats. Alternate translation: “the one who passes judgment condemns himself if he eats” | |
2475 | 14:23 | wa8s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὁ & διακρινόμενος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of judgment, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the one who judges” | |
2476 | 14:23 | dkcw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ & διακρινόμενος | 1 | This phrase refers to a person who has determined that eating certain foods is prohibited by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who judges that it is not right to eat certain foods” | |
2477 | 14:23 | b6t9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐὰν φάγῃ | 1 | Paul implies that the person eats what that person believes God has forbidden to be eaten. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “if he eats what he thinks God has forbidden him to eat” | |
2478 | 14:23 | l9ga | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οὐκ | 1 | Here, it refers to eating food that someone believes God has forbidden to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “eating what one thinks is forbidden to eat is not” | |
2479 | 14:23 | yr44 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐκ πίστεως | -1 | In this verse from refers to what a person bases their actions on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “based on faith … based on faith” | |
2480 | 14:23 | z696 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | πίστεως & πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated the abstract noun faith in the previous verse. | |
2481 | 14:23 | u80o | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | πᾶν | 1 | Here, all refers to anything that a person does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “all that a person does” | |
2482 | 14:23 | u9p2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἁμαρτία | 1 | See how you translated the abstract noun sin in 6:1. | |
2483 | 15:intro | ae9u | 0 | Romans 15 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with 15:9–11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament. Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in 15:12. Important Figures of Speech in this ChapterAble and unableIn 15:1–6 Paul concludes his teaching from Chapter 14 about how Christians with different degrees of spiritual maturity should act toward each other. He refers to some Christians as those who are “weak in faith” (14:1) or “unable” (15:1). These phrases describe Christians who have immature faith and feel guilty about doing certain things that God did not forbid. By contrast, he refers to spiritually mature Christians as those who are “able” (15:1). Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith and neither should judge the other. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this ChapterForms of ‘You’In this chapter, with three exceptions, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to Paul’s Christian readers, whom he calls “brothers” in 15:14 and 15:30. Notes will discuss the use of singular forms of “you” and “your” in 15:3 and 15:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) Inclusive languageIn this chapter the pronouns “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ourselves” refer inclusively to Paul’s Christian readers. Paul calls these people “brothers” in 15:14 and 15:30. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
2484 | 15:1 | u19s | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς & ἑαυτοῖς | 1 | Here and throughout this chapter the pronouns we and ourselves refer inclusively to all believers in Christ. Your language may require you to mark these forms. | |
2485 | 15:1 | u73x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ | 1 | Here, we, being able refers to Paul and other people who have mature faith. See the discussion about this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “we, having mature faith” or “we, being spiritually strong” | |
2486 | 15:1 | h18p | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ ἀσθενήματα & βαστάζειν | 1 | Paul speaks of weaknesses as if they were objects that a person could bear. He means that mature Christians should patiently help spiritually weak Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help overcome the weaknesses” | |
2487 | 15:1 | kuhe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰ ἀσθενήματα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of weaknesses, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the weak qualities” | |
2488 | 15:1 | cv61 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῶν ἀδυνάτων | 1 | Here, the ones who are unable refers to Christians who are not spiritually mature. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the ones who have immature faith” or “of the ones who are spiritually weak” | |
2489 | 15:2 | bkon | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ πλησίον | 1 | Here, neighbor refers to other Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his fellow Christians” | |
2490 | 15:2 | kz0t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς & πρὸς | 1 | Here, for and toward indicate that what follows are purposes for pleasing one’s neighbor. Use the most natural way in your language for indicating a purpose. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … and for the purpose of” | |
2491 | 15:2 | z2k8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἰκοδομήν | 1 | See how you translated building up in 14:19 | |
2492 | 15:3 | jqul | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse is an example of pleasing others, as Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example,” or “As an illustration,” | |
2493 | 15:3 | h571 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
2494 | 15:3 | y6fe | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something David wrote, you could indicate David as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” | |
2495 | 15:3 | bcz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | In the quotation that follows, Paul quotes Psalm 69:9 in which David records Christ (the Messiah) speaking to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as it is written that the Messiah said to God” | |
2496 | 15:3 | nlu9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Psalm 69:9. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2497 | 15:3 | ulis | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of insults, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “The insulting words” | |
2498 | 15:3 | qni7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | οἱ ὀνειδισμοὶ τῶν ὀνειδιζόντων σε, ἐπέπεσαν ἐπ’ ἐμέ | 1 | Paul quotes David referring to insults against God also affecting Christ as if those insults were objects that fell on him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The insults of those who insult you are also insults against me” | |
2499 | 15:4 | h6qm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows emphasizes the importance of the scriptural quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2500 | 15:4 | txd4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὅσα & προεγράφη & ἐγράφη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whatever the prophets wrote previously, they wrote” | |
2501 | 15:4 | pgdw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὅσα & προεγράφη | 1 | Paul is referring to what was previously written in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what was previously written in the Scriptures” | |
2502 | 15:4 | q3jp | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς & ἵνα | 1 | Here, for and in order that indicate that what follows are purposes for the Scriptures. Use the natural form in your language for indicating purpose clauses. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … for the purpose that” | |
2503 | 15:4 | dx6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν διδασκαλίαν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of instruction, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for instructing us” | |
2504 | 15:4 | wk5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | ἵνα διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν, τὴν ἐλπίδα ἔχωμεν | 1 | If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “in order that we would have the hope through the patience and through the encouragement of the Scriptures” | |
2505 | 15:4 | i0z9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως & τὴν ἐλπίδα | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of patience, encouragement, and hope, you could express the same ideas in another way. See how you translated patience in 2:4, encouragement in 12:8, and hope in 5:4. | |
2506 | 15:4 | g6r1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | διὰ τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως τῶν Γραφῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks about the Scriptures as if they were a person who could have patience and be encouraging. He means that God uses the Scriptures to show his patience and encouragement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the patience and through the encouragement that God gives in the Scriptures” | |
2507 | 15:5 | y97a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ὑπομονῆς καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as being characterized by patience and encouragement. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by patience and encouragement” | |
2508 | 15:5 | u2zm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ὑπομονῆς & τῆς παρακλήσεως | 1 | See how you translated patience and encouragement in the previous verse. | |
2509 | 15:5 | ip4l | τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν ἀλλήλοις | 1 | Alternate translation: “to agree with each other” | ||
2510 | 15:5 | g5xm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν | 1 | This could refer to: (1) the example of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to the example of Christ Jesus” (2) the will of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to the will of Christ Jesus” (3) both the example and will of Christ. Alternate translation: “according to Christ Jesus’ will and example” | |
2511 | 15:6 | lp5m | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the unity that he prayed for in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose that” | |
2512 | 15:6 | smvb | ὁμοθυμαδὸν | 1 | Alternate translation: “with the same purpose” | ||
2513 | 15:6 | uz1z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι, δοξάζητε | 1 | Here, glorify with one mouth refers to being united while praising God aloud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “you might be united while praising God” or “you might praise God together in unity as if only one mouth were speaking” | |
2514 | 15:6 | nvq8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | Πατέρα | 1 | Father is an important title for God. | |
2515 | 15:7 | prx1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Therefore here introduces the conclusion of what Paul has said in 14:1–15:6. See how you translated this word in 1:24. | |
2516 | 15:7 | z941 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, to introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Christians should accept each other as Christ accepted Christians. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of glorifying God” | |
2517 | 15:8 | ae6k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For here indicates that what follows explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2518 | 15:8 | gbh8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | λέγω | 1 | The pronoun I refers to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, say” | |
2519 | 15:8 | refk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διάκονον & ἀληθείας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | See how you translated the abstract nouns servant in 13:4, truth in 2:8, and “promises” in 4:13. | |
2520 | 15:8 | k4my | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | περιτομῆς | 1 | Here, the circumcision refers to the people who have been circumcised: the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Jews” | |
2521 | 15:8 | rtbo | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ βεβαιῶσαι | 1 | Here, to introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating a purpose for which Christ became a servant of the circumcision. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of confirming” | |
2522 | 15:8 | prp8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the promises that God made to the fathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the promises given to the fathers” | |
2523 | 15:8 | gu7z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τῶν πατέρων | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 9:5. | |
2524 | 15:8 | dxz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὰς ἐπαγγελίας τῶν πατέρων | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the promises that God gave to the ancestors of the Jews” | |
2525 | 15:9 | k5q7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | τὰ δὲ ἔθνη | 1 | Here, and indicates that what follows is a second reason why Christ became a “servant of the circumcision.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “and also for the purpose of the Gentiles” | |
2526 | 15:9 | el62 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐλέους | 1 | See how you translated mercy in 9:23. | |
2527 | 15:9 | kebq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
2528 | 15:9 | xgc4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something David wrote (Psalm 18:49), you could indicate David as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as David wrote” or “just as God said through David” | |
2529 | 15:9 | tfh8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | διὰ τοῦτο ἐξομολογήσομαί σοι ἐν ἔθνεσι, καὶ τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ | 1 | This sentence is a quotation of Psalm 18:49. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2530 | 15:9 | em5q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῷ ὀνόματί σου | 1 | Here, your name refers to God himself. If it might be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to you” | |
2531 | 15:10 | az24 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | καὶ πάλιν | 1 | Here, again indicates that what follows is another quotation from Scripture that expresses the same idea of the quotation in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And also” | |
2532 | 15:10 | iprn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | λέγει | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something Moses said in an Old Testament book (Deuteronomy 32:43). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it says in the Scriptures” | |
2533 | 15:10 | qt5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | εὐφράνθητε, ἔθνη, μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Deuteronomy 32:43. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2534 | 15:10 | x4kg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, his refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the people of God” | |
2535 | 15:11 | xw7t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καὶ πάλιν | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is another quotation from Scripture (Psalm 117:1). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures” | |
2536 | 15:11 | gk0i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | αἰνεῖτε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τὸν Κύριον; καὶ ἐπαινεσάτωσαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ λαοί | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Psalm 117:1. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2537 | 15:12 | inaw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καὶ πάλιν Ἠσαΐας λέγει | 1 | This phrase indicates that what follows is a quotation of something Isaiah said in an Old Testament book (Isaiah 11:10). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “And also in the Scriptures, Isaiah says” | |
2538 | 15:12 | u5kr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture | Ἠσαΐας λέγει | 1 | Here Paul uses the present tense verb says to refer to something that happened in the past. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Isaiah said” | |
2539 | 15:12 | lpf6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί & ὁ ἀνιστάμενος & αὐτῷ | 1 | These three expressions all refer to the same person, the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse, the Messiah … Messiah is the one who rises … the Messiah” | |
2540 | 15:12 | fta5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ Ἰεσσαί | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah referring to a descendant of Jesse as if that person were a root or shoot that had grown out of a plant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The descendant of Jesse” | |
2541 | 15:12 | lgr5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὁ ἀνιστάμενος | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using rising to refer to someone becoming a king. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who becomes king” | |
2542 | 15:13 | t3dd | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe God as the source of hope. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives hope” | |
2543 | 15:13 | u77u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἐλπίδος & χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης & ἐλπίδι & δυνάμει | 1 | See how you translated the abstract nouns hope in the previous verse, joy and peace in 14:17, and power in 1:16. | |
2544 | 15:13 | w7wn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς ἐλπίδος πληρώσαι ὑμᾶς πάσης χαρᾶς καὶ εἰρήνης | 1 | Paul refers to people experiencing joy and peace as if they were things that could fill someone. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “may the God of hope allow you to experience all joy and peace” | |
2545 | 15:13 | zmno | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ πιστεύειν | 1 | Here, in indicates that believing is the means by which people will experience all joy and peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of believing” | |
2546 | 15:13 | aee3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | τῷ πιστεύειν | 1 | Paul is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “in believing God” | |
2547 | 15:13 | a6rk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that you might abound” | |
2548 | 15:13 | k3y1 | εἰς τὸ περισσεύειν ὑμᾶς | 1 | Alternative translation: “so that you will have this hope with abundance” | ||
2549 | 15:14 | h98x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πέπεισμαι & καὶ αὐτὸς ἐγὼ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has also persuaded me myself” | |
2550 | 15:14 | g16z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns | αὐτὸς ἐγὼ & αὐτοὶ & ἐστε | 1 | Paul uses the words myself and yourselves to emphasize how certain he is that his readers are good and knowledgeable Christians. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I indeed … you are indeed” | |
2551 | 15:14 | d878 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
2552 | 15:14 | jne2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | αὐτοὶ μεστοί ἐστε ἀγαθωσύνης | 1 | Paul refers to people experiencing goodness as if it were something that could make someone full. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you yourselves fully experience goodness” | |
2553 | 15:14 | ext0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἀγαθωσύνης & γνώσεως | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of goodness and knowledge, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what is good … that is knowable” | |
2554 | 15:14 | wit1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having filled you with all knowledge” | |
2555 | 15:14 | fkec | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | πεπληρωμένοι πάσης γνώσεως | 1 | Here Paul refers to people having knowledge as if it were something that someone could befilled with. If it might be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “having all knowledge” | |
2556 | 15:14 | qhv3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | πάσης γνώσεως | 1 | Here, all is an exaggeration that Paul uses to emphasize how much knowledge these people have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “abundant knowledge” | |
2557 | 15:15 | j9yk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀπὸ μέρους | 1 | Here, in part refers to some parts of this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in some parts of this letter” | |
2558 | 15:15 | fuw3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ὡς ἐπαναμιμνῄσκων ὑμᾶς | 1 | This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which Paul wrote certain things in this letter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of reminding you” | |
2559 | 15:15 | n2gr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὴν χάριν τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God gave me” | |
2560 | 15:15 | nln5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὴν χάριν | 1 | Here, grace refers to God graciously choosing Paul to be an apostle. See how you translated the similar phrase in 12:3. | |
2561 | 15:16 | coxw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς τὸ εἶναί με | 1 | Here, in order for indicates that what follows is the purpose for which God graciously gave Paul authority, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that I would be” | |
2562 | 15:16 | zgo0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | λειτουργὸν | 1 | See how you translated servant in 13:4. | |
2563 | 15:16 | wiw1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἱερουργοῦντα τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα & ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Paul speaks of his preaching the gospel to the Gentiles as if he is a priest who serves the gospel by making an offering to God. He speaks of the Gentiles who become Christians as a result of his preaching as if they were the offering that he makes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel so that the Gentiles who believe” | |
2564 | 15:16 | hert | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | ἵνα | 1 | Here, so that indicates that what follows is the purpose for which Paul preaches the gospel to the Gentiles. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose that” | |
2565 | 15:16 | veeq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ἡ προσφορὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the offering that consists of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the offering, that is, the Gentiles,” | |
2566 | 15:16 | ah87 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ προσφορὰ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of offering, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is offered” | |
2567 | 15:16 | lztb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ἡγιασμένη ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit sanctified” | |
2568 | 15:17 | s7ns | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | ||
2569 | 15:17 | mtjb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 6:23. | |
2570 | 15:17 | lpc0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἔχω & καύχησιν | 1 | Here, Paul speaks of a boast as if it were an object someone can have. He means that he is rightfully able to boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I can boast” | |
2571 | 15:18 | b3q2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2572 | 15:18 | lu97 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives | οὐ & τολμήσω τι λαλεῖν, ὧν οὐ κατειργάσατο Χριστὸς δι’ ἐμοῦ | 1 | If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will only dare to speak what Christ produced through me” | |
2573 | 15:18 | by9s | εἰς ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Here, for indicates the result of what Christ produced through Paul. Use the natural way in your language to express a result. Alternate translation: “that resulted in the obedience of the Gentiles” | ||
2574 | 15:18 | zdk4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν & ἔργῳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of obedience and deed, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how the Gentiles obey … what is done” | |
2575 | 15:18 | yua7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὑπακοὴν ἐθνῶν | 1 | Here, obedience refers to the Gentiles obeying the command to repent and believe the gospel, which is part of the gospel message. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles to obey what God commanded in the gospel” | |
2576 | 15:18 | xds3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ | 1 | Here, word and deed could refer to: (1) what Paul had said and done that resulted in the Gentiles trusting in Christ. Alternate translation: “by my words and actions” (2) how the Gentiles displayed their obedience. Alternate translation: “by their words and actions” | |
2577 | 15:18 | pqtq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | λόγῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses the term word to describe what he had said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by my words” | |
2578 | 15:19 | oxsn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν δυνάμει σημείων καὶ τεράτων | 1 | This clause indicates an additional means by which Christ produced through Paul “the obedience of the Gentiles” that is referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and by means of the power of signs and wonders” | |
2579 | 15:19 | g8bk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys | σημείων καὶ τεράτων | 1 | This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word wonders describes the character of the miraculous signs that the Spirit enabled Paul to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of wonderful miraculous signs” | |
2580 | 15:19 | wxml | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν δυνάμει Πνεύματος Θεοῦ | 1 | This clause indicates that the Spirit of God empowered Paul’s “word and deed” and signs and wonders to result in non-Jews trusting in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “empowered by the Spirit of God” | |
2581 | 15:19 | c8ff | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ | 1 | The word Illyricum is the name of a Roman province that was close to Italy. | |
2582 | 15:19 | f60i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | πεπληρωκέναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of preaching the gospel throughout an entire area as if he had fulfilled the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have thoroughly proclaimed the gospel of Christ” | |
2583 | 15:20 | x9xm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | φιλοτιμούμενον εὐαγγελίζεσθαι | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I am counting it an honor to proclaim the gospel” | |
2584 | 15:20 | n5fm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | φιλοτιμούμενον | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of honor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “counting it honorable” | |
2585 | 15:20 | r9t1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | εὐαγγελίζεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπου ὠνομάσθη Χριστός | 1 | The clause not where Christ has been named indicates the kind of places where Paul would not proclaim the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the gospel in places other than where Christ has been named” | |
2586 | 15:20 | gpcl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὠνομάσθη Χριστός | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have named Christ” | |
2587 | 15:20 | i4sx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | ὠνομάσθη Χριστός | 1 | Here, has been named refers to speaking someone’s name. It does not refer to giving someone a name. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ’s name has been spoken” or “Christ’s name has been heard” | |
2588 | 15:20 | kt3r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | μὴ ἐπ’ ἀλλότριον θεμέλιον οἰκοδομῶ | 1 | Paul speaks of his work of preaching the gospel and making disciples as if he were building a house on a foundation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I might not continue doing the work that another man has already begun” or “I might not be like someone who builds upon another man’s foundation” | |
2589 | 15:21 | dcs1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | The word But introduces a contrast**. Here, But** indicates that what follows is the opposite of what Paul said in the last clause of the previous verse. Use the best way in your language to indicate a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “On the contrary,” | |
2590 | 15:21 | zyps | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | In this verse Paul quotes Scripture to state that he preaches the gospel to those who have never heard it, which he also stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Instead of doing that, I aspire to preach the gospel where it has not been preached before. Doing so is just as it is written” | |
2591 | 15:21 | rb5r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:17. | |
2592 | 15:21 | wy8k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since Paul is referring to something Isaiah wrote, you could indicate Isaiah as the subject. Alternate translation: “just as Isaiah wrote” | |
2593 | 15:21 | ocug | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks | οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν | 1 | This sentence is a quotation from Isaiah 52:15. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. | |
2594 | 15:21 | zbeu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism | οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὄψονται, καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκηκόασιν, συνήσουσιν | 1 | These two clauses mean the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that non-Jewish people will hear about the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Those who have not heard about him will certainly understand” | |
2595 | 15:21 | u8d6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἷς οὐκ ἀνηγγέλη περὶ αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Those to whom no one had reported concerning him” | |
2596 | 15:21 | m1f0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὄψονται & συνήσουσιν | 1 | Isaiah implies that the non-Jewish people who never heard about the Messiah will understand who the Messiah is and what he has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternative translation: “will see who the Messiah is … will understand who he is” | |
2597 | 15:21 | eihc | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὄψονται | 1 | Paul quotes Isaiah using see to refer to perceiving something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “will perceive” | |
2598 | 15:22 | f1fq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | The word Therefore indicates that what follows is a logical conclusion. Here, Therefore indicates that what follows is the result of Paul’s desire to preach the gospel in places where people have never heard it before. Use a natural way in your language for indicating result. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “For this reason” or “This is the reason why” | |
2599 | 15:22 | ex5j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | καὶ ἐνεκοπτόμην | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those things also prevented me” | |
2600 | 15:22 | uf9y | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, you is plural and refers to the believers in Rome to whom Paul was writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers who are in Rome” | |
2601 | 15:23 | hgiv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις, ἐπιποθείαν δὲ ἔχων τοῦ ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν | 1 | These clauses are two reasons why Paul hopes to see the Roman believers, as stated in the next verse. If you keep this verse and the next verse as one sentence in your translation, then you could use the most natural way in your language to indicate reasons. However, if you translate this verse and the next verse as separate sentences, then you could show that these clauses are reasons by indicating result in the next verse, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “because I no longer have a place in these regions, and because I have a longing from a considerable number of years to come to you” | |
2602 | 15:23 | b6kl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | μηκέτι τόπον ἔχων ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τούτοις | 1 | Paul uses this clause to imply that there were no more places in his area where people had not heard about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are no more places in these regions where people have not heard about Christ” | |
2603 | 15:23 | slf1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular | ὑμᾶς | 1 | See how you translated you in the previous verse. | |
2604 | 15:24 | si59 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | τὴν Σπανίαν | 1 | At that time, Spain was a Roman province west of Rome. | |
2605 | 15:24 | c6wq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | διαπορευόμενος | 1 | This clause indicates something that would happen at the same time as the next clause. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “while passing through” | |
2606 | 15:24 | ww2v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διαπορευόμενος | 1 | Paul implies that he would be passing through Rome on his way to Spain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “passing through Rome” | |
2607 | 15:24 | rzie | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ, ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for you to send me ahead to there, if you might first satisfy me for a while” | |
2608 | 15:24 | hlc3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι ἐκεῖ | 1 | Here, sent ahead refers to receiving supplies needed for a journey. This is a polite way of asking for food or money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to be given some provisions for my journey to there by you” | |
2609 | 15:24 | wg6d | ἐὰν ὑμῶν πρῶτον ἀπὸ μέρους ἐμπλησθῶ | 1 | Alternate translation: “if I might first enjoy being with you for a while” | ||
2610 | 15:25 | z3e5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | διακονῶν τοῖς ἁγίοις | 1 | This clause is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for him traveling to Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a purpose clause. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “for the purpose of ministering to the saints” | |
2611 | 15:26 | mjvr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul is going to minister to the saints in Jerusalem, as stated in the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation (without a comma following): “I am going to Jerusalem because” | |
2612 | 15:26 | vn1r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche | εὐδόκησαν & Μακεδονία καὶ Ἀχαΐα | 1 | Paul uses Macedonia and Achaia here to refer to the Christians who lived in those areas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were well-pleased” | |
2613 | 15:26 | n0fb | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | κοινωνίαν τινὰ ποιήσασθαι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of contribution, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to contribute a certain amount” | |
2614 | 15:27 | w5ap | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γάρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2615 | 15:27 | px7a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | εὐδόκησαν & ὀφειλέται εἰσὶν | 1 | The two occurrences of they in this verse refer to the Christians in Macedonia and Achaia, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the believers in Macedonia and Achaia were pleased … those people are obligated to” | |
2616 | 15:27 | tfz1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & αὐτοῖς | 1 | In this verse, them and their refer to the Christians in Jerusalem. If it might be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers … their … those Jewish believers” | |
2617 | 15:27 | ipij | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason the believers in Macedonia and Achaia are obligated to help the believers in Jerusalem. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” | |
2618 | 15:27 | en7l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul uses if as if the rest of the verse were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is true that” | |
2619 | 15:28 | jj6t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τοῦτο | 1 | Here, this refers to Paul traveling to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this trip to Jerusalem” | |
2620 | 15:28 | zz8u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | σφραγισάμενος αὐτοῖς τὸν καρπὸν τοῦτον | 1 | Paul speaks of the money he is taking to Jerusalem as if it werefruit, and he speaks of his delivery of the money as if he were sealing it for the poor believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having safely delivered this offering to them” | |
2621 | 15:28 | gz16 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | δι’ ὑμῶν | 1 | Paul uses you here to refer to the place where those people lived, which is Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through the area where you live” or “through where you are in Rome” | |
2622 | 15:28 | ywlm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Σπανίαν | 1 | See how you translated Spain in 15:24. | |
2623 | 15:29 | wod6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ, ἐλεύσομαι | 1 | This could mean: (1) Paul and the believers in Rome will experience Christ’s blessing. Alternate translation: “I will come and we will experience the fullness of the blessing of Christ” (2) Paul will bring Christ’s blessing to the believers in Rome. Alternate translation: “I will bring the fullness of the blessing of Christ” | |
2624 | 15:29 | ylq8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of fullness and blessing, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the full experience of how Christ blesses” | |
2625 | 15:29 | st5e | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of abundantly experiencing the blessing of Christ as if it were something that a person could receive in a full amount. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the abundant experience of the blessing of Christ” | |
2626 | 15:30 | v9iy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
2627 | 15:30 | scg1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ διὰ τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | The two occurrences of by in this verse indicate that what follows each one are the bases for Paul to urge his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of our Lord Jesus Christ and on the basis of the love of the Spirit” | |
2628 | 15:30 | wq9l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | This could refer to: (1) the love that the Spirit gives to Christians. Alternate translation: “the love from the Spirit” (2) the love that belongs to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit’s love” | |
2629 | 15:30 | a5g4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ἀγάπης τοῦ Πνεύματος & ταῖς προσευχαῖς | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of love and prayers, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you love from the Spirit … what you pray” | |
2630 | 15:30 | fy1v | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συναγωνίσασθαί μοι | 1 | Paul speaks of praying fervently as if it were a struggle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “to pray intensely together with me” or “to pray intensely with me as if striving together” | |
2631 | 15:31 | q3v8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἵνα & καὶ | 1 | Both occurrences of so that in this verse could indicate: (1) the contents of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that … and that” (2) the purposes for praying. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” | |
2632 | 15:31 | u7st | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God might deliver me from the disobedient ones” | |
2633 | 15:31 | gq4x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῶν ἀπειθούντων | 1 | Here, the disobedient ones refers to the Jews in Judea who disobeyed God by refusing to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the unbelieving Jews” or “those Jews who do not trust in Jesus” | |
2634 | 15:31 | nw5h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism | διακονία μου | 1 | Here, my service refers to the money that Paul was going to bring to the poor believers in Jerusalem from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. This is a polite way of referring to bringing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “the money I bring” | |
2635 | 15:31 | li3i | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ | 1 | Here, for Jerusalem means “for the poor of the saints in Jerusalem,” as mentioned in 15:26. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the poor saints in Jerusalem” | |
2636 | 15:32 | fe4d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἵνα | 1 | See how you translated so that in the previous verse. | |
2637 | 15:32 | erby | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν χαρᾷ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of joy, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being joyful” | |
2638 | 15:32 | ekou | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | θελήματος Θεοῦ | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:10. | |
2639 | 15:32 | sgcl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | συναναπαύσωμαι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and might refresh myself together with” | |
2640 | 15:33 | s947 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe God who gives peace. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” | |
2641 | 15:33 | ubtx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τῆς εἰρήνης | 1 | See how you translated peace in 1:7. | |
2642 | 16:intro | qy96 | 0 | Romans 16 General NotesStructure and Formatting
Special Concepts in this ChapterLetter writing and sendingIn this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Tertius mentions that he is the scribe writing the letter for Paul (16:22). Paul begins this chapter by recommending Phoebe to the believers in Rome who receive this letter. This could indicate that Phoebe was the messenger who delivered the letter to them. GreetingsIn this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letters. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In 16:3–16 and 21–23 Paul includes greetings to and from people whom he and the Romans knew. Express these greetings in a natural form in your language. | |||
2643 | 16:1 | sg6a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | συνίστημι | 1 | The pronoun I here and throughout this chapter refers to Paul, except for 16:22. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, commend” | |
2644 | 16:1 | sry4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Φοίβην | 1 | The word Phoebe is the name of a woman. | |
2645 | 16:1 | q86q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | In this verse and throughout this chapter our refers to Paul and his Christian readers, so our would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. | |
2646 | 16:1 | b81z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν ἀδελφὴν | 1 | Paul speaks of Phoebe as if she were the physical sister of him and his Christian readers. He means she has a brother-sister relationship with all Christians because she trusts in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our spiritual sister” | |
2647 | 16:1 | mbn3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διάκονον | 1 | See how you translated the abstract noun servant in 13:4. | |
2648 | 16:1 | q669 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Κενχρεαῖς | 1 | The word Cenchrea was the name of a city in Greece. See how Cenchrea is translated in Acts 18:18. | |
2649 | 16:2 | cwx1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | Here, in the Lord refers to Phoebe being a fellow believer in the Lord Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as someone who believes in the Lord Jesus” | |
2650 | 16:2 | yic3 | ἀξίως τῶν ἁγίων | 1 | Alternate translation: “in the way that believers should welcome other believers” | ||
2651 | 16:2 | g7of | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | καὶ | 1 | Here, and indicates that what follows is a second purpose for Paul to commend Phoebe to the believers in Rome. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in order that you” | |
2652 | 16:2 | qp4w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | παραστῆτε αὐτῇ | 1 | Here, stand by refers to helping someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might assist her” | |
2653 | 16:2 | i0fm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows is the reason why Paul wants the Roman believers to help Phoebe. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “The reason I want you to do this is that” | |
2654 | 16:2 | inh1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | καὶ γὰρ αὐτὴ προστάτις πολλῶν ἐγενήθη καὶ ἐμοῦ αὐτοῦ | 2 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of benefactor, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “For she has also benefited many, and myself as well” | |
2655 | 16:3-16 | na1k | 0 | General Information:As was customary in his culture, in 16:3–16 Paul begins to conclude the letter by extending greetings to the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I enthusiastically ask to be remembered to” or “I send regards to” | |||
2656 | 16:3 | xigr | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | ἀσπάσασθε | 1 | Greet here and throughout 16:3–16 is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Please give my greetings to” | |
2657 | 16:3 | c5lg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Πρίσκαν καὶ Ἀκύλαν | 1 | The word Prisca is the name of a woman who is also called “Priscilla” in Acts 18:2. Aquila is the name of her husband. | |
2658 | 16:3 | fsk1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοὺς συνεργούς μου | 1 | Here, fellow workers refers to people who work together with Paul to tell other people about Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who worked with me to preach the gospel” | |
2659 | 16:3 | uo3a | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, in Christ Jesus could refer to: (1) the kind of work that Prisca and Aquila did with Paul. Alternate translation: “in the service of Christ Jesus” (2) being united with Christ, as this phrase is used in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1–2, 39; and 15:17. Alternate translation: “who are united to Christ Jesus” | |
2660 | 16:4 | ilnn | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς μου, τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν, οἷς οὐκ ἐγὼ μόνος εὐχαριστῶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν | 1 | This verse interrupts the main part of the sentence in 16:3–5 in order to give further information about Prisca and Aquila. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse as its own sentence and repeat the main verb of the previous verse in the next verse, as in the UST. | |
2661 | 16:4 | fye8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom | τὸν ἑαυτῶν τράχηλον ὑπέθηκαν | 1 | This phrase refers to doing something that would put someone in danger of being executed. Romans often executed people by chopping their heads off at the neck with an axe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “risked having their heads chopped off by the Roman authorities” | |
2662 | 16:4 | xmf8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐγὼ & εὐχαριστῶ | 1 | Here Paul speaks of expressing thanks as if they were something that he could give to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am thankful” | |
2663 | 16:5 | i32d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | καὶ τὴν κατ’ οἶκον αὐτῶν ἐκκλησίαν | 1 | This clause continues the sentence that Paul began in 16:3 and interrupted in the previous verse. If you made the previous verse into its own sentence, then here you will need to add the main verb from 16:3. Alternate translation: “and greet the church based in their house” | |
2664 | 16:5 | d6i0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | οἶκον αὐτῶν | 1 | The pronoun their here refers to Prisca and Aquila. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of Prisca and Aquila” | |
2665 | 16:5 | qqdg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | ἀσπάσασθε | 1 | See how you translated Greet in 16:3. | |
2666 | 16:5 | bn9z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἐπαίνετον | 1 | The word Epaenetus is the name of a man. | |
2667 | 16:5 | d1f1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀσίας εἰς Χριστόν | 1 | Paul speaks of Epaenetus as if he were fruit that he had harvested. He means that Epaenetus was the first person in Asia who believed in Christ as a result of Paul’s preaching. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first person in Asia to believe in Jesus” | |
2668 | 16:6 | ew2z | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Μαρίαν | 1 | The word Mary is the name of a woman. Several women in the Bible are named Mary because it was a common Jewish name. | |
2669 | 16:7 | tzk4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἀνδρόνικον | 1 | The word Andronicus is the name of a man. | |
2670 | 16:7 | z9uk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἰουνίαν | 1 | Junias could refer to: (1) a woman named Junia, in which case Andronicus and Junias might be a married couple like Prisca and Aquila. See the UST. (2) the shortened form of Junianus, a man’s name, which is less likely. | |
2671 | 16:7 | ycr0 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοὺς συγγενεῖς μου | 1 | Here, kinsmen could refer to: (1) Jewish Christians. Alternate translation: “my Jewish Christian kinsmen” (2) Christian relatives of Paul. Alternate translation: “my Christian relatives” | |
2672 | 16:7 | gce3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | οἵτινές εἰσιν ἐπίσημοι ἐν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles know very well” | |
2673 | 16:7 | nvw5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | οἳ | 1 | Here, who indicates that what follows is further information about Andronicus and Junias. It is not information about the apostles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation (as a new sentence): “These two people” | |
2674 | 16:7 | ylvm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Here, in Christ refers to being united with Christ. See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 3:24. | |
2675 | 16:8 | h976 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἀμπλιᾶτον | 1 | The word Ampliatus is the name of a man. | |
2676 | 16:8 | alh2 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | See how you translated the same use of this phrase in 16:2. | |
2677 | 16:9 | bd5l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Οὐρβανὸν & Στάχυν | 1 | The words Urbanus and Stachys are names of men. | |
2678 | 16:9 | if0q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν συνεργὸν ἡμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | See how you translated a similar phrase in 16:3. | |
2679 | 16:10 | k55t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἀπελλῆν & Ἀριστοβούλου | 1 | The words Apelles and Aristobulus are names of men. | |
2680 | 16:10 | q96n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸν δόκιμον ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Christ has approved” | |
2681 | 16:11 | gt6r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἡρῳδίωνα & Ναρκίσσου | 1 | The words Herodion and Narcissus are names of men. | |
2682 | 16:11 | iifk | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τὸν συγγενῆ | 1 | See how you translated “kinsmen” in 16:7. | |
2683 | 16:11 | ket9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | Here, in the Lord refers to being united to Christ and has the same meaning as “in Christ” in 16:7 and 3:24. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “united to the Lord Jesus” | |
2684 | 16:12 | sq9n | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Τρύφαιναν & Τρυφῶσαν & Περσίδα | 1 | The words Tryphaena, Tryphosa, and Persis are names of women. | |
2685 | 16:12 | vkh4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Κυρίῳ | -1 | See how you translated a similar use of in the Lord in 16:3. | |
2686 | 16:13 | zmf4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ῥοῦφον | 1 | The word Rufus is the name of a man. See how this name is translated in Mark 15:21. | |
2687 | 16:13 | zy3x | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | τὸν ἐκλεκτὸν ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has elected” | |
2688 | 16:13 | hqf6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ | 1 | Paul speaks of the mother of Rufus as if she were his own mother. He means that she treated him as if he were her own child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his mother, whom I also think of as my mother” | |
2689 | 16:14 | dwh9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἀσύγκριτον, Φλέγοντα, Ἑρμῆν, Πατροβᾶν, Ἑρμᾶν | 1 | These are names of five men. | |
2690 | 16:14 | ck2w | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφούς | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
2691 | 16:14 | il54 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς ἀδελφούς | 1 | Here, with them implies that these people meet together as a church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the brothers who meet with them” | |
2692 | 16:15 | ye9j | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Φιλόλογον & Νηρέα & Ὀλυμπᾶν | 1 | The words Philologus, Nereus, and Olympas are names of men. | |
2693 | 16:15 | n2rx | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Ἰουλίαν | 1 | The word Julia is the name of a woman. She was probably the wife of Philologus. | |
2694 | 16:15 | j4uu | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντας ἁγίους | 1 | See how you translated with them in the previous verse. | |
2695 | 16:16 | nxka | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative | ἀσπάσασθε | 1 | See how you translated Greet in 16:3. | |
2696 | 16:16 | g2z1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | φιλήματι ἁγίῳ | 1 | Here, a holy kiss describes a kiss that believers would give to other believers (that is why it is holy). In Paul’s culture, this was an appropriate way to greet someone with whom one was very close, such as a family member or a good friend. You could use a greeting that is used by close friends or family members and clarify that here it is used in a holy or Christian way. Alternate translation: “with a Christian hug” or “in warm way that is appropriate for fellow believers” | |
2697 | 16:16 | t1q4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς αἱ ἐκκλησίαι πᾶσαι τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | All here could refer to: (1) all the churches that were in the area where Paul was working when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ in this region” (2) all the churches that Paul had authority over or represented. Alternate translation: “All the churches of Christ that I represent” | |
2698 | 16:17 | wx6r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφοί | 1 | See how you translated this word in 1:13. | |
2699 | 16:17 | ztv5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὰς διχοστασίας & τὰ σκάνδαλα & τὴν διδαχὴν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of divisions, obstacles, and teaching, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what divides … what obstructs … what is taught” | |
2700 | 16:17 | n59l | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τοὺς τὰς διχοστασίας καὶ τὰ σκάνδαλα & ποιοῦντας | 1 | This phrase refers to causing believers to argue with each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. | |
2701 | 16:17 | atil | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | τὰ σκάνδαλα | 1 | ||
2702 | 16:17 | j9x7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | παρὰ τὴν διδαχὴν ἣν ὑμεῖς ἐμάθετε | 1 | This clause could refer to: (1) the traps. Alternate translation: “which are contrary to the teaching that you have learned” (2) the means by which these people are causing divisions and traps. Alternate translation: “by doing what is contrary to the teaching that you have learned” | |
2703 | 16:17 | b318 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ἐκκλίνετε ἀπ’ αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, turn away refers to avoiding someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “avoid them completely” | |
2704 | 16:18 | yij5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that what follows in this verse explains what Paul said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact,” | |
2705 | 16:18 | fpvs | rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns | τοιοῦτοι | 1 | Here, these refers to “those who are causing division and traps,” who are mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “such as those causing such divisions and traps” | |
2706 | 16:18 | azob | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Χριστῷ οὐ δουλεύουσιν | 1 | Here, enslaved to our Lord Christ refers to living under the control of our Lord Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not living in submission to our Lord Christ” | |
2707 | 16:18 | ea6h | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ | 1 | Paul is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but they are enslaved to their own stomach” | |
2708 | 16:18 | nxn4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τῇ ἑαυτῶν κοιλίᾳ | 1 | Here, stomach could refer to: (1) physical desires, especially the desires to eat or drink. Alternate translation: “to their own physical desires” (2) pleasing oneself. Alternate translation: “to their own pleasure” | |
2709 | 16:18 | gddw | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | διὰ τῆς χρηστολογίας καὶ εὐλογίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of speech and flattery, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “through speaking smoothly and flatteringly” | |
2710 | 16:18 | c2je | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy | τὰς καρδίας | 1 | See how you translated “heart” in 1:21. | |
2711 | 16:19 | vqml | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | For indicates that what follows this word explains what came before it. For here indicates that was follows is one reason why Paul’s readers should obey the command to “watch out for” and “turn away from” false teachers. Use the most natural form in your language for indicating a reason. Alternate translation: “Watch out for and turn away from these people since” | |
2712 | 16:19 | imc7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification | ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ, εἰς πάντας ἀφίκετο | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers’ obedience as if it were a person who could go to people. He means that many people had heard about their obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your obedience has been heard about by everyone” | |
2713 | 16:19 | o1b9 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἡ & ὑμῶν ὑπακοὴ & τὸ ἀγαθόν & τὸ κακόν | 1 | See how you translated obedience in 5:19 and good and evil in 7:19. | |
2714 | 16:19 | gj2r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole | πάντας | 1 | Here, everyone is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show that many believers had heard about the obedience of the Roman believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “very many people” | |
2715 | 16:20 | bnni | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὁ & Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 15:33. | |
2716 | 16:20 | s3cq | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | συντρίψει τὸν Σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the Roman believers having victory over Satan as if they would crush him under their feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will cause you to have complete victory over Satan” | |
2717 | 16:20 | qpr7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τάχει. ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of haste and grace, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “hastily. May the Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” | |
2718 | 16:20 | btor | ἐν τάχει | 1 | The phrase translated as with haste can also refer to something happening after a short time period. Alternate translation: “in a short time” or “soon” | ||
2719 | 16:20 | oo2r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing | ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν | 1 | As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Roman believers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” | |
2720 | 16:21 | z4g3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ συνεργός μου | 1 | See how you translated the similar phrase in 16:3. | |
2721 | 16:21 | ku15 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Λούκιος & Ἰάσων & Σωσίπατρος | 1 | The words Lucius, Jason, and Sosipater are names of men. | |
2722 | 16:21 | km7u | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | οἱ συγγενεῖς μου | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 16:7. | |
2723 | 16:21 | wvzj | ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς | 1 | As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you” | ||
2724 | 16:22 | pijj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν | 1 | This clause means that Tertius wrote down the words that Paul told him to write in this letter. In ancient times it was common for people to use scribes to physically write dictated letters for them. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “I, Tertius, am the person who wrote down what Paul told me to write in this epistle” | |
2725 | 16:22 | g8li | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person | ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς ἐγὼ, Τέρτιος, ὁ γράψας τὴν ἐπιστολὴν, ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | I here refers to Tertius, who writes this verse. Unlike elsewhere in this letter, it does not refer to Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the third person in this verse. Alternate translation: “Tertius, who wrote this epistle, greets you in the Lord” | |
2726 | 16:22 | xu3q | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Τέρτιος | 1 | The word Tertius is the name of a man. | |
2727 | 16:22 | nx4g | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | See how you translated the similar use of in the Lord in 16:2. | |
2728 | 16:23 | sw7r | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names | Γάϊος & Ἔραστος & Κούαρτος | 1 | The words Gaius, Erastus, and Quartus are names of men. | |
2729 | 16:23 | j9u7 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ ξένος μου, καὶ ὅλης τῆς ἐκκλησίας | 1 | This phrase indicates that the home of Gaius was where Paul and his fellow believers gathered to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who hosts me and the whole church in his house” | |
2730 | 16:23 | m5hg | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | ὁ οἰκονόμος | 1 | Here, steward refers to the person who takes care of the money for the city in which Paul is staying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the treasurer” or “the one who administrates the finances” | |
2731 | 16:23 | fnet | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations | ἀδελφός | 1 | Here, brother refers to a fellow Christian. See how you translated brother in 14:10. | |
2732 | 16:24 | ct9t | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants | Ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ χριστοῦ μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν. Ἀμήν | 1 | This verse is not in the best earliest manuscripts. It seems to be an accidental repetition of the last part of 16:20. It has been included in the ULT, but it is marked off with square brackets (\[ \]) at the beginning and end. If possible, do not include this addition in your translation. | |
2733 | 16:25 | xma1 | 0 | 16:25–27 are one long sentence. If you divide this sentence into shorter sentences, then you will need to repeat part of 16:27 in 16:25, as the UST does. | |||
2734 | 16:25 | v71l | δὲ | 1 | Now here marks the closing section of the letter. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you could use it here. | ||
2735 | 16:25 | xgkv | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | τῷ & δυναμένῳ ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι | 1 | Here, the one refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to establish you” | |
2736 | 16:25 | pp5k | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor | ὑμᾶς στηρίξαι | 1 | Here Paul speaks of God strengthening a person’s faith as if God were establishing that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to make your faith strong” | |
2737 | 16:25 | kmw1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the gospel message that he preached. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel that I preach” | |
2738 | 16:25 | yprj | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Paul is using the possessive form to describe the preaching that is about Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the preaching about Jesus Christ” | |
2739 | 16:25 | wyyl | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | τὸ κήρυγμα & ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of preaching, revelation, and mystery, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what is preached … what is revealed of what is mysterious” | |
2740 | 16:25 | vyj4 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit | κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου | 1 | Here, according to indicates that what follows is what Paul’s preaching is based on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the revelation of the mystery” | |
2741 | 16:25 | s5ky | rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown | μυστηρίου | 1 | Here Paul uses the word mystery to refer to God’s plan to save people, which was revealed in the gospel. This does not mean that the idea is hard to understand, but rather, that God had not yet revealed it to people. If your language would not use mystery to refer to something that was concealed but has now been revealed, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “of this concealed message” | |
2742 | 16:25 | n6c1 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν μυστηρίου χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the mystery that God has now revealed, yet had kept secret for long ages” | |
2743 | 16:25 | bgqm | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | χρόνοις αἰωνίοις σεσιγημένου | 1 | This clause gives further information about the mystery, which is also the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “which is what was kept secret for long ages” | |
2744 | 16:26 | d7r5 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish | φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν | 1 | This clause gives further information about “the mystery,” which is also the “gospel” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to make this connection clear. Alternate translation: “but now that mystery has been revealed” | |
2745 | 16:26 | kgs8 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | φανερωθέντος δὲ νῦν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but now God has revealed” | |
2746 | 16:26 | vrul | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure | διά τε Γραφῶν προφητικῶν, κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως, εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη γνωρισθέντος | 1 | The word translated as and here indicates that the following four phrases are connected to the fifth phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and having been made known through the prophetic writings, according to the command of the eternal God, to the obedience of faith, to all the nations” | |
2747 | 16:26 | efyy | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | Γραφῶν προφητικῶν & ἐπιταγὴν τοῦ αἰωνίου Θεοῦ εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of writings, command, obedience, and faith, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what was written by the prophets … what the eternal God commanded, that we should obey as an act of faith” | |
2748 | 16:26 | fbr6 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal | εἰς ὑπακοὴν πίστεως | 1 | Here, to indicates that this is a purpose clause. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the obedience of faith” | |
2749 | 16:26 | lc6d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession | ὑπακοὴν πίστεως | 1 | See how you translated this phrase in 1:5. | |
2750 | 16:26 | cvi3 | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive | γνωρισθέντος | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having made known” | |
2751 | 16:27 | kuyu | μόνῳ σοφῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Alternate translation: “to God who alone is wise” | ||
2752 | 16:27 | ua9d | rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns | ᾧ ἡ δόξα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word glory, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “may people glorify him” |